Yamaha RX Z7 Owners Manual

RX-Z7 to the manual 54b4a914-5658-4178-9a5d-a3fa5a29b90e

User Manual: Yamaha RX-Z7 Owners Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 178

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

RX-Z7_UC-cv.fm Page 1 Monday, September 1, 2008 8:23 PM

AV Receiver

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Printed in Malaysia

WQ21580

OWNER’S MANUAL
English

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

9
•

Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.

Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.

11
12

13
14

Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat
registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers)
that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with
one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the
third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug
does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold
with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use
caution when moving the cart/apparatus
combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing
is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any
way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid
has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the
apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not
operate normally, or has been dropped.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions
contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications
not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority,
granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories
and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables.
Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all
installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void
your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with
the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B”
digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a
reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a
residential environment will not result in harmful interference with
other electronic devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not
installed and used according to the instructions found in the users
manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other
electronic devices.

2 En

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is
found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by
turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the
problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by
the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or
fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the
antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the
lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,
please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of
product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please
contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe
Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by
Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

Caution: Read this before operating your unit.
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha
will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power
plug can be reached easily.

17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common
operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press B MASTER ON/OFF to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the
main room, Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4 and then disconnect
the AC power plug from the AC wall outlet.
19 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or like.
20 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can
cause hearing loss.
21 When replacing the batteries, be sure to use batteries of the
same type. Danger of explosion may happen if batteries are
incorrectly replaced.

WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,
it is not disconnected from the AC power source even
if you turn off this unit by B MASTER ON/OFF. In
this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small
quantity of power.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.

3 En

Contents
INTRODUCTION

BASIC OPERATION

Features....................................................................7

Playback ................................................................ 42

Supplied accessories .................................................. 7
Logos and trademarks................................................ 8

Basic procedure ....................................................... 42
Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT)...... 43
Selecting the multi-channel input component ......... 43
Selecting the HDMI OUT jack................................ 43
Using your headphones ........................................... 44
Muting the audio output .......................................... 44
Displaying the input source information ................. 44
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 45

Getting started.........................................................9
Quick start guide................................................... 10
Preparation: Check the items................................... 10
Step 1: Set up your speakers.................................... 11
Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other
components.......................................................... 12
Step 3: Turn on the power and start playback ......... 13

PREPARATION
Connections ........................................................... 14
Rear panel ................................................................ 14
Placing speakers ...................................................... 15
Connecting speakers ................................................ 17
Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 20
Information on HDMI™.......................................... 21
Audio and video signal flow.................................... 22
Connecting a TV monitor or projector .................... 23
Connecting other components ................................. 24
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel .... 29
Connecting the FM and AM antennas..................... 29
Connecting the power cable .................................... 30
Setting the speaker impedance and display
language............................................................... 31
Turning this unit on and off..................................... 31
Front panel display .................................................. 32
Using the remote control ......................................... 33
Opening and closing the front panel door ............... 34

Optimizing the speaker setting for your
listening room .................................................... 35
Before starting the automatic setup ......................... 35
Quick automatic setup ............................................. 35
Basic automatic setup .............................................. 36
Advanced automatic setup....................................... 38
Reviewing and reloading the automatic setup
parameters ........................................................... 40

Sound field programs ........................................... 46
Selecting sound field programs ............................... 46
Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode............................... 52
Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 52

Using audio features ............................................. 53
Selecting decoders ................................................... 53
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 54
Adjusting the tonal quality ...................................... 54
Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 55
Selecting the recording source................................. 55

FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 56
Overview ................................................................. 56
FM/AM tuning operations ....................................... 56
Preset FM/AM stations............................................ 57

Using HD Radio™ features
(U.S.A. model only)........................................... 59
Selecting HD Radio™ audio programs ................... 59
Using the iTunes Tagging feature ........................... 59
Displaying HD Radio™ information ...................... 60

XM® Satellite Radio tuning ................................ 61
Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ............... 61
Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 62
XM Satellite Radio operations ................................ 62
Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels ...... 63
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...... 64

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning......................... 65
Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner .................... 65
Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
subscription ......................................................... 66
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations ...................... 66
Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
preset channels .................................................... 68
Setting the Parental Lock......................................... 69
Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
information .......................................................... 70

Using Bluetooth™ components ........................... 71
Pairing the Bluetooth™ receiver and
your Bluetooth component .................................. 71
Playback of the Bluetooth™ component................. 71

Music Content menu ............................................ 72
Music Content menu operations .............................. 72

Using iPod™.......................................................... 73
iPod menu tree ......................................................... 73
Controlling iPod™ .................................................. 74

Using USB and network features ........................ 75
USB and network menu tree.................................... 75
Navigating USB and network menus ...................... 76
Using a USB storage device or a
USB portable audio player .................................. 77
Using a PC server or Yamaha MCX-2000 .............. 77
Using the Internet Radio.......................................... 78
Using the Rhapsody® service
(U.S.A. model only) ............................................ 78
Using shortcut buttons ............................................. 79

4 En

ADVANCED OPERATION
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu................. 81

INTRODUCTION

GUI menu overview ................................................ 83
GUI menu operations............................................... 84
Stereo/Surround ....................................................... 85
Input Select .............................................................. 90
Music Content.......................................................... 92
Setup (Speaker)........................................................ 93
Setup (Volume)........................................................ 95
Setup (Sound) .......................................................... 96
Setup (Video)........................................................... 99
Setup (HDMI)........................................................ 101
Setup (Network)..................................................... 102
Setup (Multi Zone) ................................................ 103
Setup (Option) ....................................................... 105
Language................................................................ 107

PREPARATION

Saving and recalling the system settings
(System Memory)............................................ 108
Saving the system settings ..................................... 108
Loading the system settings................................... 109
Using examples...................................................... 110

BASIC
OPERATION

Controlling this unit by using
the Web browser (Web Control Center) ...... 112
Remote control features ..................................... 113

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Controlling this unit, a TV,
or other components .......................................... 113
Customizing the remote control............................. 115
Setting the backlight mode
of the remote control ......................................... 116
Setting remote control codes ................................. 116
Programming codes from other remote controls ... 118
Changing source names in the display window..... 119
Macro programming features ................................ 120
Clearing configurations ......................................... 122
Simplified remote control ...................................... 123

Using multi-zone configuration ......................... 124

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION

Connecting the Zone 2, Zone 3 and
Zone 4 components ........................................... 124
Controlling Zone 2, Zone 3 or Zone 4................... 127
Using the party mode............................................. 129

Advanced setup ................................................... 130
Using the advanced setup menu ............................ 130

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Troubleshooting .................................................. 133
Resetting the system ........................................... 147
Operation modes of front panel controls.......... 148
Glossary ............................................................... 149
Sound field program information ..................... 152
Parametric equalizer information..................... 153
Specifications....................................................... 154
Index .................................................................... 156

APPENDIX (separate booklet)
Front panel .............................................................. 2
Remote control........................................................ 3
Sound output in each sound field program .......... 4
List of remote control codes................................... 6
Information about software................................. 11

5 En

What you can do with the GUI menu
By configuring the parameters in the GUI menu of this unit, you can adjust a variety of system settings suited for your
listening environment. The following is a brief description of some of the useful menus you can configure in the GUI
menu. For more detailed information, see “Graphical user interface (GUI) menu” (page 81).
Fine adjusting the speaker settings
In case speaker settings configured by automatic setup
does not match your listening environment, you can
configure them manually.
Setup → Speaker (page 93)
Specifying the muting type
In case you do not want to fully mute audio when you
receive a call while watching your favorite TV program,
you can use this menu to specify the muting level.
Setup → Volume → Muting Type (page 95)
Specifying the initial volume level
By adjusting this parameter, you can automatically control
the initial volume level regardless of the recording level of
the audio source.
Setup → Volume → Initial Volume (page 95)
Adjusting the dynamic range
The dynamic range is the difference between the
minimum and maximum amplitude. The higher the
dynamic range, the more accurate the sound reproduction
for bitstream signals. You can adjust the dynamic range
for speakers and headphones individually. Also, you can
use the adaptive dynamic range control feature to adjust
the dynamic range automatically in conjunction with the
volume level.
Setup → Sound → Dynamic Range (page 96)
Setup → Volume → Adaptive DRC (page 95)
Adjusting the audio and video synchronization
Sometimes, depending on your video source component,
video is delayed relative to audio due to processing
problems. In this case, you need to manually adjust the
audio delay to keep it synchronized with the video. If you
connect the video source component to this unit using an
HDMI connection and your component supports the
LIPSYNC feature, you can adjust the audio/video
synchronization automatically.
Setup → Sound → Lipsync (page 98)
Changing input/output assignment
In case the initial input/output assignments do not
correspond to your needs, you can rearrange them
according to your component to be connected to this unit.
You can also edit the input name to be displayed in the
front panel or in the GUI screen as necessary.
Setup → Option → I/O Assignment (page 105)
Setup → Option → Input Rename (page 105)

6 En

Fixing the volume difference between input
sources
The sound output level may vary depending on the audio
source components connected to this unit. In this case, you
can reduce or increase the output level of each input
source using this feature.
Input Select → (input source) → (submenu) →
Volume Trim (page 90)
Setting the background video for discrete multichannel input
If you want to enjoy video images in combination with
discrete multi-channel audio input, configure this setting
to specify the video input source. For example, to view
DVD video images while listening to the music sources
from a multi-format player or an external decoder, set this
setting to “DVD”.
Input Select → MULTI CH → (submenu) → BGV
(page 91)
Adjusting the brightness of the front panel
display
You can make the front panel display darker or brighter by
configuring this setting.
Setup → Option → Display Set → Front Panel Display →
Dimmer (page 105)
Turning on or off the short message display
Each time you operate this unit using controls on the front
panel or remote control keys, this unit displays short
messages on the video monitor. If you want to turn off the
short message display, select “Off” in this setting (Initial
factory setting is “On”).
Setup → Option → Display Set → Short Message
(page 105)
Setting the amount of time to display GUI screen
information
You can set the amount of time to display playback
information in the GUI screen after you perform a certain
operation.
Setup → Option → Display Set → Playback Screen
(page 106)
Protecting the setup values
After you have configured the sound field program
parameters and other system settings, you can use this
feature to prevent accidental changes to those setup
values.
Setup → Option → Memory Guard (page 105)

FEATURES

Features
◆ Minimum RMS output power (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω)
Front: 140 W + 140 W
Center: 140 W
Surround: 140 W + 140 W
Surround back: 140 W + 140 W

Various input/output connectors
◆ HDMI (IN x 5, OUT x 2), Component video (IN x 3, OUT x 1),
S-video (IN x 6, OUT x 3), Composite video (IN x 6, OUT x 5),
Coaxial digital audio (IN x 3), Optical digital audio
(IN x 5, OUT x 2), Analog audio (IN x 10, OUT x 3)
◆ Speaker out (7-channel), Pre out (7-channel), Subwoofer out,
Presence out, Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 out
◆ Discrete multi-channel input (6 or 8-channel)

Sound field programs
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆

Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound fields
CINEMA DSP 3D
Compressed Music Enhancer mode
Virtual CINEMA DSP
SILENT CINEMA

Digital audio decoders
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆

Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio decoder
Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS 96/24 decoder
Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder
DTS NEO:6 decoder
Neural-THX Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
SRS Circle Surround II decoder (U.S.A. model only)

◆
◆
◆

◆

– High refresh rate and high resolution video signals capability
– High definition digital audio format signals capability
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System) licensed
by Digital Content Protection, LLC.
Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion (composite video
↔ S-video ↔ component video → HDMI digital video) capability
for monitor out
Analog and HDMI video up/down: 480i(576i) → 480p(576p)/720p/
1080i/1080p, 480p(576p) → 720p/1080i/1080p, 720p →
480p(576p)/1080i/1080p, 1080i → 480p(576p)/720p/1080p, 1080p
→ 480p(576p)/720p/1080i
HDMI image quality adjustment feature

DOCK terminal
◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as
YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such
as YBA-10, sold separately)

USB and network features
◆ USB port to connect a USB storage device, USB Hard disc drive, or
USB portable audio player
◆ NETWORK port to connect a PC and Yamaha MCX-2000 or access
the Internet Radio and Rhapsody® (U.S.A. model only) via LAN
◆ DHCP automatic or manual network configuration
◆ Web control capability of this unit by using a Web browser

Automatic speaker setup features
◆ Advanced YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) for
automatic speaker setup
◆ Multi-point measurement feature for multiple listening positions
◆ Speaker angle measurement feature
◆ Parametric equalizer select feature

Radio tuners

Other features

◆ FM/AM tuning capability, 40-station preset tuning
◆ HD Radio™ digital broadcast reception capability (U.S.A. model
only)
◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using XM Mini-Tuner and
Home Dock, sold separately)
◆ SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning capability (using SiriusConnect
tuner, sold separately)

◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ GUI (graphic user interface) menus that allow you to optimize this
unit to suit your individual audiovisual system
◆ Music Content menu that allows you to easily navigate music content
menus of your iPod, USB component, Internet Radio, etc.
◆ PURE DIRECT mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources
◆ Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability
◆ Adaptive DSP effect level controlling capability
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes, learning and macro
capability
◆ ZONE 2/ZONE 3/ZONE 4 custom installation facility
◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and
ZONE2/ZONE3/ZONE4 using ZONE CONTROLS
◆ System Memory capability for saving and recalling multiple system
parameter settings
◆ Sleep timer for each zone

HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition video as
well as multi-channel digital audio based on HDMI version 1.3a
(HDMI is licensed by HDMI Licensing, LLC.)
– Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync) information
capability
– Deep Color video signal (30/36 bit) transmission capability
– “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability

Supplied accessories
Check that you received all of the following parts.
❏
❏
❏
❏

Remote control
Simplified remote control
Batteries (4) (AAA, LR03, UM-4)
Power cable

❏
❏
❏
❏

Optimizer microphone
Microphone base
AM loop antenna
Indoor FM antenna

7 En

INTRODUCTION

Built-in 7-channel power amplifier

FEATURES

Logos and trademarks

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:
5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535
& other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a
registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and
DTS-HD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007
DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

iPodTM
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from
Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

This receiver supports network connections.

“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia
Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.

This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio
Corporation and THX Ltd. YAMAHA CORPORATION hereby
grants the user a non-exclusive, non-transferable, limited right of
use to this product under U.S.A. and foreign patent, patent
pending and other technology or trademarks owned by Neural
Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. “Neural Surround”, “Neural
Audio”, “Neural” and “NRL” are trademarks and logos owned by
Neural Audio Corporation. THX is a trademark of THX Ltd.,
which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights
reserved.

©2006 SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. “SIRIUS”, “SiriusConnect”,
the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks of
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.

HD Radio™ Technology Manufactured Under License From
iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and
the HD Radio logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corp.

Rhapsody and the Rhapsody logo are registered trademarks of
RealNetworks, Inc.

“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

Circle Surround II, Dialog Clarity, TruBass, SRS and the
symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.
Circle Surround II, Dialog Clarity and TruBass technologies are
incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows Media Audio, Windows
Media Connect and Windows Media Player are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.

x.v.Color™

The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM
Satellite Radio Inc.

8 En

GETTING STARTED

Getting started
Notes

• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the
buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote
control. In case the button names differ between the front
panel and the remote control, the button name on the
remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and
specifications are subject to change in part as a result of
improvements, etc. In case of differences between the
manual and product, the product has priority.
• “B MASTER ON/OFF” or “3 DVD” (example)
indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the
remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or “Appendix”
(separate booklet) for the information about each position
of the parts.

• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following
conditions:
– the operation range of the remote control decreases.
– the transmit indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,
the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory
is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code
and program any acquired functions that may have been
cleared.

■ Installing batteries in the remote control

Take off the battery compartment cover.

Insert the four supplied batteries
(AAA, LR03, UM-4) according to the polarity
markings (+ and –) on the inside of the
battery compartment.

Snap the battery compartment cover back
into place.

9 En

INTRODUCTION

About this manual

QUICK START GUIDE

Quick start guide
The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater.
Video monitor

Front right
speaker

Front left
speaker

Preparation: Check the items
Subwoofer
Surround right
speaker

In these steps, you need the following supplied
accessories.
❏ Power cable
The following items are not included in the package of this
unit.

Center
speaker

Surround back
right speaker

DVD player
Surround back left
speaker
Surround left
speaker

Step 1: Set up your speakers
☞ P. 11

Step 2: Connect your DVD player
and other components
☞ P. 12

❏ Speakers
❏ Front speaker ..................................... x 2
❏ Center speaker ................................... x 1
❏ Surround speaker .............................. x 4
Select magnetically shielded speakers. The
minimum required speakers are two front speakers.
The priority of the requirement of other speakers is
as follows:
1. Two surround speakers
2. One center speaker
3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s)
❏ Active subwoofer ................................... x 1
Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA
input jack.
❏ Speaker cable ......................................... x 7
❏ Subwoofer cable ..................................... x 1
Select a monaural RCA cable.
❏ DVD player .............................................. x 1
Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital
audio output jack and composite video output
jack.
❏ Video monitor .......................................... x 1
Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector
equipped with a composite video input jack.

Step 3: Turn on the power and
start playback
☞ P. 13

Enjoy DVD playback!

10 En

❏ Video cable ............................................. x 2
Select RCA composite video cables.
❏ Digital coaxial audio cable .................... x 1

Quick start guide

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel
(R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.

Step 1: Set up your speakers

Front speakers and center speaker
Loosen

HDMI
IN4

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

BD/HD DVD

DVD

CBL/SAT

BD/HD DVD

DVD

CBL/SAT

NETWORK
DVR

VCR
OUT

OUT

Tighten

USB

MONITOR OUT
S VIDEO

AC IN

DVR

ANTENNA
FM

IN3

Insert

INTRODUCTION

Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this
unit.

GND

VIDEO
75Ω UNBAL.

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
L
R

SPEAKERS
PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3
L
SP1
R

MD/CD-R

CBL/
SAT PR

OUT
(REC)

IN
(PLAY)

PR
L

CENTER

IN2

REMOTE

OUT

R
DVD

GND
IN1

PHONO

ZONE 4 OUT

CENTER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SINGLE(SB)

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE
VIDEO

AC OUTLETS
SINGLE

BD/
HD DVD

AUDIO
XM

SUR.BACK
(8CH)

SUB
WOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT

SUR.BACK/
PRESENCE

PRE OUT

1 CD

2 DVD

ZONE 2/ZONE 3
SP2

ZONE OUT
DIGITAL OUTPUT

OPTICAL

COAXIAL
OUT
1

SURROUND
L

R
SUB
WOOFER

DOCK

SWITCHED

FRONT

OUT
2

3 DVR

4 TV

5 HDBD/
DVD

6 DVD

7 CBL/
SAT

MD/
8 CD-R

ZONE 4

SIRIUS
1

TRIGGER OUT

RS-232C

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT

Speaker terminals

Place your speakers and subwoofer in the
room.

Connect speaker cables to each speaker.
To the front right
speaker

To the front left
speaker

To the center
speaker

Surround and surround back speakers

Connect each speaker cable to the
corresponding speaker terminal of this unit.
1

To the surround
back
right speaker

To the surround left
speaker

To the surround back
left speaker

4
1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are
unplugged from the AC wall outlets.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables
together to prevent short circuits.
3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other.
4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal
part of this unit.

To the surround
right speaker

Connect the subwoofer cable to the
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack of this unit and
the input jack of the subwoofer.
Subwoofer

AV receiver

Input jack
Subwoofer cable
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack

11 En

Quick start guide

Step 2: Connect your DVD player
and other components
DVD VIDEO

Connect the video cable to the VIDEO
MONITOR OUT jack of this unit and the video
input jack of your video monitor.

VIDEO MONITOR OUT
Video monitor

AV receiver
US

HDMI
IN4

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

BD/HD DVD

DVD

CBL/SAT

BD/HD DVD

DVD

CBL/SAT

NETWORK
DVR

VCR
OUT

OUT

AC IN
ANTENNA
FM

IN3

USB

MONITOR OUT
S VIDEO

DVR

GND

VIDEO

CBL/
SAT PR

75Ω UNBAL.
MD/CD-R

OUT
(REC)

IN
(PLAY)

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
L

SPEAKERS
PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3
L
SP1

CENTER

IN2

REMOTE

OUT

R
DVD

GND
IN1

PHONO

ZONE 4 OUT

CENTER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SINGLE(SB)

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE
VIDEO

AC OUTLETS
SINGLE

BD/
HD DVD

AUDIO
XM

SUR.BACK
(8CH)

SUB
WOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT

SUR.BACK/
PRESENCE

PRE OUT

2 DVD

ZONE 2/ZONE 3
SP2

ZONE OUT
DIGITAL OUTPUT

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

1 CD

OUT
1

SURROUND
L

R
SUB
WOOFER

DOCK

SWITCHED

FRONT

OUT
2

3 DVR

4 TV

5 HDBD/
DVD

7 CBL/
SAT

6 DVD

MD/
8 CD-R

ZONE 4

SIRIUS
1

TRIGGER OUT

RS-232C

Video input jack

DVD DIGITAL INPUT
COAXIAL

Make sure that this unit and the DVD
player are unplugged from the AC
wall outlets.

Video cable

VIDEO MONITOR
OUT jack

Connect the supplied power cable to this unit
and then plug of the power cable and other
components into the AC wall outlet.
y
For details about connecting the power cable, see page 30.

■ For other connections

Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the
digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD
player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL
jack of this unit.
DVD player

Digital coaxial
audio output
jack

AV receiver

Digital coaxial audio
cable

DVD DIGITAL INPUT
COAXIAL jack

Connect the video cable to the composite
video output jack of your DVD player and
DVD VIDEO jack of this unit.
AV receiver
DVD player

DVD VIDEO jack
Composite video
output jack

12 En

Video cable

• Other speaker combinations

☞ P. 17

• Information on jacks and cable plugs

☞ P. 20

• Information on HDMI™

☞ P. 21

• TV monitor or projector

☞ P. 23

• Other components

☞ P. 24

• External amplifier

☞ P. 26

• Multi-format player or external
decoder

☞ P. 27

• Yamaha iPod universal dock or
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

☞ P. 27

• FM/AM antennas

☞ P. 29

• XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock

☞ P. 61

• SiriusConnect tuner

☞ P. 65

• Network

☞ P. 28

• USB device

☞ P. 28

Quick start guide

Step 3: Turn on the power and start
playback

To set this unit to the standby mode, press
AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF.
INTRODUCTION

Check the type of the connected speakers.
If the speakers are 6-ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER
IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (page 31).
You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers
(page 130).

Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.

Press BMASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON
position on the front panel.

y
For details about turning on/off this unit and the standby
mode, see page 31.

■ For other operations

Rotate the L INPUT selector to set the input
source to “DVD”.

Start playback of the desired DVD on your
player.

Rotate P VOLUME to adjust the volume.

• Optimizing the speaker parameters
automatically

☞ P. 35

• Basic playback operations

☞ P. 42

• Sound field programs

☞ P. 46

• Pure high-fidelity sounds

☞ P. 54

• FM/AM radio tuning

☞ P. 56

• XM Satellite Radio tuning

☞ P. 61

• SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning

☞ P. 65

• iPod playback

☞ P. 73

• Playback via USB or network

☞ P. 75

• Bluetooth component playback

☞ P. 71

13 En

Connections
Rear panel
1

HDMI
IN4

BD/HD DVD

DVD

CBL/SAT

CBL/
SAT PR

6 7

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

BD/HD DVD

DVD

CBL/SAT

NETWORK
DVR

VCR

OUT

USB

MONITOR OUT
S VIDEO

AC IN

DVR

ANTENNA
FM

IN3

GND

VIDEO
75Ω UNBAL.
MD/CD-R

OUT
(REC)

IN
(PLAY)

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
L

SPEAKERS
PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3
L
SP1

CENTER

IN2

REMOTE

OUT

R
DVD

GND
IN1

PHONO

ZONE 4 OUT

CENTER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SINGLE(SB)

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE
VIDEO

AC OUTLETS
SINGLE

BD/
HD DVD

SUB
WOOFER

DOCK

AUDIO
XM

SUR.BACK
(8CH)

SUB
WOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT

SUR.BACK/
PRESENCE

PRE OUT

2 DVD

ZONE 2/ZONE 3
SP2

OPTICAL

3 DVR

4 TV

5 HDBD/
DVD

7 CBL/
SAT

6 DVD

MD/
8 CD-R

ZONE 4

SIRIUS
2

TRIGGER OUT

Name

RS-232C

D
Name

Page
D

Page

MULTI CH INPUT jacks

PRE OUT jacks

ZONE OUT jacks

124

Speaker terminals

HDMI jacks

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

Audio component jacks
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

27, 124

Video component jacks

ANTENNA terminals

NETWORK port

USB port

AC IN

AC OUTLET(S)

DOCK terminal

XM jack (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

SIRIUS jack
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks

TRIGGER OUT jacks

126

RS-232C terminal

—

14 En

ZONE OUT
DIGITAL OUTPUT

COAXIAL

1 CD

OUT
1

SURROUND
L

R
OUT
2

SWITCHED

FRONT

Note
The RS-232C terminal is a control expansion terminal for
factory use only. Consult your dealer for details.

Connections

Placing speakers
The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend.
y
• 7.1-channel speaker layout is highly recommended for playback of the high definition digital audio sources (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD
Master Audio, etc.) with sound field programs.
• We recommend that you add the presence speakers for the effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program.
• The surround back speakers and presence speakers do not output sound simultaneously.

7.1-channel speaker layout (plus presence speakers)
PR

PREPARATION

PL
30˚

FR
SW

C
SL

60˚
80˚

SBL

SBR

SBL

30 cm (12 in) or more

6.1-channel speaker layout
C
FR

FR
30˚

C
SL

60˚

80˚

5.1-channel speaker layout
C
FR

FR
30˚

FL
C

60˚

80˚

15 En

Connections

■ Speaker types
Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus
effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from
the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker
from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,
however, are obtained with the full system.

■ Presence left and right speakers (PL and
PR)
The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front
speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the sound
field programs (page 46). We recommend that you use the
presence speakers especially for the CINEMA DSP sound
field programs. To use the presence speakers, connect the
speakers to SP1 speaker terminals and then set “Front
Presence” to “Yes” (page 93).
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)

0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)

Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds.
For 5.1-channel speaker layout, place these speakers
farther back compared with the placement in the 7.1channel speaker layout.
Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and
SBR)/Surround back speaker (SB)
The surround back speakers supplement the surround
speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back
transitions.
For 6.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and
right channel signals are mixed down and output at the
single surround back speaker by configuring the
“Surround Back” setting (page 93).
For 5.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and
right channel signals are output at the surround left and
right speakers by configuring the “Surround Back” setting
(page 93).
Subwoofer (SW)
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as
the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from
any or all channels, but also for reproducing the high
fidelity sound of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel
included in bitstreams and multi-channel PCM sources.
The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because
low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better
to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it
slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall
reflections.
For other speaker combinations
You can enjoy multi-channel sources with sound field
programs by using a speaker combination other than
the 7.1/6.1/5.1-channel speaker combinations.
Use the automatic setup feature (page 35) or set the
“Speaker” parameters (page 93). to output the surround
sounds at the connected speakers.

16 En

1.8 m (6 ft)

Connections

Connecting speakers
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,
this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.
Caution

Notes
• A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a
stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the
plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
• You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, however they do not output sound simultaneously. This unit
automatically switches the presence speakers and surround back speakers depending on the input sources and the selected sound field
programs.

■ 7.1-channel speaker connection
Surround back speakers
Left
Right

Presence speakers
(page 16) or
Zone 2/Zone 3
speakers
Center speaker
(page 124)

Subwoofer

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
L

SPEAKERS
PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3
L
SP1

CENTER

SINGLE

FRONT

SURROUND
L

SUB
WOOFER

ZONE 2/ZONE 3
SP2

Zone 2/Zone 3 speakers
(page 124)

Left
Right
Front speakers

Right
Left
Surround speakers

17 En

PREPARATION

• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (page 31).
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could
damage this unit and/or speakers.
• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the
speakers away from the monitor.
• If you are to use 6-ohm speakers, be sure to set “SPEAKER IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (page 31).
You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers (page 130).

Connections

■ 6.1-channel speaker connection
Surround back speaker
Subwoofer

Presence speakers
(page 16) or
Zone 2/Zone 3 speakers
(page 124)

SPEAKERS
PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3
L
SP1

Center speaker

CENTER

SINGLE

FRONT

SURROUND
L

SUB
WOOFER

ZONE 2/ZONE 3
SP2

Zone 2/Zone 3
speakers
(page 124)

Left
Right
Front speakers

Right
Left
Surround speakers

■ 5.1-channel speaker connection
Subwoofer

Presence speakers
(page 16) or
Zone 2/Zone 3 speakers
(page 124)

Front speakers for the
bi-amplification
connections
(page 19)

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
L

SPEAKERS
PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3
L
SP1

Center speaker

CENTER

SINGLE

FRONT

SURROUND
L

SUB
WOOFER

ZONE 2/ZONE 3
SP2

Zone 2/Zone 3
speakers
(page 124)

Left
Right
Front speakers

18 En

Right
Left
Surround speakers

Connections

■ Connecting the speaker cable

Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of
insulation from the end of each speaker
cable and then twist the exposed wires of the
cable together to prevent short circuits.

■ Using bi-amplification connections
Caution
Remove the shorting bars or bridges of your speakers to
separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter)
crossovers.

You can make bi-amplification connections to one speaker
system which supports bi-amplification connection as
shown below. To activate the connections, configure the
“BI-AMP” setting (page 131).

10 mm (0.4 in)

PREPARATION

This unit

Loosen the knob, insert one bare wire into
the hole and then tighten the knob.
Loosen

Insert

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
L
R

Tighten

SINGLE

FRONT
L

■ Connecting the banana plug
Tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug
into the end of the terminal.
Banana plug

Right

Left

Front speakers

Note
When you make the conventional connection with the speakers,
make sure that the shorting bars are put into the terminals of the
speakers appropriately. Refer to the instruction manuals of the
speakers for details.

19 En

Connections

Information on jacks and cable plugs
This unit has three types of audio jacks, three types of video jacks and HDMI jacks. You can choose the connection
method depending on the component to be connected.

■ Audio jacks

■ Video jacks
DIGITAL

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

(White)

(Red)

(Orange)

AUDIO

Left and right
analog audio
cable plugs

Coaxial
digital audio
cable plug

VIDEO

S VIDEO

(Yellow)

Optical
digital
audio cable
plug

Composite
video cable
plug

S-video
cable plug

AUDIO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.
COAXIAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital
audio cables.

COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
PR

(Green)

(Blue)

(Red)

Component
video cable
plugs

VIDEO jacks
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via
composite video cables.
S VIDEO jacks
For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and
chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate
wires of S-video cables.

OPTICAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital
audio cables.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component video signals, separated into the
luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals
transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.

Note

You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the
COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals
input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are
compatible with up to 96-kHz sampling digital signals.

20 En

This unit is equipped with the video conversion function.
(page 22)

Connections

Information on HDMI™
This unit has four HDMI input jacks and two HDMI output jacks for digital audio and video signal input/output.

■ HDMI jack and cable plug
HDMI

HDMI cable plug

connections:
– multi-channel analog audio input (page 27)
– DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL (or COAXIAL)
• Refer to the instruction manuals of the input source component,
and set the component appropriately.

Notes

• We recommend that you use a commercially available HDMI cable
shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this
unit to other DVI components.
• You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection
(page 44).
• If you set “Mode” in “Standby Through” to “Last” or “Fix”, this
unit allows the HDMI signals input at an HDMI IN jack to pass
through this unit and output at an HDMI OUT jack (page 101).
• This unit is equipped with two HDMI OUT jacks. You can select
the active HDMI OUT jack(s) (page 43).
• This unit is equipped with the video conversion function (page 22).

Notes
• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of
the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jacks of
this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt
playback or cause noise.
• The HDMI OUT jacks output the audio signals input at the
HDMI input jacks only.
• If you turn off the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT
jacks via a DVI connection, the connection may fail.

■ HDMI signal compatibility with this unit
Audio signals
Audio signal
types

Audio signal
formats

Compatible
media

2ch Linear
PCM

2ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit

CD, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, etc.

Multi-ch
Linear PCM

8ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, etc.

DSD

2/5.1ch,
2.8224 MHz,1 bit

SA-CD, etc.

Bitstream

Dolby Digital,
DTS

DVD-Video, etc.

Bitstream (High
definition audio)

Dolby TrueHD,
Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master
Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution
Audio

Blu-ray Disc,
HD DVD, etc.

y
• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio
signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio sources
with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the following

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video and
audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD
player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or
DVI components.
• To decode the audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input
source component appropriately so that the component outputs the
audio bitstream signals directly (does not decode the bitstream
signals on the component).
• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for
example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of
Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play back the audio
commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents.

Video signals
This unit is compatible with the video signals of the
following resolutions:
– 480i/60 Hz
– 576i/50 Hz
– 480p/60 Hz
– 576p/50 Hz
– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24Hz
Compatibility with Deep Color and x.v.Color
video signals
This unit accepts Deep Color (30 or 36-bit) and x.v.Color
video signals. To output those video signals from the
HDMI OUT jacks without any processing, set “HDMI `
HDMI” (page 99) to “Through”.
Note
If the video monitor is not compatible with Deep Color or
x.v.Color video signals, the video source may not be played
back correctly.

■ Default input assignment of HDMI input
jacks
HDMI input jack

Assigned input source

IN1

BD/HD DVD

IN2

DVD

IN3

CBL/SAT

IN4

DVR

Front HDMI IN jack

V-AUX

21 En

PREPARATION

Connections

Audio and video signal flow
■ Audio signal flow
Input

■ Video signal flow
Input

Output

HDMI

DIGITAL AUDIO
(COAXIAL)
COMPONENT
VIDEO

DIGITAL AUDIO
(OPTICAL)

S VIDEO

AUDIO

VIDEO

Digital

Analog

Note
Only the HDMI input jacks support multi-channel PCM, DSD,
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio and
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signal inputs.

22 En

Through

Video
conversion

y
• Analog-to-HDMI video conversion is always possible unless
video signals are being input at the HDMI input jacks or 1080presolution analog video signals are being input.
• To set the analog-to-analog video conversion or change the
other video settings, configure the “Video” parameters
(page 99).
• If different analog video signals are input concurrently, the
following priority order will be applied:
(1) COMPONENT VIDEO, (2) S VIDEO, (3) VIDEO

Connections

Connecting a TV monitor or projector
y
• To select the types of the audio signals output at the HDMI
OUT jacks, configure the “Audio Output” setting (page 101).
• To assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT/ZONE
OUT) jacks to the main zone or another zone, configure the
“Component Assign” setting (page 103).

Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.

Note
PREPARATION

If you turn off the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT
jacks via a DVI connection, the connection may fail. In this
case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.

Projector
HDMI in

HDMI

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

MONITOR OUT
S VIDEO

VIDEO

OUT
2

AUDIO
DIGITAL INPUT

4 TV

OUT
1

Component video in

Recommended connections

Optical out

Audio out
HDMI in

Video in
S-video in
TV

Alternative connections

23 En

Connections

Connecting other components
■ Connecting audio and video components
This unit has three types of audio jacks, three types of video jacks and HDMI jacks. You can choose the connection
method depending on the component to be connected.
y
HDMI can transmit both digital audio and video over a single HDMI cable.
COMPONENT VIDEO

Video jacks

HDMI

VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

IN4

BD/HD DVD

DVD

CBL/SAT

BD/HD DVD

DVD

CBL/SAT

DVR
IN

VCR
OUT

OUT

DVR

IN3

PB
CBL/
SAT

IN(PLAY) OUT(REC)

IN2

HDMI jacks

MD/CD-R

R
DVD

GND

PHONO

IN1

BD/
HD DVD

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

1 CD

AUDIO

Audio jacks

2 DVD

3 DVR

4 TV

5 HDBD/
DVD 6 DVD

COAXIAL

7 CBL/
SAT

MD/
8 CD-R

OPTICAL

Connection example (connecting a DVD player)
DVD player

HDMI out

Optical out

Coaxial out

Audio out

Component out
S-video
out
C

HDMI

Video out
L

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD

DVD

Recommended
connections

IN2

R
DVD

Alternative
connections
DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

2 DVD

24 En

6 DVD

Connections

Jacks used for audio and video connections
Recommended connections are indicated by boldface. When connecting a recording component, you need to make
additional connections for recording (signal transmission from this unit to the recording component).

Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.

y
PREPARATION

You can also use the VIDEO AUX jacks (page 29) on the front panel to connect an additional component.
Jacks to connect
Component

Signal type
On component

Blu-ray Disc or HD
DVD player

HDMI out

HDMI IN1 (BD/HD DVD)

Audio

Optical out

OPTICAL (BD/HD DVD)

Audio out (analog)

AUDIO (BD/HD DVD)

Component out

COMPONENT VIDEO (BD/HD DVD)

S-video out

S VIDEO (BD/HD DVD)

Video out (composite)

VIDEO (BD/HD DVD)

Audio/Video

HDMI out

HDMI IN2 (DVD)

Audio

Optical out

OPTICAL (DVD)

Video

DVD player

Coaxial out

COAXIAL (DVD)

Audio out (analog)

AUDIO (DVD)

Component out

COMPONENT VIDEO (DVD)

S-video out

S VIDEO (DVD)

Video out (composite)

VIDEO (DVD)

Audio/Video

HDMI out

HDMI IN3 (CBL/SAT)

Audio

Optical out

OPTICAL (CBL/SAT)

Audio out (analog)

AUDIO (CBL/SAT)

Video

Set-top box

Video

DVD recorder

On this unit

Audio/Video

Component out

COMPONENT VIDEO (CBL/SAT)

S-video out

S VIDEO (CBL/SAT)

Video out (composite)

VIDEO (CBL/SAT)

Audio/Video

HDMI out

HDMI IN4 (DVR)

Audio

Coaxial out

COAXIAL (DVR)

Audio out (analog)

AUDIO (DVR IN)

S-video out

S VIDEO (DVR IN)

Video out (composite)

VIDEO (DVR IN)

Audio recording

Audio in (analog)

AUDIO (DVR OUT)

Video recording

S-video in

S VIDEO (DVR OUT)

Video in (composite)

VIDEO (DVR OUT)

Video

25 En

Connections

Jacks to connect
Component

Signal type
On component

VCR

CD player

MD or CD recorder

Turntable

On this unit

Audio

Audio out (analog)

AUDIO (VCR IN)

Video

S-video out

S VIDEO (VCR IN)

Video out (composite)

VIDEO (VCR IN)

Audio recording

Audio in (analog)

AUDIO (VCR OUT)

Video recording

S-video in

S VIDEO (VCR OUT)

Video in (composite)

VIDEO (VCR OUT)

Coaxial out

COAXIAL (CD)

Audio out (analog)

AUDIO (CD)

Audio

Audio out (analog)

AUDIO (MD/CD-R IN)

Audio recording

Optical in

OPTICAL (MD/CD-R)

Audio in (analog)

AUDIO (MD/CD-R OUT)

Audio out (analog)

AUDIO (PHONO)

Audio

Notes
• Be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV if the video conversion is disabled. For example, if you
connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect other components to the VIDEO jacks.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright
laws.
• If you connect your DVD player to both the OPTICAL and COAXIAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL
jack.
• GUI signals are not output at the DVR OUT and VCR OUT jacks and cannot be recorded.
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default one assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack, configure the “I/O Assignment” setting (page 105).
• When connecting a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge to the PHONO jack, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head
amplifier.
• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal.

■ Connecting an external amplifier
This unit has more than enough power for any home use.
However, if you want to add more power to the speaker
output or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an
external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Each PRE OUT
jack outputs the same channel signals as the
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

[1]

[2]

CENTER

FRONT

[3]

[4]

SURROUND SINGLE(SB)

Notes

SUR.BACK/

SUB

PRESENCE

WOOFER

• When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not
make any connections to the SPEAKERS terminals.
• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on
the subwoofer.

PRE OUT

[5]
[1] CENTER PRE OUT jack
Center channel output jack.
[2] FRONT PRE OUT jacks
Front channel output jacks.
[3] SURROUND PRE OUT jacks
Surround channel output jacks.

26 En

Connections

[4] SUR.BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks
Surround back or presence channel output jacks. When
you only connect one external amplifier for the surround
back channel, connect it to the SINGLE (SB) jack.
y
• To output surround back channel signals at these jacks, set
“Front Presence” to “None” and “Surround Back” to any
parameter except “None” (page 93).
• To output presence channel signals at these jacks, set “Front
Presence” to “Yes” and “Surround Back” to “None” (page 93).

■ Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal
dock or Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver
This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear
panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately).
Connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth
receiver to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this
unit using its dedicated cable.
PREPARATION

[5] SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier.

■ Connecting a multi-format player or an
external decoder
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a
multi-format player, external decoder, etc. If you set
“Input Channels” to “8ch” (page 91), the analog audio
input jacks assigned as “Front Input” can be used as the
front channel input jacks.
Notes
• When you select “MULTI CH” as the input source, the digital
sound field processor is automatically disabled.
• Since this unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers, connect at
least a 5.1-channel speaker system when using this feature.
(

)

(

MD/

TAPE

*
CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

DOCK

Yamaha iPod universal dock or
Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver

■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
When the components are the Yamaha products and have
the capability of the transmission of the remote control
signals, connect the REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT
jacks to the remote control input and output jack with the
monaural analog mini cable as follows.

FRONT(6CH) SURROUND

SUR.BACK
(8CH)

SUB

MULTI CH INPUT

Front out (8ch)

Surround out

Front out (6ch)
Surround back
out (8ch)

Center out

Subwoofer out

Multi-format player/
External decoder

* The analog audio input jacks assigned as “Front Input” in
“MULTI CH” (page 91).

REMOTE

Remote
control out

OUT

Remote
control in

*
Infrared signal
receiver or
Yamaha
component

Yamaha
component
(CD or DVD
player, etc.)

* You can connect another set of infrared signal receiver and
Yamaha component to the REMOTE IN/OUT 2 jacks same as
the REMOTE IN/OUT 1 jacks.

27 En

Connections

■ Connecting to the network
To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable) into the
NETWORK port of this unit, and plug the other end into one of the LAN ports on your router that supports the DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server function. The following diagram shows a connection example where this
unit is connected to one of the LAN ports on a 4-port router. To enjoy music files saved on your PC and Yamaha MCX2000, access the Internet Radio, or control this unit by using your PC, each device must be connected properly in the
network.
Notes
• You must use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable (commercially available) to connect a network hub or router and this unit.
• If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to configure the network settings manually (page 102).
• Yamaha MCX-2000, MCX-A10 and MCX-C15 may not be for sale in some locations.
Internet

Yamaha MCX-2000
Yamaha MCX-C15
WAN

Yamaha MCX-A10
(with optional
speakers)
PC

LAN

Modem

Router

Network cable

NETWORK

■ Connecting USB storage devices
Connect a USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port on the front panel or rear panel of this unit.
Set “USB Select” to “Front” (default) or “Rear” to select the active USB port (page 77).
(Front panel)

(Rear panel)
VOLUME

INFO

USB
VIDEO AUX

HDMI IN

USB

USB storage device

USB memory device or USB
portable audio player

28 En

Connections

Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the
front panel
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a
game console or a video camera to this unit. To reproduce
the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as
the input source.

Connecting the FM and AM
antennas
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient
signal strength.
Notes

Caution
Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other
components before making connections.

PURE DIRECT

MASTER
ON

ON/OFF

OFF

INPUT

AUDIO SELECT/
REC OUT

TONE
CONTROL

ENTER

PRESET/TUNING/CH

SEARCH
MODE

MEMORY

STEREO/
MONO

VOLUME
CATEGORY

INFO

BAND
STRAIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE
EFFECT

OPTIMIZER
MIC

Indoor FM
antenna
(supplied)

VIDEO AUX
ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

VIDEO AUX

PHONES

HDMI IN

USB

PROGRAM
YPAO

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

AUDIO

OPTICAL

AM loop
antenna
(supplied)

VIDEO AUX

HDMI IN

ANTENNA
FM

S VIDEO

VIDEO

AUDIO

OPTICAL

GND

75Ω UNBAL.

Outdoor AM antenna
HDMI output

Optical output

Audio output

Video output

S-Video output

Game console or
video camera

Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33 ft)
vinyl-covered wire extended
outdoors from a window.

Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum
interference, connect the antenna GND
terminal to a good earth ground. A good
earth ground is a metal stake driven into
moist earth.

Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna

29 En

PREPARATION

MAIN ZONE

• The types of the supplied antennas and the FM antenna terminal
of this unit are different depending on the models.
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
• If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor
antenna. Consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center about outdoor antennas.

Connections

(U.S.A. model)

Connecting the power cable
■ Connecting the AC power cable
Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet after
all other connections are complete, then plug the AC
power cable into an AC wall outlet.

AC IN

Connecting the wire of the AM loop antenna
Press and hold

Insert

To the AC wall outlet

Release

AC OUTLETS
SWITCHED

y
The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity
and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND
terminal.

■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
U.S.A. and Australia models ................................. 1 outlet
Canada model ....................................................... 2 outlets
Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected
components. Connect the power cable of your other
components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is
supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to
these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is turned off. For
information on the maximum power or the total power
consumption of the components that can be connected to
these outlet(s), see “Specifications” (page 154).
Note
The rated power of the component (such as a subwoofer)
connected to these outlet(s) cannot exceed the maximum power
supplied by this unit.

30 En

Connections

Setting the speaker impedance
and display language
Caution
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER
IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this
unit. You can also use 4 ohm speakers as the front
speakers (page 130).

Make sure this unit is turned off.

Press and hold NSTRAIGHT on the front
panel and then press B MASTER ON/OFF
inward to the ON position.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.

STRAIGHT

While holding
down

■ Turning on this unit
Press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel
inward to the ON position.
When you turn on this unit by pressing B MASTER ON/
OFF, the main zone is turned on.

■ Turning off this unit
Press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel
again to release it outward to the OFF position.

■ Set the main zone to the standby mode
Press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
(or D STANDBY).

■ Turning on the main zone from the
standby mode

MASTER

Press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or E POWER).

EFFECT

Rotate the M PROGRAM selector to select
“SPEAKER IMP.”.

Press N STRAIGHT repeatedly to select
“6Ω MIN”.

Rotate the M PROGRAM selector to select
“LANGUAGE”.

Press N STRAIGHT to select desired
language setting for the GUI screen in the
video monitor.
Choices: ENGLISH (English),
JAPANESE (Japanese), FRENCH (French),
GERMAN (German), SPANISH (Spanish),
RUSSIAN (Russian)

• Basically, we recommend that you use the standby mode to turn
off this unit. In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small
amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the
remote control.
• Even when this unit is in the standby mode, power consumption
increases if “Standby Through” (page 101) or “Network
Standby” (page 102) is on. If you do not use this unit for long
periods of time, turn off this unit by pressing BMASTER ON/
OFF to minimize power consumption.
• AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF, DSTANDBY and EPOWER are
operational only when BMASTER ON/OFF is pressed
inward to the ON position.
• When you turn on this unit, there will be a delay for a few
seconds before this unit can reproduce sound.

If there are some problems...
• First, turn off and then turn on this unit again.
• If problems persist, initialize the parameters of this
unit (page 147).

Notes
• For details about the display language, see “Language”
(page 132)
• You can also select the display language with the GUI menu
(page 107).

Press B MASTER ON/OFF to release it
outward to the OFF position to save the new
setting and turn off this unit.

Note
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this
unit.

31 En

PREPARATION

Turning this unit on and off

Connections

Front panel display
a

b c

neural
CS
DSD
PCM
WMA
MP3

SILENT
CINEMA

USB R
DOCK V-AUX
NET
YPAO PRESET

DVR

CBL/SAT

DVD

BD/HD DVD

MD/CD-R

CD PHONO MULTI CH

TUNER XM

HD TAG
TUNED STEREO
AUTO MEMORY
CATEGORY ALL
HOLD

3
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 VIRTUAL ADAPTIVE DRC
ENHANCER
DISCRETE
MATRIX
q DIGITAL PLUS
HD 96
24
q PL x q EX
q TRUE HD
MASTER AUDIO

SILENT
CINEMA

g
h

VCR

SIRIUS
dB

VOLUME

L C R
SLEEP ZONE2 SL LFE SR
PRE ZONE3
AMP ZONE4 SBL SB SBR

YPAO PRESET
3

IN OUT 1 OUT 2 VIRTUAL ADAPTIVE DRC

ENHANCER
DISCRETE
MATRIX
q DIGITAL PLUS
HD 96
24
q PL x q EX
q TRUE HD
MASTER AUDIO

i
j
k
l
m

a CSII indicator (U.S.A. model only)
Lights up when the SRS Circle Surround II decoder is
active (page 53).
b neural indicator
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Lights up when the Neural-THX Surround decoder is
active (page 53).
c Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected (page 44).
d Input source indicators
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently
selected input source.
Notes
• The XM and SIRIUS indicators are only applicable to the
U.S.A. and Canada models.
• The R indicator on the right side of the USB indicator lights up
when “USB Select” is set to “Rear” (page 92).
• The NET indicator also lights up when “Network Standby”
(page 102) is set to “On” and this unit is in the standby mode.

e Input signal indicators
The respective indicator lights up when this unit is
reproducing DSD (Direct Stream Digital), PCM (Pulse
Code Modulation), WMA (Windows Media Audio) or,
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3) audio signals.
f Multi-information display
Shows the name of the current sound field program and
other information when adjusting or changing settings.

o
p
q

HD TAG
TUNED STEREO
AUTO MEMORY
CATEGORY ALL
HOLD

VOLUME

L C R
SLEEP ZONE2 SL LFE SR
PRE ZONE3
AMP ZONE4 SBL SB SBR

s
t

g HDMI indicator
IN indicator
Lights up when the signal of the selected input source
is input at one of the HDMI input jacks (page 21).
OUT 1/OUT 2 indicator
The respective indicator lights up when the HDMI
signal is output at the HDMI OUT jacks. (page 21).
h ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is
turned on (page 51).
i YPAO indicator
Lights up when you run the automatic setup and when the
speaker settings configured by the automatic setup are
used without any modifications (page 35).
j PRESET indicator
Lights up while this unit is in the preset tuning mode.
k DSP indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the sound
field programs are selected.
SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a
sound field program is selected (page 51).
CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound
field program (page 46).
3D indicator
Lights up when the CINEMA DSP 3D mode is turned
on (page 52).
VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see
page 51).

32 En

Connections

l ADAPTIVE DRC indicator
Lights up when the adaptive dynamic range control
feature is turned on (page 95).
m Decoder indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the
decoders of this unit function.

Using the remote control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
Remote control sensor

n Tuner indicators
Light up when this unit is in the FM, AM, XM Satellite
Radio, or SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning mode.
MAIN ZONE
MASTER

OFF

INPUT

STRAIGHT

TUNING MODE

MEMORY

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

DISPLAY

MAN'L/AUTO

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

ZONE
CONTROLS

REC OUT/
ZONE 2

VOLUME

EDIT

SPEAKERS
AUDIO SELECT

PROGRAM

PREPARATION

Note

PURE DIRECT

ON/OFF

EFFECT

ZONE ON/OFF

TONE CONTROL

MULTI
ZONE
ZONE 2
SILENT CINEMA

The HD and TAG indicators are only applicable to the U.S.A.
model and used when this unit is tuned into the HD Radio
reception band.

PHONES

YPAO

OPTIMIZER
MIC

Approximately 6 m (20 ft)

S VIDEO

ZONE 3
VIDEO

ZONE 4
L

AUDIO

PUSH ENTER

OPTICAL

VIDEO AUX

HDMI IN

USB

o Menu browsing indicator
Lights up if any items exist under the current item during
menu browsing for iPod, etc.
p SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on (page 45).
q PRE AMP indicator
Lights up when this unit is in the pre-amplifier mode
(page 131).

6LIGHT
Lights up the remote control buttons and the display
window (4).

r VOLUME level indicator
• Indicates the current volume level.
• Flashes while the mute function is on (page 44).

Display window (4)

[1] [2]

s Input channel and speaker indicators
Presence speaker indicators

L C R
SL LFE SR
SBL SB SBR

MAIN
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4

ID 1 ID 2

Input channel indicators

Input channel indicators
• Indicate the channel components of the current
digital input signal.
• Light up or flash according to the settings of the
speakers when this unit is in the automatic setup
procedure (page 35).
Presence speaker indicators
Light up according to setting for “Front Presence”
(page 93) in “Configuration” when this unit is in the
auto setup procedure (page 35) or the speaker level
setting procedure in the “Level” (page 94).
t ZONE2/ZONE3/ZONE4 indicators
Lights up when Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 is turned on
(page 127).

[3]

[4]

[1] ID1/ID2 indicator
Indicates the currently selected remote control ID
(page 130).
[2] Transmit indicator
Appears while the remote control is sending infrared
signals.
[3] Zone indicators
Indicates the currently controlling zone (page 127).
[4] Information display
Shows the name of the selected input source that you
can control.
Infrared window (1)
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.

33 En

Connections

Operation mode selector (F)
The function of some buttons depends on the operation
mode selector position.
AMP
Operates the amplifier function of this unit.
SOURCE
Operates the component selected with an input
selector button (page 114).
TV
Operates the TV (page 113).
Notes
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following
conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
• To set the remote control codes for other components, see
page 116.

Opening and closing the front
panel door
When you want to use the controls behind the front panel
door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of
the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these
controls.

34 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid
troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied
optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening
environment.
This unit is equipped with various automatic setup features. You can select the automatic setup features according to your
preference.

Basic automatic setup (page 36)
Use this feature to optimize the setup of this unit for one listening position. You can also select the parameters to be
optimized by the automatic setup.
Advanced automatic setup (page 38)
Use this feature to optimize the setup of this unit for multiple listening positions. You can also select the parameters to be
optimized by the automatic setup.

Before starting the automatic
setup
Make sure of the following check points before
starting the automatic setup operations.
❏ Speakers are connected appropriately.
❏ Headphones are disconnected from this unit.
❏ This unit is turned on.
❏ The connected subwoofer is turned on and the
volume level is set to about half way (or slightly
less).
❏ The crossover frequency controls of the
connected subwoofer is set to the maximum.
VOLUME

MIN

MAX

Quick automatic setup
Use this feature to carry out the automatic setup without
using the GUI screen.

Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
AUDIO SELECT/
REC OUT

TONE
CONTROL

MEMORY

SEARCH
MODE

STEREO/
MONO

CATEGORY

INFO

BAND
STRAIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE
EFFECT

VIDEO AUX
ZONE 2

OPTIMIZER
MIC

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

VIDEO AUX

PHONES

HDMI IN

USB

PROGRAM
YPAO

CROSSOVER
HIGH CUT

MIN

PRESET/TUNING/CH

ENTER

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

AUDIO

OPTICAL

Omni-directional
microphone

The following screen appears in the front panel
display.

MAX

Controls of a subwoofer (example)

❏
❏

The room is sufficiently quiet.
Set the operation mode selector on the remote
control to FAMP.

AUTO SETUP
ENTER TO START

Notes
Note

• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output
during the automatic setup procedure.
• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as
possible while the automatic setup procedure is in progress. If
there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be
satisfactory.

“View GUI Menu” appears if the GUI menu screen is
turned on. In this case, press IMENU to turn off the GUI
menu screen or follow “Basic automatic setup”

(page 36)

Place the optimizer microphone at your
normal listening position on a flat level
surface with the omni-directional
microphone heading upward.

35 En

PREPARATION

Quick automatic setup (page 35)
Use this feature to carry out the automatic setup without using the GUI screen.

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

Optimizer microphone

Basic automatic setup
Use this feature to optimize the setup of this unit for one
listening position. You can also select the parameters to be
optimized in the automatic setup.

Turn on the video monitor and then follow
steps 1 and 2 in “Quick automatic setup”
(page 35).

Press IMENU on the remote control.
The following screen (GUI menu) appears in the
video monitor.

y
It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the
optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears
would be when you are seated in your listening position.
You can use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the
optimizer microphone to the tripod (etc.).

Information
Setup Menu
Start

Before proceeding next operation
Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts the
automatic setup procedure in 10 seconds. During the automatic
setup procedure, do not perform any operation on this unit. For
more accurate measurements, we recommended that you get out
of the room or move to the wall where speakers are not around
during the measurement. It takes approximately 3 minutes.

Start:ENTER

Press 9ENTER to start the measurement.
This unit starts to count down from 10 seconds.

To select the parameters to be optimized,
press 9k to select “Setup Menu” and then
press 9h.
When you do not need to select the parameters to be
optimized, skip to step 6.

• To start the measurement immediately, press 9ENTER
again.
• To cancel the automatic setup and return to the previous
screen, press ?RETURN and then 9ENTER.

Loud test tones are output from each speaker during
the measurement. Once all items are measured,
“COMPLETED” appears.

COMPLETED
PLS UNPLUG MIC
Note
If an error or warning message appears, see “Automatic
setup” (page 145).

ERROR: E-01
PRESS ENTER

NOTICE
Loud test tones are
output.
Please keep quiet
or leave the room.

Disconnect the optimizer microphone to
complete the automatic setup.
y
You can check the results of the measurements by using
the GUI screen (page 40).

36 En

If you do not select the parameters to be optimized, this
unit will optimize the parameters you selected last time.
All the parameters except “Angle” are selected by the
initial factory settings.

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the
parameter and then press 9ENTER to
check or uncheck the box.
Check the boxes for the parameters to be optimized.
Parameter

Descriptions

Multi Measure
(Multiple point
measurement)

You can optimize the setup of this unit for
multiple listening positions. For details, see
“Advanced automatic setup” (page 38). In
the basic automatic setup, leave this setting
to the default.

Wiring
(Speaker wiring)

This unit checks and adjusts which speakers
are connected and the polarity of each
speaker.

Distance
(Speaker distance)

This unit checks and adjusts the distance of
each speaker from the listening position and
adjusts the timing of each channel.

Size
(Speaker size)

This unit checks and adjusts the frequency
response of each speaker and sets the
appropriate low-frequency crossover for
each channel.

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

Parameter
Equalizing
(Speaker
equalizing)

Descriptions

Note

Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the
specified frequency bands. This unit
automatically selects the crucial frequency
bands for the listening room and adjusts the
level of the selected frequency bands to
create a cohesive sound field in the room.

Level
(Speaker level)

This unit checks and adjusts the volume
level of each speaker.

Angle
(Speaker angle)

Checks the angles of the front speakers,
surround speakers, and front presence
speakers.

If an error or warning message appears, see “Error and
warning messages” (page 38).

Retry
Exit

Detail

E09:User Cancel

Pre Check
Main Check

If you have finished the settings, press 9l
to return to the previous menu level and then
press 9n to select “Start”.

Before proceeding next operation

Place the supplied microphone base at the
position you will be seated most frequently.
Make sure that the arrow on the microphone base
points the center speaker or about the midpoint
between the front left and right speakers.

Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts the
automatic setup procedure in 10 seconds. During the
automatic setup procedure, do not perform any operation on
this unit. For more accurate measurements, we recommended
that you get out of the room or move to the wall where
speakers are not around during the measurement. It takes
approximately 3 minutes.

FRONT
DIRECTION

Press 9ENTER to start the measurement.
This unit starts to count down from 10 seconds.

Microphone base

y
• To start the measurement immediately, press 9ENTER
again.
• To cancel the automatic setup and return to the previous
screen, press ?RETURN and then 9ENTER.

Loud test tones are output from each speaker during
the measurement.
If you have selected “Angle” in step 4, the following
screen appears. Proceed to step 7.

Note
It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the
microphone base at the same height as your ears would be
when you are seated in your listening position. You can
use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the
microphone base to the tripod (etc.).

Equalizing
Level
Angle Check

Place the optimizer microphone to the
position “1” on the microphone base and
then press 9ENTER.

Put the microphone at
1st listening position
Next:ENTER
1

Angle
Result

If you have not selected “Angle” in step 4,
“Measurement Completed Successful” appears once
all items are measured. Skip to step 11.
This unit starts the measurement of the speaker
angles.

Angle Check
Angle

Measurement Completed
Successful

Result
Detail:[ ]
Exit:ENTER

Move the optimizer microphone to the
position “2”on the microphone base and
then press 9ENTER.

37 En

PREPARATION

Wiring

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

Move the optimizer microphone to the
position “3”on the microphone base and
then press 9ENTER.
“Measurement Completed Successful” appears once
all items are measured.
Press 9ENTER to exit from the “Result”
screen.

Advanced automatic setup
Use this feature to optimize the setup of this unit for
multiple listening positions. You can also select the
parameters to be optimized by the automatic setup.

Turn on the video monitor and then connect
the optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER
MIC jack on the front panel.

Place the optimizer microphone at the first
listening position.
The following illustration shows how to place the
optimizer microphone in order to optimize the setup
of this unit for seven listening positions for example.

y
To view the measurement results in detail, press 9h.
Press 9k / n repeatedly to toggle between parameters
(page 36). Press 9l to return to the “Result” screen.

Press 9l to select “Yes” to save the
measurement results or 9h to select “No”
to discard them.

Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu and
disconnect the optimizer microphone.

■ Error and warning messages
If an error or warning message appears during the
automatic setup procedure, carry out one of the following
operations. For details on each message, see “Automatic
setup” (page 145).
• To view the details on the error and warning messages,
press 9h. Press 9k / n to display the previous/next
page (if available). Press 9l to return to the previous
menu level.
• To return to the GUI menu, press 9l.
• To retry the measurement, press 9k.
• To ignore the message and continue the process, press
9n.

1
2

1/2/3/4/5/6/7: Listening positions

Press IMENU on the remote control.
The GUI menu appears in the video monitor.

Press 9k to select “Setup Menu” and then
press 9h.

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Multi
Measure” and then press 9h.

Note
Some operations cannot be performed depending on the type of
error (or warning).

34 5

7
6

Information
Setup Menu

Multi Measure

Start

Wiring
Distance

38 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

Note

Press 9k / n repeatedly to set the number of
listening positions and press 9l.
Choices: 1 (default), 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8

If an error or warning message appears, see “Error and
warning messages” (page 38).

10
Information
Setup Menu

Multi Measure

Start

Wiring

To select the parameters to be optimized,
press 9k / n to select the parameter and
then press 9ENTER to check or uncheck
the box.
When you do not need to select the parameters to be
optimized, skip to step 8.
y

Repeat step 10 until the measurement at all
listening positions are made.
If you have selected “Angle” in step 7, follow steps 7
to 13 in “Basic automatic setup” (page 36).
If you have not selected “Angle” in step 7,
“Measurement Completed Successful” appears once
all items are measured. Follow steps 11 to 13 in
“Basic automatic setup” (page 36).

If you do not select the parameters to be optimized, this
unit will optimize the parameters you selected last time.
All the parameters except “Angle” are selected by the
initial factory settings.

Press 9l to return to the previous menu
level and then press 9n to select “Start”.

Before proceeding next operation
Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts the
automatic setup procedure in 10 seconds. During the
automatic setup procedure, do not perform any operation on
this unit. For more accurate measurements, we recommended
that you get out of the room or move to the wall where
speakers are not around during the measurement.

Press 9ENTER to start the measurement.
This unit starts to count down from 10 seconds.
y
• To start the measurement immediately, press 9ENTER
again.
• To cancel the automatic setup and return to the previous
screen, press ?RETURN and then 9ENTER.

Loud test tones are output from each speaker during
the measurement. Once all items for the first listening
position are measured, the following message
appears.

Pre Check
Main Check
Wiring

Put the microphone at
2nd listening position
Next:ENTER
Skip:[ ]

Distance

39 En

PREPARATION

To skip the measurements at the remaining listening
positions, press 9n.

Distance

Move the optimizer microphone to the
second listening position and then press
9ENTER to start the measurement.

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

Reviewing and reloading the
automatic setup parameters
Use this feature to review the result of the automatic setup.
You can also reload the automatic setup parameters in case
you are not satisfied with the speaker setup and sound
adjustments you have configured manually.

Parameter
Multi Measure
(Multiple point
measurement)

Displays the number of listening position
actually measured.

Wiring
(Speaker wiring)

Displays the polarity of each connected
speaker.
– “NRM” appears when the polarity of the
connected speaker is normal.
– “REV” appears when the polarity of the
connected speaker is reversed.
– “DET” appears when this unit detects the
subwoofer is connected.
– “–––” appears when no speaker is
connected to the corresponding speaker
channel.

Distance
(Speaker
distance)

Displays the speaker distance from the
listening position. Press 9h repeatedly to
switch the unit to display the value of the
each speaker distance.

Size
(Speaker size)

Displays the size of the connected speakers
and the bass cross over frequency (“Cross”).
– “LRG” appears when the connected
speaker has the ability to reproduce the
low-frequency signals effectively.
– “SML” appears when the connected
speaker does not have the ability to
reproduce the low-frequency signals
effectively.

Equalizing
(Speaker
equalizing)

Displays the result of the adjustment of the
frequency responses of each connected
speaker. You can switch the parametric
equalizer type that appears in the result
display by pressing 9h repeatedly in the
“Equalizing” result display. To apply the
result that is displayed in the display, press
9ENTER.
Choices: Natural, Flat, Front
– Select “Natural” to average out the
frequency response of all speakers with
higher frequencies being less
emphasized. Recommended if the “Flat”
setting sounds a little harsh.
– Select “Flat” to average the frequency
response of all speakers. Recommended
if all of your speakers are of similar
quality.
– Select “Front” to adjust the frequency
response of each speaker in accordance
with the sound of your front speakers.
Recommended if your front speakers are
of much higher quality than your other
speakers.

Level
(Speaker level)

Displays the result of the adjustment of each
connected speaker output level. You can
display the result of the adjustment of the
speaker level for each parametric equalizer
type (see above) by pressing 9h
repeatedly. Select “Through” to display the
result when this unit does not use the
parametric equalizer.

Angle
(Speaker angle)

Displays the angles of the front speakers,
surround speakers, and front presence
speakers.

Note
If you reload the automatic setup parameters, the settings you
have configured manually are cleared. To save the settings
before reloading the automatic setup parameters, see “System
Memory” (page 108).

Set the operation mode selector to FAMP
and then press IMENU.
The GUI menu appears in the video monitor.
y
If the menu directory other than “Top Menu” (page 84) is
displayed, press and hold IMENU to display the top GUI
menu.

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Setup”
and then press 9h.

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Auto
Setup” and then press 9h.

Press 9k to select “Information” and then
press 9h.

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the
parameter of which you want to check the
setting.

40 En

Descriptions

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

y
The results of the measurement that are the causes of the
warning message(s) appear in yellow or pink.

Notes

To reload the displayed parameter, press
9ENTER.

Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu.

PREPARATION

• “–––” appears when no speaker is connected to the
corresponding speaker channel or this unit does not measure the
corresponding speaker channel yet.
• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your
listening environment, run the automatic setup again to
recalibrate your system.
• The distances displayed in the “Distance” results may be longer
than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your
subwoofer or external amplifiers if you connect them.
• In the “Equalizing” results, different values may be set for the
same band to provide finer adjustments.

y
• You can also set the parametric equalizer type with “PEQ
Select” (page 96).
• You can set the phase of the connected subwoofer with “Phase”
(page 93).

41 En

Playback
Caution
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play
back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,
you will only hear some unwanted noise that may
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player
supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound
output level of your CD player before you play back a
CD encoded in DTS.

Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
• Refer to the instruction manuals for the source
component.
• FM/AM radio tuning (page 56)
• XM Satellite Radio tuning (page 61)
• SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning (page 65)
• Bluetooth component playback (page 71)
• iPod playback (page 73)
• Playback via USB or network (page 75)

Rotate P VOLUME (or press J VOLUME +/–)
to adjust the volume to the desired output
level.

y
To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio
connection, set “Decoder Mode” in “Input Select” to “DTS”
before the playback (page 90).

Before performing the following operations, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to FAMP.

y
To adjust the level of each speaker, see page 55.

Basic procedure
1

Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.

Rotate the M PROGRAM selector (or press
one of the sound field program selector
buttons (Q) repeatedly) to select the desired
sound field program.
For details about sound field program, see page 46.

y
Selected sound field program category

• If you connect two video monitors to the HDMI OUT
jacks of this unit, press RHDMI OUT repeatedly to select
the active video monitor(s). See page 43 for details.
• You can operate this unit by using the graphical user
interface (GUI) screen (page 81).
• You can configure the display settings with “Video”
(page 99) and “Display Set” (page 105).

Rotate the L INPUT selector (or press one
of the input selector buttons (3))
The name of the selected input source appears for a
few seconds.
Available input sources

USB
NET

DOCK

V-AUX

VCR

DVR

CBL/SAT

DVD

BD/HD DVD

MD/CD-R

CD PHONO MULTI CH

TUNER XM

DVD

Selected input source

42 En

SIRIUS

Movie
Sci-Fi
Selected sound field program

y
To switch the information (current input source, current
sound field program, etc) displayed in the front panel
display, press JINFO (or set the operation mode selector
to FAMP and then press CINFO) repeatedly.

Playback

Selecting audio input jacks
(AUDIO SELECT)

Selecting the multi-channel input
component

Use this feature (audio input jack select) to switch the
input jack assigned to an input source when more than one
jacks are assigned to an input source.

Rotate the L INPUT selector (or press one
of the input selector buttons (3)) to select
the desired input source.
Press CAUDIO SELECT and then rotate
MPROGRAM selector (or set the operation
mode to FAMP and then press OAUDIO
SEL repeatedly) to select the desired audio
input jack select setting.

V-AUX

VCR

DVR

CBL/SAT

DVD

BD/HD DVD

A.SEL:

MD/CD-R

CD PHONO MULTI CH

TUNER XM

SIRIUS

AUTO

Selected audio input jack
select setting

AUTO

You can configure the multi channel input settings with
“MULTI CH” (page 90).

Note
Sound field programs cannot be selected when “MULTI CH” is
selected as the input source.

Use this feature to select the HDMI OUT jack(s) to output
the input signals.
Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and
then press RHDMI OUT on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired setting.
The HDMI output setting changes as follows.

Automatically selects input signals in the
following order:
(1) HDMI
(2) Digital signals
(3) Analog signals

HDMI

Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI
signals are not input, no sound is output.

COAX/OPT

Automatically selects input signals in the
following order:
(1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack.
(2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack.
When no signals are input, no sound is output.

ANALOG

OUT1+2
OFF

You can configure the default audio input jack select setting
with “Audio Select” (page 90).

OUT2

OUT 1+2

Outputs the signals at both the HDMI OUT 1
and HDMI OUT 2 jacks simultaneously.

OUT 1

Outputs the signals at the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

OUT 2

Outputs the signals at the HDMI OUT 2 jack.

OFF

Does not output any signals at the HDMI OUT
1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks. Select this setting
when you do not use the video monitor
connected to one of the HDMI OUT jacks.

Selects only analog signals. If no analog
signals are input, no sound is output.

OUT1

y
You can select the HDMI OUT jack at which HDMI control
signals are output with “Control Monitor” (page 102).

Note
This feature is not available if no digital input jack is assigned
to the selected input source in “I/O Assignment” (page 105).
“HDMI” is available only when an HDMI input jack is
assigned.

43 En

BASIC
OPERATION

DOCK

Rotate the L INPUT selector on the front panel
to select “MULTI CH” (or press 3 MULTI).

Selecting the HDMI OUT jack

Available input sources

USB
NET

Use this feature to select the component connected to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks (page 27) as the input source.

Playback

Using your headphones

Displaying the input source
information

Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo
analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on
the front panel.

You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,
bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.

Set the operation mode selector to FAMP
and then press 8STATUS on the remote
control.
The input source information screen appears in the
GUI screen.

Press 9l / h to toggle between the audio
and video information.

Press 8STATUS on the remote control
again to exit from the input source
information screen.

MAIN ZONE
PURE DIRECT

MASTER
ON

ON/OFF

OFF

INPUT

AUDIO SELECT/
REC OUT

TONE
CONTROL

ENTER

PRESET/TUNING/CH

MEMORY

SEARCH
MODE

STEREO/
MONO

VOLUME
CATEGORY

INFO

BAND
STRAIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE
EFFECT

OPTIMIZER
MIC

VIDEO AUX
ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

VIDEO AUX

PHONES

HDMI IN

USB

PROGRAM
YPAO

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

AUDIO

OPTICAL

y
When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA
mode activates automatically (page 51).

■ Audio information
Format

Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a
digital signal, it automatically switches to
analog input.

Sampling

The number of samples per second taken from
a continuous signal to make a discrete signal.

Channel

The number of source channels in the input
signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a
multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front
channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is
displayed as “3/2/0.1”.

Bitrate

The number of bits passing a given point per
second.

Dialogue

The dialogue normalization level preset to the
current input bitstream signal.

Flag1/Flag2

Flag data encoded in the bitstream, or PCM
signals that cue this unit to automatically
switch decoders.

Notes
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the
speaker terminals.
• All digital multi-channel audio signals are mixed down to the
left and right headphone channels.
• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, only the
signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT FRONT jacks are
output.

Muting the audio output
Press L MUTE on the remote control to mute the
audio output. Press L MUTE again to resume
the audio output.
y
• The VOLUME level indicator flashes while the mute function is
on.
• You can configure the muting level with “Muting Type”
(page 95).

44 En

Notes
• “–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding
information.
• Some high definition audio bitstream contents may not include
the discrete surround back left and right channel signals but are
encoded at the bitrate of 192 kHz.
• Even if you make settings to output bitstreams directly, some
players convert the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus
bitstreams to the Dolby Digital bitstreams, while converting the
DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
bitstreams to the DTS bitstreams.

Playback

■ Video information
HDMI signal

Type of the source video signals and
the video signals output at the HDMI
OUT jacks of this unit.

HDMI Resolution

Resolution of the input signal (analog
or HDMI) and the output signal
(HDMI).

Analog Resolution

Resolution of the source video signals
and the analog video signals output at
the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT
jacks of this unit.

HDMI Error

Error message for HDMI sources or
connected HDMI devices.

Using the sleep timer
Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (page 30).
Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and
then press CSLEEP on the remote control
repeatedly to set the amount of time.
The sleep timer setting changes as shown below.

HDMI error message
120min.
The number of the connected HDMI
components is over the limit.

HDCP Error
(HDMI Message)

HDCP authentication failed.

Out Of Resolution

Out of resolution. The connected
monitor is not compatible with the
resolution of the input video signal.

OFF

90min.
30min.

60min.

Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up
in the front panel display, and the display returns to the
selected sound field program.
To cancel the sleep timer
Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and then press
CSLEEP on the remote control repeatedly to select
“SLEEP OFF”.
y
If you set the main zone to the standby mode, the sleep timer is
automatically canceled.

45 En

BASIC
OPERATION

Device Over

Sound field programs
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing
(DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
y
The Yamaha CINEMA DSP sound field programs are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Surround, Dolby TrueHD and
DTS-HD Master Audio sources.

Selecting sound field programs
Rotate the M PROGRAM selector (or set the
operation mode selector to FAMP and then
press one of the sound field selector buttons (Q)
repeatedly).
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display and in the short message display.
y
• You can select the desired sound field program and setting the
parameters by using the GUI menu (page 85).
• Available sound field parameters and the created sound field
differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this
unit.

46 En

Notes
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with the corresponding input
source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
input source (page 43) or when this unit is in the PURE
DIRECT mode (page 54).
• When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field
program, this unit applies the selected program without
activating the DTS 96/24 decoder.
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to
48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied.

Sound field programs

Descriptions of the characteristics of the sound field programs
Following indexes indicates the characteristics and trends of each sound field program.
Note
The characteristics of the sound field programs may differ depending on the settings of the listening room, etc.

Size of sound field space (Size)
Small

Sound field atmosphere (Atmosphere)
Large

Simple

Complex

Indicates the size of the sound field to be generated. If the
value for this item is small, the sound is that of a small
space, while if the value is large, the sound is that of a vast
space.

whether it is nearer to one or the other of the following;
Calm: An overall composed, moderate effect, stressing the
overall quality of the atmosphere without aiming at any
Front
Rear
extreme effects. This suits almost all contents relatively
A CINEMA DSP sound field processing expressing
well, but provides little showiness or powerfulness.
whether the effect is stronger towards the front or rear.
Powerful: Designed with specific contents in mind
When the effect is stronger towards the front, the listener (expressing vast spaces, feverish excitement, etc.). This is
senses a feeling of openness and depth towards the screen, extremely effective for the right contents, but is suited for a
while when the effect is stronger towards the rear, the
smaller range of contents.
listener gets a sense of envelopment and movement. Suits
basically all types of contents for programs with a good
front/rear balance, and is effective when selected
appropriately for programs in which the balance is more
towards either the front or rear.
Front/rear balance (F/R balance)

■ For audio music sources
y
For audio music sources, we also recommend using the PURE DIRECT mode (page 54), STRAIGHT mode (page 52), or surround
decode mode (page 53).
CLASSICAL
1

CLASSICAL

Hall in Munich
Size
This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500
seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as
normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The
listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna
This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall
with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and
ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all
around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.

Small

Large

V/H balance

Vertical

Horizontal

Atmosphere

Simple

Complex

Size

Small

Large

V/H balance

Vertical

Horizontal

Atmosphere

Simple

Complex

47 En

BASIC
OPERATION

The sound field to be generated is evaluated according to
whether it is nearer to one or the other of the following;
Simple: Sounds that fade straight-forwardly, with a light,
gentle impression, depending on the program. This suits
almost all contents relatively well, but provides little
brilliance or powerfulness.
Vertical/horizontal balance (V/H balance)
Complex: Sounds transform in complex ways as they fade
out, with a rich, brilliant impression, depending on the
Vertical
Horizontal
Indicates the balance of the vertical (height) and horizontal program.
directions for the sound field to be generated. If this item is This is extremely effective for the right contents, but is
suited for a smaller range of contents.
more in the horizontal direction, the sound is that of a
space with strong reflections from the walls, while if it is
more in the vertical direction, the sound is that of a space
Calm
Powerful
with strong reflections from the ceiling.
The sound field to be generated is evaluated according to

Sound field programs

Hall in Amsterdam
The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2200 around the circle
stage. Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels
freely.

Size

Small

Large

V/H balance

Vertical

Horizontal

Atmosphere

Simple

Complex

Size

Small

Church in Freiburg
Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church
has a pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow
shape and the high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time
and limited initial reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation
rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of the
church.

Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling
like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations
that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music.
LIVE/CLUB
2

Large

V/H balance

Vertical

Horizontal

Atmosphere

Simple

Complex

Size

Small

Large

V/H balance

Vertical

Horizontal

Atmosphere

Simple

Complex

Size

Small

LIVE/CLUB

Village Vanguard
The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with
the low ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the
stage located in the corner.

Warehouse Loft
The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off
the concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy.

Cellar Club
This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey
atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound
as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.

The Roxy Theatre
This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles,
with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the
center left of the hall.

The Bottom Line
This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was
a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people
to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant
sound.

48 En

Large

V/H balance

Vertical

Horizontal

Atmosphere

Simple

Complex

Size

Small

Large

V/H balance

Vertical

Horizontal

Atmosphere

Simple

Complex

Size

Small

Large

V/H balance

Vertical

Horizontal

Atmosphere

Simple

Complex

Size

Small

Large

V/H balance

Vertical

Horizontal

Atmosphere

Simple

Complex

Size

Small

Large

V/H balance

Vertical

Horizontal

Atmosphere

Simple

Complex

Sound field programs

■ For various sources
ENTERTAIN
3

ENTERTAIN

Sports
This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts
and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports
broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are
positioned clearly on the center while the atmosphere of the
stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a
feeling of presence in the stadium.

Size

Small

Large

V/H balance

Vertical

F/R balance

Front

Rear

Atmosphere

Calm

Powerful

Size

Small

Large

Horizontal

■ For game programs
ENTERTAIN
3

ENTERTAIN

Action Game

Roleplaying Game
This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games.
It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field
design used with “Action Game” to represent the depth and spatial
feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround
effects in the movie scenes in the game.

V/H balance

Vertical

F/R balance

Front

Rear

Atmosphere

Calm

Powerful

Small

Large

Size
V/H balance

Vertical

Horizontal

F/R balance

Front

Rear

Atmosphere

Calm

Powerful

Size

Small

Large

■ For visual sources of music
ENTERTAIN
3

ENTERTAIN

Music Video
This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live
performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge
oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that
emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of
rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that
reproduces the space of a big live hall.

V/H balance

Vertical

F/R balance

Front

Rear

Atmosphere

Calm

Powerful

Size

Small

Large

Horizontal

Recital/Opera
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum
level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices.
“Recital/Opera” offers the reverberations of an orchestra box in
front of the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic
positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround
sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall
effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The
listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera
entertainment.

V/H balance

Vertical

F/R balance

Front

Rear

Atmosphere

Calm

Powerful

Horizontal

49 En

BASIC
OPERATION

This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing and
FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range
per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with
a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while
maintaining a clear sense of directions.

Sound field programs

■ For movie sources
y
You can select the desired decoder (page 53) used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”).
MOVIE
4

MOVIE

Standard
This program create a sound field emphasizing the surrounding
feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of
multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been
designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which
the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the
left, right and rear.

Spectacle
This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale
movie productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field
matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an
excellent dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound.

Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound
design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring
movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created
virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog,
sound effects and background music.

Adventure
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design
of action and adventure movies. The sound field restrains
reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space
expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also
restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio
channels and the clarity of the sound.

Size

Small

V/H balance

Vertical

Large
Horizontal

F/R balance

Front

Rear

Atmosphere

Calm

Powerful

Size

Small

Large

V/H balance

Vertical

Horizontal

F/R balance

Front

Rear

Atmosphere

Calm

Powerful

Size

Small

Large

V/H balance

Vertical

Horizontal

F/R balance

Front

Rear

Atmosphere

Calm

Powerful

Size

Small

Large

V/H balance

Vertical

F/R balance

Front

Rear

Atmosphere

Calm

Powerful

Small

Large

Horizontal

Drama
This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide
range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and
comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum
spatial feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music
softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a
way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of
viewing.

Mono Movie
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources
such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie
theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and
reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space
with a certain sound depth.

50 En

Size
V/H balance

Vertical

F/R balance

Front

Rear

Atmosphere

Calm

Powerful

Size

Small

Large

Horizontal

V/H balance

Vertical

F/R balance

Front

Rear

Atmosphere

Calm

Powerful

Horizontal

Sound field programs

■ Stereo playback
STEREO
5

STEREO

2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2
channels.

7ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you
play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the
source to 2 channels, and then output the sound from all
speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal
for background music at parties, etc.

■ For compression artifacts
(Compressed Music Enhancer mode)
ENHANCER

Straight Enhancer
Use this program to improve the sound enhancer nearest to the
original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel
compression artifacts.

7ch Enhancer
Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7channel stereo.

■ Surround decoder mode
SUR. DECODE
7

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP sound field programs without surround speakers. It
creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound
field.
When you set “Surround” to “None” (page 93), Virtual
CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you
select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (page 46).
Note
Virtual CINEMA DSP does not activate in the following cases:
– “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source (page 43).
– headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
– the unit is in the “7ch Stereo” mode (page 51).

■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and
sound field programs with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound through ordinary headphones.
SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you
connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening
to CINEMA DSP sound field programs (page 46). When
activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the
front panel display.
Note
SILENT CINEMA does not activate in the following cases:
– “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source (page 43).
– the unit is in the “2ch Stereo” (page 51), “STRAIGHT”
(page 52) or “PURE DIRECT” (page 54) mode.

SUR. DECODE

Surround Decoder
Use this program to play back sources with using the desired
surround decoders (page 53).

51 En

BASIC
OPERATION

ENHANCER
6

■ Using sound field programs without
surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)

Sound field programs

Before performing the following operation, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to FAMP.

Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode

Enjoying unprocessed input
sources

CINEMA DSP 3D mode creates the intensive and
accurate stereoscopic sound field in the listening room.
You can activate and deactivate the CINEMA DSP 3D
mode.
Press P 3D DSP repeatedly to turn on or off the
CINEMA DSP 3D mode.
While this unit is in the CINEMA DSP 3D mode, the 3D
indicator lights up.
Lights up

MOVIE
Sci-Fi

Note
CINEMA DSP 3D does not activate (“3D:--” appears) in the
following cases:
– the “Front Presence” setting is set to “None” (page 93).
– no CINEMA DSP is selected.
– headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

52 En

When this unit is in the STRAIGHT mode, 2-channel
stereo sources are output from only the front left and right
speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into
the appropriate channels without any additional effect
processing.
Press N STRAIGHT (or T STRAIGHT) to select
“STRAIGHT”.
The names of the audio signal format of the input source
and the active decoder appear in the front panel display.
To deactivate the STRAIGHT mode
Press NSTRAIGHT (or TSTRAIGHT) again or select
another sound field program (page 46).

Using audio features
Selecting decoders

PLIIx Game
PLII Game

■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel
sources (surround decode mode)
Use this feature to play back sources with selected
decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multichannels.

y
You can change the decoder parameter settings in “Stereo/
Surround” (page 85).

Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie sources.

Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music sources.

CSII Cinema
(U.S.A. model only)

BASIC
OPERATION

Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and
then press S SUR. DECODE repeatedly on the
remote control to select the surround decode
mode.
You can select desired surround decoder modes depending
on the type of source you are playing and your personal
preference.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game
sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when
“Surround Back” (page 93) is set to “None” or using headphones.

SRS Circle Surround II processing for movie sources.

CSII Music
(U.S.A. model only)

■ Decoder descriptions
Name of the
decoder
(Decoder Type)

SRS Circle Surround II processing for music sources.

NRL-THX
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

PLIIx Music
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music
sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround
Back” (page 93) is set to “None” or using headphones.

Decoder description

Pro Logic
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.

PLIIx Movie
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie
sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when
“Surround Back” (page 93) is set to “None” or using headphones.

PLIIx Music
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music
sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when
“Surround Back” (page 93) is set to “None” or using headphones.

Neural-THX Surround processing for any sources. The
Neural-THX Surround decoder is especially suitable for the
XM HD Surround program of XM Satellite Radio.

NRL-THX Music
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Neural-THX Surround processing for music sources. The
Neural-THX Surround decoder is especially suitable for the
XM HD Surround music program of XM Satellite Radio.

y
When you select the surround decode mode for the multichannel digital sources, this unit automatically selects the
corresponding decoder for each source.

■ Selecting decoders used with MOVIE
sound field programs
You can select one of the following decoder types for use
with the MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono
Movie”). For details about the MOVIE sound field
programs, see “For movie sources” (page 50). For details
on how to select the decoder type, see “Sound field
parameter descriptions” (page 86).
Choices: PLIIx Movie (PLII Movie), Neo:6 Cinema

53 En

Using audio features

■ Selecting decoders for multi-channel
sources
If you connected surround back speakers, use this feature
to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel
sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX,
DTS-ES, or Neural-THX decoders.
Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and
then press MEXTD SUR. on the remote control
repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1channel playback.
Choice

Functions

AUTO

Activates the optimum decoder to play back
signals in 6.1/7.1 channels when this unit
recognizes a signal flag being input.

Decoders
(PLIIx Movie,
PLIIx Music,
EX/ES,
Neural-THX)

Use this feature to activate the desired decoders
for the playback of multi-channel sources
manually.

OFF

Does not use any decoders to create 6.1/7.1
channels.

y
Use this feature to activate the desired decoder manually when
this unit cannot detect the signal flag encoded to the input
sources correctly.

Before performing the following operation, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to FAMP.

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound
Use the PURE DIRECT mode to enjoy the pure fidelity
sound of the selected source. When the PURE DIRECT
mode is activated, this unit plays back the selected source
with the least circuitry.
Press KPURE DIRECT (or N PURE DIRECT)
to turn on or off the PURE DIRECT mode.
The K PURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up
and the front panel display automatically turns off while
this unit is in the PURE DIRECT mode.
Notes
• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in
the PURE DIRECT mode:
– switching the sound field program
– displaying the GUI menu
• The PURE DIRECT mode is automatically canceled whenever
this unit is turned off.

y
To make this unit output video signals during the PURE
DIRECT mode, configure the “Pure Direct” setting (page 98).

Adjusting the tonal quality

Notes
• The available decoders vary depending on the setting of the
speakers and the input sources.
• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible in the following cases:
– when “Surround” (page 93) or “Surround Back” (page 93) is
set to “None”.
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is being played.
– when the source being played does not contain surround left
and right channel signals.
– when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
– when this unit is in the stereo playback, 7ch Enhancer
(page 51) or PURE DIRECT (page 54) mode.
– when “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” (page 131).
• If “EXTD Surround” is set to “Auto” (page 106), the decoder
mode is automatically set to “AUTO” every time this unit is
turned off.
• “Neural-THX” is only available on the U.S.A. and Canada
models.

Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for
the front L/R and center speaker channels and the
subwoofer channel.

Press C TONE CONTROL on the front
panel repeatedly to select the high-frequency
response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency
response (BASS).

Rotate the M PROGRAM selector to adjust
the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or
the low-frequency response (BASS).
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Notes
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the
low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of
the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R and
center speakers and the subwoofer.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when the PURE DIRECT
mode is activated, or when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input
source.

54 En

Using audio features

Before performing the following operation, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to FAMP.

Adjusting the speaker level
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
Note
This operation will override the level adjustments made in the
automatic setup (page 35) and “Level” (page 94).

Selecting the recording source
Use this feature to select a source component from which
you want to record.

Press and hold C REC OUT until “REC
OUT” appears in the front panel display.

Rotate M PROGRAM to select the source
component.
y
To record the input source currently selected, select “SOURCE”.

Press C LEVEL and then 9k / n repeatedly
to select the speaker you want to adjust.
Display

Adjusted speaker
Front left speaker

FRONT R

Front right speaker

CENTER

Center speaker

SUR.L

Surround left speaker

SUR.R

Surround right speaker

SB L

Surround back left speaker

SB R

Surround back right speaker

FP L

Presence left speaker

FP R

Presence right speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

When zone 4 is turned on, no signal is output at the DVR OUT,
VCR OUT and MD/CD-R OUT jacks.

BASIC
OPERATION

FRONT L

Note

y
The available speaker channels differ depending on the
speaker settings.

Press 9l / h on the remote control to
adjust the speaker output level.
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

55 En

FM/AM tuning
Overview

Note
If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,
search the station manually or enter the frequency directly
(page 56).

You can use two tuning modes to tune into the desired
FM/AM station:
Frequency tuning mode
You can search or specify the frequency of the desired
FM/AM station automatically or manually (see “FM/AM
tuning operations” on this page).

y
• When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED
indicator lights up.
• To switch the information (current input source, current
sound field program, etc) displayed in the front panel
display, press JINFO (or set the operation mode to
FAMP and then press CINFO) repeatedly.
• To switch between stereo or monaural FM reception, press
HSTEREO/MONO (or OAUDIO).
• (U.S.A. model only)
If this unit is tuned into an HD Radio station (page 59), the
HD indicator lights up in the front panel display.

Preset tuning mode
You can preset the desired FM/AM station in advance, and
then recall the station by specifying the preset group and
number (see “Recalling a preset station” on page 58).
Note
Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best
reception.
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then
press 3TUNER.

■ Direct frequency tuning
Use this feature tune into the desired station directly by
entering the frequency.

Follow steps 1 and 2 in “FM/AM tuning
operations” (page 56) to select the desired
reception band.

Enter the frequency of the desired station by
pressing the numeric buttons (B).
Example: To tune into 103.7 MHz

FM/AM tuning operations
1

Press IBAND (or 8BAND) to select the
desired reception band.

If the PRESET indicator in the front panel
lights up, press GSEARCH MODE (or
ISRCH MODE) to turn it off.

FM 88.9MHz
PRESET turns off

To search the station automatically, press
and hold EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
press 9PRESET/CH k / n) for about 2
seconds. To search the station manually,
press EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
repeatedly.
• To tune into a higher frequency,
press Eh (or 9k).
• To tune into a lower frequency,
press El (or 9n).

56 En

If the entered frequency is out of the range of the FM/AM
tuning, “WRONG STATION!” appears in the front panel
display.

FM/AM tuning

Before performing the following operations, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then
press 3TUNER.

• (U.S.A. model only)
When this unit stores the FM HD Radio stations with this
feature, this unit stores only the main audio program of the
stations (HD1). When you want to store the sub-audio programs
of the FM HD Radio stations, preset the stations manually.

Preset FM/AM stations

■ Manual station preset

Use this feature to store up to 40 stations FM/AM stations
(A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset
station groups). Preset the desired stations to this unit by
using the automatic or manual station preset.

Use this feature to store the FM or AM stations manually.

■ Automatic station preset

(U.S.A. model only)
You can store the analog FM/AM radio stations and FM/
AM HD Radio stations manually, and you can also store
the sub-audio programs of FM HD Radio station.

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up
to 40 FM stations with strong signals in order.

(U.S.A. model only)
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up
to 40 AM HD Radio, FM HD Radio, and analog FM radio
stations with strong signals.

Tune into a station.
See page 56 for tuning instructions.
y

(U.S.A. model only)

Press IBAND (or 8BAND) to select the
desired reception band.
This unit searches the stations in the selected band
and then another band.

Press and hold IBAND (or 8BAND) for
more than 3 seconds.
The MEMORY indicator flashes and “AUTO
MEMORY” appears in the front panel display. After
approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts
from the current frequency and proceeds toward
higher frequencies.

Press FMEMORY (or 0MEMORY).
The PRESET indicator lights up in the front panel
and this unit automatically selects an empty preset
number.
Lights up

PRESET

y
• To store the selected station under an empty preset number
automatically, press and hold FMEMORY (or
0MEMORY) for more than 2 seconds instead of step 2.
In this case, the following steps are unnecessary.
• To cancel the manual station preset, press FMEMORY
(or 0MEMORY) again.

Flashes

A1 FM 88.9MHz
AUTO MEMORY

MEMORY

Flashes

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the
MEMORY indicator disappears.
y
• To specify the preset group and number from which this unit
stores stations, press EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
9CAT./A-E l / h and 9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly
after you perform step 2.
• To cancel the automatic station preset, press IBAND (or
8BAND) again.

To select the preset group and number (A1 to
E8), press EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
(or 9CAT./A-E l / h and 9PRESET/CH k /
n) repeatedly.
• To select a higher preset station group and number,
press Eh (or 9k).
• To select a lower preset station group and number,
press El (or 9n).
Preset station group and number

Notes
PRESET

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is
cleared when you store a new station under the same preset
station number.
• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),
automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for
all the available stations.

MEMORY A1
FM 88.9MHz

MEMORY C2
FM 88.9MHz

57 En

BASIC
OPERATION

(U.S.A. model only)
To store a sub-audio program of the HD Radio station (HD2
to HD8), press APRG SELECT b / a repeatedly to
select the desired audio program (page 59).

FM/AM tuning

y
• You can also select a preset number (1 to 8) by pressing
the numeric buttons (B).
• If you select a preset number being used (“*” appears next
to the preset number), the current preset station will be
overwritten.

Press DENTER (or 9ENTER).
The preset station is set and the PRESET indicator
disappears.

Note
The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.

Notes
• (U.S.A. model only)
When you recall one of the sub-audio program (HD2 to HD8)
of an FM HD Radio station, it takes a few seconds for this unit
to recall the desired program. While this unit recalls the subaudio program, this unit outputs the sound of the analog service
of the station.
• (U.S.A. model only)
If the selected sub-audio program is currently not available, this
unit is tuned into the main audio program, and if the main audio
program is also not available, this unit is tuned into the analog
service.

■ Clearing preset stations

■ Recalling a preset station

You can clear the assignments of preset stations.

Select the preset station you want to clear.
For details, see “Recalling a preset station” (page 58).

Press and hold GSEARCH MODE (or
ISRCH MODE) until “CLEAR?” appears in
the front panel display.

(U.S.A. model only)
You can search for preset HD Radio stations by specifying a
keyword (station name) with “Station Search” (page 91).

If the PRESET indicator in the front panel
turns off, press GSEARCH MODE (or
ISRCH MODE) to turn it on.

PRESET

FM 88.9MHz

Lights up

You cannot enter the preset tuning mode if no preset station is
set in advance.

Press EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select
the desired preset station group and number
(A1 to E8).

PRESET

A5 FM 89.5MHz

Preset station group and number

y
• Empty preset numbers are skipped.
• You can also select a preset station group (A to E) by pressing
9CAT./A-E l / h and number (1 to 8) by pressing the
numeric buttons (B).

58 En

Press DENTER (or 9ENTER) to clear the
preset station.
y

Note

A1 CLEAR?[ENT]
FM 88.9MHz

To cancel the operation, press GSEARCH MODE (or
ISRCH MODE) again.

Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only)
HD Radio technology is a new technology that enables FM and AM radio stations to broadcast programs digitally.
Digital broadcasting provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and reception as well as new data services.
Furthermore, supplemental program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio programs multicast on a
single FM HD Radio channel. For further information on HD Radio technology, visit “http://www.ibiquity.com/”.
This unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM
stereo quality AM broadcasts. In addition, this unit can receive both audio and data (such as song titles, artist names,
program types, and comments) from supplemental program services (HD1 to HD8).
Notes
• The tuning method for HD Radio stations are same as analog FM/AM radio stations; however, you cannot tune into a hybrid HD Radio
station while this unit is in the monaural tuning mode (page 56).
• This unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital HD Radio station signals. However, this unit may not automatically receive
all-digital FM station signals and the automatic tuning operation may stop. In this case, enter the frequency of the desired all-digital
FM HD Radio station directly by using the numeric buttons (A) (page 56).

Selecting HD Radio™ audio
programs

• Some audio programs may not contain data programs
depending on the broadcasting station and the time period.
• For the best reception, adjust the orientation of the antenna so
that “
” or “ ” is displayed.
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then
press 3TUNER.

Use this feature to select one of the 8 HD Radio audio
programs (HD1 to HD8) when the unit is in the tuner
mode. Each audio program contains data programs.
When the selected FM HD Radio station provides some
audio programs, currently selected audio program number
appears in the front panel display as follows.

Using the iTunes Tagging feature
This unit is equipped with the iTunes Tagging feature that
enables HD Radio listeners to “tag” songs for subsequent
preview and purchase on iTunes. For details on the iTunes
Tagging feature, visit “http://www.ibiquity.com/”.

Audio program

1
FM 88.9MHz1
WXYZ-FM
<1/3>

Press 0PRG SELECT b / a on the remote
control repeatedly to toggle between HD Radio
audio programs.

Lights up

FM 88.9MHz1
WXYZ-FM
<1/3>

y
You can also select the desired HD Radio audio program by
pressing the numeric key. While this unit is in the automatic or
manual tuning mode, press a numeric button (1-8) (A) and then
MENT.

Notes
• Only 1 HD Radio audio program (HD1) is available for AM
broadcasts, while up to 8 audio programs (HD1 to HD8) are
available for FM broadcasts. The audio programs from HD2 to
HD8 can be selected only when they contain data programs.
• When reception for an audio program ceases, the HD indicator
disappears from the front panel display and HD1 is
automatically selected after approximately 20 seconds.

Tune into an HD Radio station and select HD
Radio audio program (if available).
If the selected station supports the iTunes Tagging
feature, the TAG indicator lights up in the front panel
display and “TAG” appears in the GUI screen.

HD TAG

While a song you want to tag is being played
back, press ATAG.
The song is tagged and “Storage Success” appears in
the front panel display and GUI screen.

59 En

BASIC
OPERATION

Before performing the following operations, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then
press 3TUNER.

Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only)

Notes

TAG INFO

• “Not Available’ appears in the front panel display and GUI
screen if tagging is not available.
• If a status message or an error message appears in the front
panel display or in the GUI screen, see “iTunes Tagging”
(page 138)

The number of iTunes Tagging information files stored
in the internal memory, iTunes Tagging message

y
This unit transmits the iTunes Tagging information to the
iPod if an iPod that supports iTunes Tagging feature is
stationed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-11,
sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this
unit. Otherwise, this unit stores the information in the
internal memory and will transmit it next time your iPod is
stationed.
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to FAMP.

ANTENNA INFO
Antenna reception level

DSP PROG. INFO
Sound field program

INPUT INFO
Input source

Displaying HD Radio™ information
Use this feature to display the HD Radio information in
the front panel display or in the GUI screen.
y
• You can configure the display settings with “Display Set”
(page 105).
• To hold or release the displayed information, set the operation
mode selector to FSOURCE and then press 9ENTER.
While it is held, the HOLD indicator flashes in the front panel.

Back to “STATION INFO”

■ GUI screen
Press KDISPLAY on the remote control to turn
on or off the information display.
The following information is displayed in the GUI screen.

■ Front panel display
Press JINFO (or CINFO) repeatedly to toggle
between the following HD Radio information
displays.
STATION INFO
Station information such as station name, audio
program (only when multiple audio programs are
available) and frequency

[6]
A1

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

FM 88.9MHZ 1
WXYZ-FM
: Classic Rock
: Frankie Zipper

STEREO
HD<1/2> [TAG]

[7]
[8]
[9]

: Road to India

[5]

: Made-to-order
Play Information

Hold:ENTER

[1] Preset station group and number, frequency,
station name
[2] Program category
[3] Artist name

CATEGORY INFO

[4] Song title

Program category

[5] Album title
[6] Antenna reception level

SONG INFO

[7] Stereo/mono

Artist name, song title

[8] “TAG” (only when tagging is available)

ALBUM INFO
Album title

60 En

[9] Audio program number (currently selected/
total)

XM® Satellite Radio tuning
XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news, talk and
entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip
hop, XM has something for every music fan.
XM Satellite Radio online information
For U.S. customers: http://www.xmradio.com/
For Canadian customers: http://www.xmradio.ca/

Note
The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.

XM READY legal disclaimer

■ Enjoying XM HD Surround content
This unit is equipped with the Neural-THX and Neural-THX Music decoders that play back the XM HD surround sound
content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience (page 53).

Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock
Connect XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home
Dock (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of
this unit. For details, see the operating instructions
provided with the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock.
XM

y
To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals,
the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock must be placed at or near a
southerly facing window with no obstacles in the path to the
sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. Use the “ANTENNA
INFO” information in the front panel or in the GUI screen
(page 64) to check the antenna reception level and adjust the
orientation of the antenna.

Notes
• If “CHECK ANTENNA” or “CHECK XM TUNER” appears in
the front panel display, the connection and setting of the
antenna, XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, or XM Mini-Tuner may
not be correct.
• If “UPGRADE XM TUNER” appears in the front panel display,
the connected XM Mini-Tuner is incompatible with this unit.
XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock
(sold separately)

61 En

BASIC
OPERATION

XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required (each sold separately) to receive XM
service. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any
technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System. Installation costs and other fees
and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent
explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO
(U.S. residents) and 1-877-GETXMSR (Canadian residents). XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and
Canada. ©2008 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.

XM® Satellite Radio tuning

Activating XM Satellite Radio

Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock,
inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM MiniTuner Home Dock to your XM Ready® home audio
system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to
subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There
are three places to find your eight character XM Radio ID:
On the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package,
and on XM Channel 0. Record the XM Radio ID in the
following eight squares for reference.

Search for a channel by using one of the XM
Satellite Radio search modes.
• To select a channel from the all channel list, see
“All Channel Search mode” (page 62).
• To select a channel by category, see “Category
Search mode” (page 62).
• To select a channel from the preset channels, see
“Preset Search mode” (page 63).
• To select the desired channel directly by entering
the channel number, see “Direct number access
mode” (page 63).

y
Note
The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”.
Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at
http://activate.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800967-2346). Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in Canada
online at https://activate.xmradio.ca/ or call 1-877-GET-XMSR
(1-877-438-9677). You will need a major credit card. XM will
send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel
lineup. Activation normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during
peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM Ready home
audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the full
lineup on your XM Ready home audio system you are done.

• You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the XM HD
surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in
multi-channels (page 53).
• You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (page 63).
• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front
panel display or in the GUI screen (page 64).

■ All Channel Search mode

Press GSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH
SEARCH”.

Press EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search
for a channel within all channels.

Before performing the following operations, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE.

y
You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding
EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 9PRESET/CH k / n).

XM Satellite Radio operations
1

■ Category Search mode
Rotate the LINPUT selector (or press
3XM) to select “XM” as the input source.
The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in
the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio
information (such as channel number, channel name,
category, artist name, or song title) for the currently
selected channel appears in the front panel display.
Lights up
USB
NET

DOCK

V-AUX

VCR

DVR

CBL/SAT

DVD

BD/HD DVD

MD/CD-R

CD PHONO MULTI CH

TUNER XM

Press GSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.

Press ICATEGORY (or 9A-E/CAT. l / h)
repeatedly to change the channel category.

Press EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search
for a channel within the selected channel
category.

SIRIUS

001 Preview
y

y
When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit
automatically recalls the previously selected channel.

Notes
• The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the
analog AUDIO OUT jacks.
• If a status message or an error message appears in the front
panel display or in the GUI screen, see “XM Satellite
Radio” (page 139)

62 En

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding
EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 9PRESET/CH k / n).

XM® Satellite Radio tuning

■ Preset Search mode
Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search
mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For
details, see “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset
channels” (page 63).

Press GSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET
SEARCH”.

Press ICATEGORY (or 9A-E/CAT. l / h)
repeatedly to change the preset channel
group (A to E).

Press EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change
the preset channel number (1 to 8).

Setting the XM Satellite Radio
preset channels
You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite
Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in
each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall
any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel
group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”
(page 63).

Search for a channel you want to set as a
preset channel by using one of the XM
Satellite Radio search modes.
For details, see “XM Satellite Radio operations”
(page 62).

You can also select the preset channel number directly by
pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) (B).

■ Direct number access mode

Channel number

Press ISRCH MODE on the remote control
repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or
“CAT SEARCH”.

Press the numeric buttons (B) to enter the
desired three-digit channel number.
For example, to enter the number 123, press the
numeric buttons (B) as shown below.

BASIC
OPERATION

043 XMU

Press FMEMORY (or 0MEMORY).
The PRESET indicator lights up in the front panel
and this unit automatically selects an empty preset
number.
Lights up

PRESET

MEMORY A1
043 XMU

y
• To store the selected channel under an empty preset
number automatically, press and hold FMEMORY (or
0MEMORY) for more than 2 seconds instead of step 2.
In this case, the following steps are unnecessary.
• To cancel the preset operation, press FMEMORY (or
0MEMORY) again.

y
• To display the XM Radio ID number in the front panel display,
select channel “0”.
• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the
numeric buttons (B) on the remote control and then press
NENT to confirm the input number.
• Instead of pressing NENT to tune into the channel
immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms
the entered channel number.
• Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons (B) or NENT
cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure.
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then
press 3XM.

To select the preset channel group and
number (A1 to E8), press EPRESET/
TUNING/CH l / h (or 9CAT./A-E l / h
and 9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly.
• To select a higher preset channel group and
number, press Eh (or 9k).
• To select a lower preset channel group and number,
press El (or 9n).
y
• You can also select a preset number (1 to 8) by pressing
the numeric buttons (B).
• If you select a preset number being used (“*” appears next
to the preset number), the current preset channel will be
overwritten.

63 En

XM® Satellite Radio tuning

Press DENTER (or 9ENTER).
The preset channel is set and the PRESET indicator
disappears.

■ Clearing preset channels
You can clear the assignments of preset XM Satellite
Radio channels.

Select the preset XM Satellite Radio channel
to clear.
For details, see “Preset Search mode” (page 63).

CATEGORY INFO
Channel category, channel number, channel name

SONG INFO
Artist name, song title, channel number, channel name

ANTENNA INFO
Antenna reception level, channel number, channel name

Press and hold GSEARCH MODE (or
ISRCH MODE) until “CLEAR?” appears in
the front panel display.

DSP PROG. INFO
Sound field program

Press DENTER (or 9ENTER) to clear the
preset channel.
To cancel the operation, press GSEARCH MODE
(or ISRCH MODE).

INPUT INFO
Input source, channel number, channel name

Before performing the following operations, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to FAMP.

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information
Use this feature to display the XM Satellite Radio
information in the front panel display or in the GUI
screen.
y
• You can configure the display settings with “Display Set”
(page 105).
• You can hold or release the displayed information by pressing
9ENTER. While it is held, the HOLD indicator flashes in the
front panel.

Back to “CATEGORY INFO”

y
• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that
cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be
displayed with a space.
• When the antenna of the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock cannot
receive the signals, “NO SIGNAL” appears in the front panel
display.

■ GUI screen
Press KDISPLAY on the remote control to turn
on or off the information display.
The following information is displayed in the GUI screen.
[6]

Notes
• If a status message or an error message appears in the front
panel display or GUI screen, see “XM Satellite Radio”
(page 139).
• The current XM Satellite Radio reception level appears on the
top of the XM Satellite Radio information screen. For the best
reception, adjust the orientation of the antenna of Home Dock
so that “
” or “ ” is displayed here. “
” is displayed if
the antenna cannot receive the signals correctly. In this case,
adjust the orientation of the antenna (page 61).

■ Front panel display
Press JINFO (or CINFO) repeatedly to toggle
between the following XM Satellite Radio
information display modes.

64 En

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

Category Search
043 : XMU
: Rock
: Cold Play
: Speed of sound

[5]
Play Information

Hold:ENTER

[1] Search mode (page 62)
[2] Channel number, channel name
[3] Channel category
[4] Artist name
[5] Song title
[6] Antenna reception level

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning
SIRIUS Satellite Radio provides over 130 channels of exclusive entertainment and 100% commercial-free music. Only
SIRIUS has more than 65 original music channels, from today’s hits to R&B, oldies, and classical masterpieces. From
authentic country and real bluegrass to cool jazz, hot latin, reggae, rock and many more. Best of all, it’s all 100%
commercial-free.
SIRIUS also has more than 55 channels of world-class sports, news and entertainment. Included as part of your
subscription, you get up to 16 NFL games a week, up to 40 NBA games a week and up to 40 NHL games a week. (Games
are broadcast during their respective seasons.)
Coupled with great sports news from ESPN, the SIRIUS sports offering is unrivaled. And don’t forget a host of other
great news and entertainment, like NPR, CNBC, Fox News, Radio Disney and E! Entertainment Radio. For more
information, visit http://www.sirius.com/.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio legal disclaimer
SIRIUS is available in the U.S.A. for subscribers with addresses in the continental U.S.A. and is available in Canada for subscribers
with a Canadian address. To Get SIRIUS Satellite Radio a subscription and compatible tuner and antenna are required and sold
separately. Visit sirius.com for the most complete and up-to-date channel lineup and information.
“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo and related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.

Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the
SIRIUS jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see
the operating instructions provided with the SiriusConnect
tuner.

y
• To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
signals, the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner must be placed
at or near a window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. The
orientation of the antenna for the best reception differs
depending on the area. Refer to the instruction manuals
supplied with the SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the
antenna.You can mount it indoors or outdoors.
• Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel or
“SIRIUS Information” screen in the GUI screen (page 70) to
check the antenna reception level and adjust the orientation of
the antenna.
• You need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall
outlet.

Notes
SIRIUS

T
AN

• If “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA ERROR” appears in
the front panel display, the connection of the SiriusConnect
tuner or antenna is incorrect. In such cases, check the
connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and the antenna.
• If “NOT SUPPORTED” appears in the front panel display, this
unit does not support the connected SiriusConnect tuner.

65 En

BASIC
OPERATION

Connecting the SiriusConnect™
tuner

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

Activating SIRIUS Satellite
Radio™ subscription
Before using the SIRIUS Satellite Radio feature, you need
to activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription. To
activate the subscription you need the Sirius ID which is
uniquely assigned to the SiriusConnect tuner. Sirius ID is
12-digit number and it appears on the package of the
SiriusConnect tuner, on the label of the SiriusConnect
tuner, and when you tune into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
channel “0” (see below).

Before performing the following operations, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
operations
1

■ Displaying the Sirius ID of your
SiriusConnect tuner

Set the operation mode selector on the
remote control to FSOURCE and then press
3SIRIUS.

Rotate the LINPUT selector (or press
3SIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input
source.
The cursor on the left of the SIRIUS indicator lights
up in the front panel display and the SIRIUS Satellite
Radio information (such as channel number, channel
name, category, artist name, or song title) for the
currently selected channel appears in the front panel
display.
Lights up
USB
NET

Press B0 and then NENT to display the
Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner.
“000 Sirius IDxxxxxxxxxxxx” (“xxxxxxxxxxxx”
indicates the 12-digit Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect
tuner) appears in the front panel display.

VCR

DVR

CBL/SAT

DVD

BD/HD DVD

MD/CD-R

CD PHONO MULTI CH

TUNER XM

SIRIUS

184 SIRIUS Wea

When you select “SIRIUS” as the input source, this unit
automatically recalls the previously selected channel.

Notes
• The SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the
analog AUDIO OUT jacks.
• When you have not activated your subscription yet, you
can only select channel “184” or “000”.
• If a status message or an error message appears in the front
panel display or in the GUI screen, see “SIRIUS Satellite
Radio” (page 140).

ID:
Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to activate
your subscription.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio online information
Contact for activation
URL: https//activate.siriusradio.com/
Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)

V-AUX

Write the Sirius ID below.

DOCK

y
Status messages appear in the front panel display or GUI screen
during the activation. For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio”
(page 140). Once the activation is finished, “SUB UPDATED”
appears.

Search for a channel by using one of the
SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes.
• To select a channel from the all channel list, see
“All Channel Search mode” (page 67).
• To select a channel by category, see “Category
Search mode” (page 67).
• To select a channel from the preset channels, see
“Preset Search mode” (page 67).
• To select the desired channel directly by entering
the channel number, see “Direct number access
mode” (page 67).

y
• If you tune into a channel that you do not subscribe, “CALL
888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE” appears in the front panel
display.
• You can set the SIRIUS Satellite Radio preset channels
(page 68).
• You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information in the
front panel display or in the GUI screen (page 70).

66 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

■ All Channel Search mode

Press GSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH
SEARCH”.

Press EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search
for a channel within all channels.

y
• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding
EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 9PRESET/CH k / n).
• You can skip channels to the previous or next category by
pressing ICATEGORY (or 9A-E/CAT. l / h).

■ Category Search mode

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search
mode, you must preset SIRIUS channels. For details, see
“Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ preset channels”
(page 68).

Press GSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET
SEARCH”.

Press ICATEGORY (or 9A-E/CAT. l / h)
repeatedly to change the preset channel
group (A to E).

Press EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change
the preset channel number (1 to 8).

Press GSEARCH MODE (or ISRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.
Press ICATEGORY (or 9A-E/CAT. l / h)
repeatedly to change the channel category.
Press EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
9PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search
for a channel within the selected channel
category.

y
You can also select the preset channel number directly by
pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) (B).

■ Direct number access mode

Press ISRCH MODE on the remote control
repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or
“CAT SEARCH”.

Press the numeric buttons (B) to enter the
desired three-digit channel number.
For example, to enter the number 123, press the
numeric buttons (B) as shown below.

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding
EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 9PRESET/CH k / n).

Note
This unit skips the channels when this unit is in the All Channel
Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it
is not malfunction of this unit):
– the channel is locked (page 69).
– the channel is out of service.
– you do not subscribe to the channel.

y
• To display the Sirius ID number displayed in the front panel
display, select channel “0”.
• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the
numeric buttons (B) on the remote control and then press
NENT to confirm the input number.
• Instead of pressing NENT to tune into the channel
immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms
the entered channel number.
• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a
one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms
the entered channel number.
• If the selected channel is locked, “PIN:____” appears in the
front panel display. Enter the four-digit Parental Lock code
number by using the numeric buttons (B) or press NENT to
cancel (page 69).

67 En

BASIC
OPERATION

■ Preset Search mode

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

Before performing the following operations, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then
press 3SIRIUS.

Setting the SIRIUS Satellite
Radio™ preset channels
You can use this feature to store up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite
Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in
each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall
any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel
group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”
(page 67).

Search for a channel you want to set as a
preset channel by using one of the SIRIUS
Satellite Radio search modes.
For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
operations” (page 66).

001 SIRIUS Hit
Channel number

Press FMEMORY (or 0MEMORY).
The PRESET indicator lights up in the front panel
and this unit automatically selects an empty preset
number.
Lights up

PRESET

MEMORY A1
001 SIRIUS HIT

68 En

• You can also select a preset number (1 to 8) by pressing
the numeric buttons (B).
• If you select a preset number being used (“*” appears next
to the preset number), the current preset channel will be
overwritten.

Press DENTER (or 9ENTER).
The preset channel is set and the PRESET indicator
disappears.

■ Clearing preset channels
You can clear the assignments of preset SIRIUS Satellite
Radio channels.

Select the preset SIRIUS Satellite Radio
channel to clear.
For details, see “Preset Search mode” (page 67).

Press and hold GSEARCH MODE (or
ISRCH MODE) until “CLEAR?” appears in
the front panel display.

Press DENTER (or 9ENTER) to clear the
preset channel.
To cancel the operation, press HSEARCH MODE
(or ISRCH MODE).

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

Setting the Parental Lock

You can use the Parental Lock feature to limit the access
to the desired SIRIUS Satellite channels. This unit
automatically skips the locked channels when this unit is
in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode
and you search a channel by pressing EPRESET/
TUNING/CH l / h (or 9PRESET/CH k / n).

Note
In the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen, this unit
outputs the sound of the selected channel even if the
channel is locked.

■ Setting the code number and the locking
channels
Use this feature to set the Parental Lock code number
(PIN) and select the channels to be locked.

Set the operation mode selector to FAMP
on the remote control and then press
IMENU to display the GUI menu.

When you select the locked channel and press 9ENTER,
this unit unlocks the selected channel.

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Input
Select” and then press 9h.

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the SIRIUS
Satellite Radio icon and then press
?SUBMENU.

Press 9n to select “Parental Lock” and then
9ENTER.
The following screen appears.

NEW PIN
Parental Lock

0000
Apply:ENTER

Repeat steps 7 and 8 to lock or unlock
another channel.
y
To switch between the category list screen and channel list
screen, press 9k / n / l / h to select “CAT” or
“CHAN” and then press 9ENTER.

Press 9k / n / l / h to select “EXIT” and
then press 9ENTER.

Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu.
This unit is tuned into the last channel you select in
the “Parental Lock” screen. If the channel is locked,
this unit is tuned into “184 SIRIUS Weather &
Emergency” or “000 Sirius ID”.

y
• If you forget or want to change the Parental lock code number,
use “SIRIUS PIN” (page 131) to reset the Parental Lock code
number.
• Selecting “ALL” in “INITIALIZE” (page 131) will cancel all
parental locks.

■ Tuning into the locked channels

y
If the Parental Lock code number is already set, “PIN ----”
appears instead of “NEW PIN 0000”.

Use 9k / n / l / h to enter the desired 4digit code number.
• To select a number, press 9k / n.
• To move the digit position, press 9l / h.

You can tune into the locked channels by the Direct
number access mode or preset tuning mode. When you
tune into the locked channel, following message appears
in the front panel display. Enter the code number you set
for the Parental Lock feature by using the numeric buttons
(B) or press NENT to cancel the tuning.
Channel number

y
If the Parental Lock code number is already set, enter it.

018 LOCKED
PIN:____

Press 9ENTER to confirm the code number.
The SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen
appears.

69 En

BASIC
OPERATION

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the
channel you want to lock and then press
9ENTER.
Check mark appears before the locked channel.
y

y
If the menu directory other than “Top Menu” (page 84) is
displayed, press and hold IMENU to display the top GUI
menu.

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired
channel category and then press 9ENTER.
The SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen
appears.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

Note
If the entered code number is incorrect, “Wrong” appears in the
front panel display and this unit is tuned into the previously
selected channel.
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to FAMP.

DSP PROG. INFO
Sound field program

INPUT INFO
Input source, channel number, channel name

Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite
Radio™ information
Use this feature to display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
information in the front panel display or in the GUI
screen.
y
• You can configure the display settings with “Display Set”
(page 105).
• You can hold or release the displayed information by pressing
9ENTER. While it is held, the HOLD indicator flashes in the
front panel.

Note
If a status message or an error message appears in the front
panel display or GUI screen, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio”
(page 140).

■ Front panel display
Press JINFO (or CINFO) repeatedly to toggle
between the following SIRIUS Satellite Radio
information display modes.

Back to “CATEGORY INFO”

y
• If the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information contains a character
that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be
displayed with a space.
• When the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner cannot receive the
signals, “ACQUIRING” appears in the front panel display.
• When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears.

■ GUI screen
Press KDISPLAY on the remote control to turn
on or off the information display.
The following information is displayed in the GUI screen.
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]

ALL CHANNEL SEARCH
008 : Big ’80s
: Pop
: Sanumemo
: Road to India
: Frankie Zipper

[6]
Play Information

Hold:ENTER

CATEGORY INFO

[1] Search mode (page 66)

Channel category, channel number, channel name

[2] Channel number/name
[3] Channel category

SONG INFO

[4] Artist name

Artist name, song title, channel number, channel name

[5] Song title
[6] Composer name

COMPOSER INFO
Composer name, channel number, channel name

ANTENNA INFO
Antenna reception level, channel number, channel name

70 En

[7] Antenna reception level

Using Bluetooth™ components
You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of this unit and
enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without wiring between
this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “pairing” the connected Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
and your Bluetooth component in advance.
For details about status messages displayed in the front panel display and in the GUI screen, see “Bluetooth” (page 144).
Note
This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Bluetooth profile.

While the Bluetooth receiver is in the pairing mode,
DOCK indicator flashes in the front panel display.

Pairing the Bluetooth™ receiver
and your Bluetooth component

y
To cancel the pairing, press DENTER (or 9ENTER) again.

Check that the Bluetooth component detects
the Bluetooth receiver.
If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth
receiver, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in
the Bluetooth device list.

Select the Bluetooth receiver in the
Bluetooth device list and then enter the pass
key “0000” on the Bluetooth component.
When the pairing procedure is successful,
“Completed” appears in the front panel display.

y
• You need the pairing operation only for the first time when you
use the Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth receiver.
• Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other
component with which Bluetooth communications are to be
established. If necessary, refer to the other component’s
operating instructions.

There are two pairing methods: pairing by using “Pairing”
in the GUI menu and quick pairing.

■ Pairing by using the GUI menu
Use this feature to perform pairing with the GUI screen.
For details, see “Pairing” (page 91).

■ Quick pairing
To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the
pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully
understand all the instructions before starting.

Rotate the LINPUT selector (or set the
operation mode selector to FSOURCE and
then press 3DOCK) to select “DOCK” as
the input source.

Turn on your Bluetooth component and then
set the Bluetooth component to the pairing
mode.
For details about how to operate the Bluetooth
component, refer to the manual for it.

Press and hold DENTER (or 9ENTER)
until “Searching” appears in the front panel
display.

Note
The Yamaha Bluetooth receiver can be paired with up to eight
Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully
with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the
pairing data for the least recently used other component is cleared.

Playback of the Bluetooth™
component
1

Rotate the LINPUT selector (or set the
operation mode selector to FSOURCE and
then press 3DOCK) to select “DOCK” as
the input source.

Start playback of your Bluetooth component.
When the connected Bluetooth receiver detects the
Bluetooth component, “BT Connected” appears in
the front panel display.

y
• When you press 9ENTER on the remote control, the
connected Bluetooth receiver searches and connect to the last
connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth receiver
cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found” appears in
the front panel display.
• To disconnect the Bluetooth receiver from the Bluetooth
component, press 9ENTER.

71 En

BASIC
OPERATION

Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth
component with the Bluetooth receiver connected to this
unit for the first time or if the pairing data has been
deleted. “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a
Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications.

Music Content menu
In “Music Content” menu of the GUI menu, you can browse the music contents of iPod, USB component, PC/
MusicCAST, Internet radio and Rhapsody® (U.S.A. model only). You can also use the playback control feature or
configure the playback style setting for the selected sub input source.

Music Content menu operations
1

Navigate the menu of the selected sub input
source.
For details about the menu items and operation
procedure for each sub input source, see the
following pages.
• iPod (page 73)
• USB (page 75)
• PC/MCX (page 75)
• NET RADIO (page 75)
• Rhapsody (page 75)

Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu.

Set the operation mode selector to FAMP
on the remote control and then press
IMENU to display the GUI menu.
y
If the menu directory other than “Top Menu” (page 84) is
displayed, press and hold IMENU to display the top GUI
menu.

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Music
Content” and then press 9h.
iPod
USB
PC/MCX

Select:ENTER

NET RADIO

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired
sub input source and then press 9ENTER.
The menu of the selected sub input source appears in
the GUI screen. The following screen shows the iPod
menu for example.

Music
Videos
Settings
"Simple Remote Mode"

1/4

Note
If the selected sub input source is not available, “Not Available”
appears.

72 En

Using iPod™
Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit (page 27), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can
also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to enhance the sound quality of the compression artifacts
(such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (page 51).
Notes
• This unit supports iPod touch, iPod (Click Wheel, including iPod classic), iPod nano and iPod mini.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model of your Yamaha iPod universal dock. The following description is
based on using YDS-11.

y
• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod Connected” appears in the front panel display.
• For details about status messages displayed in the front panel display and in the GUI screen, see “iPod” (page 144).
• You can select whether or not this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod when this unit is in the standby mode by configuring
the “Standby Charge” setting (page 106).

The following diagram shows the construction of the iPod menu. For information on how to display the iPod menu, see
“Music Content menu operations” (page 72).
iPod

Music

Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers

playlists
artist list
album list
song list
genre list
composer list

song list
album list
song list

song list

artist list
album list

album list
song list

song list

Videos *
Settings

Repeat
Shuffle

“Simple Remote
Mode”

Note
*

“Videos” does not appear unless your iPod and Yamaha iPod universal dock support the video browsing feature.
Also, the folder structure under “Videos” varies depending on the video contents stored on your iPod.

73 En

BASIC
OPERATION

iPod menu tree

Using iPod™

You can control your iPod with the following remote
control buttons.

• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random
order.
• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in
random order.

■ GUI menu operation

To navigate the iPod menu using the GUI screen, set the
operation mode selector to FAMP.

• To toggle between setting parameters, press 9ENTER
repeatedly.
• When “Repeat” is set to “One” or “All”, “ ” or “ ” appears
in the GUI screen.
• When “Shuffle” is on, “
” appears in the GUI screen.

Controlling iPod™

Button
9 ENTER

Function
Subsequent menu/Play

Menu up

■ Simple Remote Mode

Menu down

Previous menu

Subsequent menu

If you select “Simple Remote Mode” in the iPod menu,
this unit turns off the GUI screen and allows you to
operate your iPod with the remote control of this unit or
controls on your iPod.

0 SUBMENU

Turns on/off the submenu when the play
information screen is displayed

I MENU

Turns on/off the GUI menu when the play
information screen is not displayed

K DISPLAY

Turns on/off the play information screen

y
You can also select the Simple Remote Mode by holding down
KDISPLAY for 3 seconds when the operation mode selector is
set to FAMP.

■ Play information screen
Note

[4]

You can control your iPod by using the zone OSD. However, the
design and available functions may be different from the iPod
menu displayed in the GUI screen in the main zone.

[1]

Button
A ll

Function
Search backward (Press and hold)

[5]

Made-to-order

[6]

Road to India

■ Playback control operation
To operate your iPod using the following remote control
buttons, set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE
and then press 3DOCK.

Frankie Zipper

[2]
[3]

[7]

1/12
0:51
Play Information

-7:44
SUBMENU

[1] Album art (if available)
[2] Track number/total tracks
[3] Elapsed time

Search forward (Press and hold)

Skip forward

Skip backward

Stop

[5] Shuffle and repeat icons

Pause

[6] Artist name, album title, song title

Play

■ Playback style settings
To change the following playback style settings, select
“Settings” in the iPod menu.
Repeat (Repeat)
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a
sequence of songs.
Choices: Off, One, All
• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.
• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of
songs.
Shuffle (Shuffle)
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in
random order.
Choices: Off, Songs, Albums

74 En

[8]
[9]

[4]

(playback),
(pausing),
(search
forward) or
(search backward)

[7] Progress bar
[8] Remaining time
[9] Submenu icon
Submenu items
Play Control (Playback control)
Select the desired playback control item and then press (or
press and hold) 9ENTER to control your iPod.
Play Style (Playback style)
Select the desired playback style setting and then press
9ENTER repeatedly to toggle between setting
parameters. For details on the playback style settings, see
“Playback style settings” (page 74).

Using USB and network features
This unit is equipped with USB and network features that allow you to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3, MPEG-4
AAC, and WMA files saved on your USB storage device, USB portable audio player, PC and Yamaha MCX-2000 or
access the Internet Radio. You can also access the Rhapsody® (U.S.A. model only).
Notes
• Yamaha MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.
• For further details about networking, refer to the operation manuals supplied with your network devices. Also refer to technical
reference books, if needed.
• Some WAV, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played.

y
For details about status messages displayed in the front panel display and in the GUI screen, see “USB and Network” (page 142).

USB and network menu tree

USB *1

folder list
file list

PC/MCX

PC server list *2
MusicCAST *2

NET RADIO

Bookmarks
Locations
Genres

station list
location list *3
genre list

New Stations
Popular stations
Podcasts
Help

station list
station list
Podcast list
help item list

My Library

Artists
Albums
Tracks
Playlists
Channels

Rhapsody *4

Search *5
Rhapsody Music Guide *6
Channels
Rhapsody
Channels

BASIC
OPERATION

The following diagram shows the construction of the USB, PC/MCX, NET RADIO and Rhapsody menus. For
information on how to display these menus, see “Music Content menu operations” (page 72).

station list
Podcast list

artist list
album list
track list
playlists
channel list

album list
track list

genre list

channel list

track list

Notes
*1

The directory hierarchy of the USB menu varies depending on the folder structure of the connected USB component.
Only the available PC servers and MCX-2000 are displayed.
*3 The folder structure under the location list varies depending on your region.
*4 The account setup screen appears if you have not entered your account information yet. For details, see “Account setup for
Rhapsody®” (page 78).
*5 You can search contents by keyword.
*6 You can search contents by category provided by Rhapsody®.
*2

75 En

Using USB and network features

Navigating USB and network
menus
You can navigate the USB and network menus with the
following remote control buttons.

■ Play information screen
The following screen shows the play information screen
displayed for USB content playback for example.
Available information and functions vary depending on
the selected sub input source.
[3]

■ GUI menu operation

[4]

To navigate the USB and network menus using the GUI
screen, set the operation mode selector to FAMP.
Button
9 ENTER

Frankie Zipper

[1]

Made-to-order
Road to India

Function
Subsequent menu/Play

[2]

0:51
Play Information

SUBMENU

Menu up

Menu down

[1] Artist name, album title, song title

Previous menu

[2] Elapsed time

Subsequent menu

0 SUBMENU

Turns on/off the submenu when any submenu
items are available (submenu icon appears on
the bottom right corner of the GUI menu
screen)

I MENU

Turns on/off the GUI menu when the play
information screen is not displayed

K DISPLAY

Turns on/off the play information screen

You can navigate the USB and network menus by using the
zone OSD. However, the design and available functions may be
different from the menus displayed in the GUI screen in the
main zone.

■ Playback control operation
To operate your USB or network component using the
following remote control buttons, set the operation mode
selector to FSOURCE and then press 3USB/NET.
Button

Function
Skip forward (except “NET RADIO”)

Skip backward (except “NET RADIO”)

Stop

Pause/Play (“Rhapsody” only)

Play (Menu browse mode)
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)

Notes
• Some button operations do not work depending on the selected
sub input source.
• (U.S.A. model only)
Ae and Ab do not work during Rhapsody channel
playback. Aa works up to 30 times every 3 hours.

76 En

(playback)

[4] Shuffle and repeat icons
[5] Submenu icon
Submenu items
Play Control (Playback control)
Select the desired playback control item and then press (or
press and hold) 9ENTER to control the playback.

Note

A a

[3]

[5]

Play Style (Playback style)
Select the desired playback style setting and then press
9ENTER repeatedly to toggle between setting
parameters. For details on the playback style settings, see
“Playback style settings” (page 74).
y
To turn on the shuffle feature, set “Shuffle” to “On”.

Using USB and network features

Using a USB storage device or a
USB portable audio player
Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3,
WMA and MPEG-4 AAC files saved on your USB storage
device or USB portable audio player connected to the
USB ports of this unit.
This unit is equipped with the front and rear USB ports.
Set “USB Select” to “Front” or “Rear” to select the active
USB port (page 92).
Notes

■ Installing Windows Media Player 11 on
your PC
With Windows Media Player 11, you can play back the
audio files on your PC. For details refer to the documents
of Windows Media Player 11.
y
You can also play back the audio files on your PC with
Windows Media Connect 2.0 installed.

Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.
You can download the installer of Windows Media
Player 11 from the Microsoft website, or use the
upgrade function of the installed Microsoft Windows
Media Player.

Turn on your PC and then share a folder on
the PC.
The shared folder is added to the PC server list in the
top “PC/MCX” menu screen.

Using a PC server or Yamaha
MCX-2000
Use this feature to enjoy music files saved on your PC or
Yamaha MCX-2000. MCX-2000 is a music server that
enhances the concept of Yamaha exclusive MusicCAST, a
digital music delivery method over a personal network.

Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC,
or register this unit on your Yamaha MCX2000.
• Refer to “Installing Windows Media Player 11 on
your PC” and “Registering this unit on the Yamaha
MCX-2000” (page 77).
• This procedure is needed only for the first time.
• (PC only) You may need to make some settings of
Windows Media Player 11 to start the contents
sharing. Refer to the attached documents of
Windows Media Player 11.

Notes
• If the operating system (OS) of your PC is Windows Vista,
Windows Media Player 11 is pre-installed (except some
products).
• Some security software installed on your PC (anti-virus
software, firewall software, etc.) may block the access of this
unit to your PC. In such cases, configure the security software
appropriately.

■ Registering this unit on the Yamaha
MCX-2000
You must register this unit on your Yamaha MCX-2000 so
that this unit can be recognized by your Yamaha MCX2000. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied
with your Yamaha MCX-2000.

Turn off this unit.

Turn on your PC or MCX-2000.

Set your Yamaha MCX-2000 to the “Auto
Config” mode.

Select “PC/MCX” in the “Music Content”
menu and then select the desired server or
“MusicCAST” to begin playback.

Turn on this unit.
• “MusicCAST” appears in the top “PC/MCX”
menu screen.
• if the client ID for this unit appears in the OSD of
your Yamaha MCX-2000 (shown as “CLXXXXX”), the automatic configuration is
complete.

Notes
• Yamaha MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.
• You can connect this unit to up to 15 PC servers and 1 MCX2000, and each server must be connected to the same subnet as
this unit.

77 En

BASIC
OPERATION

• This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT 16 or
FAT 32 format) or USB MTP devices.
• Only the first partition is displayed in the GUI menu. You
cannot select files in other partitions.
• Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per
directory are recognized.
• Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the
requirements.
• Some WAV, MP3, WMA and MPEG-4 AAC files may not be
playable or may be noisy when played.
• When you connect your USB storage device or USB portable
audio player, there may be an about 10 seconds delay.

• Some WAV, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WMA files on your PC
may not be playable or may be noisy when played.
• (MCX-2000 only) Files marked with an asterisk (*) have not
been converted to MP3 format. You cannot play back such files
immediately unless you set the “Receive PCM Stream” setting
of this unit to “ON” on MCX-2000. For details, refer to the
instruction manual of MCX-2000.

Using USB and network features

Notes
• The latter part of the client ID for this unit is same as the last 5
digits of the MAC address of this unit.
• To clear the registered client ID of this unit, use the “Manual
Config” mode of your Yamaha MCX-2000 (refer to the
instruction manual of MCX-2000) and then select
“NETWORK” in “ADVANCED SETUP” on this unit
(page 131).
• The client control functions of MusicCAST over this unit other
than “View Play Info”, “Receive PCM Stream” and “Edit Client
title” are not available. Avoid using these functions as it will
stop the playback on this unit.

Using the Internet Radio
Use this feature to listen to Internet Radio stations. This
unit uses the vTuner Internet Radio station database
service particularly customized for this unit, providing
over 2000 radio station database. Further, you can store
your favorite stations with bookmarks.
Notes
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
• Some Internet Radio stations may not be played.
• To listen to the Internet Radio, connect this unit to your network
(page 28).
• A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, ISDN) will
not provide satisfactory results, and a broadband connection is
strongly recommended (i.e. a cable modem, an xDSL modem,
etc.). For detailed information, consult with your ISP.

y
• “Podcast” is a type of the Internet Radio service, and there are a
number of Podcast services available on the Internet. The
Podcast is not a continuous service. That is, this unit stops
playback when an episode of the Podcast ends.
• Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the access
of this unit to Internet Radio stations. In such cases, configure
the security settings appropriately.

■ Storing your favorite Internet Radio
stations with bookmarks

details, refer to the help information on the website.
URL: http://yradio.vtuner.com/

Using the Rhapsody® service
(U.S.A. model only)
Prohibition
It is strictly prohibited to modify, reproduce, reverse-engineer
or use this unit and/or built-in software for use other than
audiovisual purposes.

The Rhapsody® service is the power behind the
Rhapsody® Media Player (the Rhapsody® player software
that you can download to your computer). Rhapsody®
service supplies the music, keeps My Library up to date,
provides you with Rhapsody® channels, the Playlist
Central online community, and manages your downloads.
Your software connects to Rhapsody® service through the
internet. Because your account information and
Rhapsody® content are on servers instead of any
individual computer, your music is infinitely portable.
Much of what you see in the Display area comes from
Rhapsody® service. What you can do with Rhapsody®
service depends on your subscription. You can use
Rhapsody® service for free, or get even more from a paid
membership. The Rhapsody® service also brings you
Rhapsody® Online, a streamlined, internet version of
Rhapsody® that you can access from almost anywhere.
Just sign in to your Rhapsody® account to start letting the
Rhapsody® service work for you.
For more information, http://www.rhapsody-free.com/.

■ Account setup for Rhapsody®
When you select “Rhapsody” as a sub input source for the
first time, the account setup screen appears in the
“Rhapsody” menu screen. Follow the procedure below to
set up your account for the Rhapsody® service.

Use this feature to select your favorite Internet Radio
stations quickly.

Press 9k / n to select “Formal registration”
or “Trial registration” and then press
9ENTER.

y
Set the operation mode to FSOURCE and then
press and hold 8 TITLE while the selected
Internet Radio station service is being broadcast.
The stored Internet Radio station is added to the
“Bookmarks” list (page 75).
y
• To remove the stored station from the list, select the station
under “Bookmarks” and then press and hold 8TITLE.
• You can also register your favorite Internet Radio stations to this
unit by accessing the following website with the web browser
on your PC. To use this feature, you need the MAC address of
this unit as the ID number and your e-mail address to create
your personal account. Use “Information” in the “Network”
menu to display the MAC address of this unit (page 102). For

78 En

If you select “Trial registration”, the URL for the content of the
trial service appears. If you proceed, press 9l / h to select
“OK” and then press 9ENTER to enter the Rhapsody menu.

Press 9l / h to select “OK” and then press
9ENTER.

Use 9k / n / l / h and 9ENTER to input
your user name (up to 64 characters), select
“OK” and then press 9ENTER.

Press 9l / h to select “OK” and then press
9ENTER.

Using USB and network features

■ Submenu items in the “Rhapsody” menu
Use 9k / n / l / h and 9ENTER to input
your password (up to 64 characters), select
“OK” and then press 9ENTER.
“Please wait...” appears and then top “Rhapsody”
menu screen appears.

Note
If registration failed, the error message appears. In this case,
start all over again.

■ Editing/deleting your account or
checking trial information

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Upgrade
account”, “Remove account” or “Show trial
info” and then press 9ENTER.
• If you selected “Upgrade account”, follow steps 2
to 5 in “Account setup for Rhapsody®”.
• If you selected “Remove account”, press 9l / h
to select “OK” and then press 9ENTER to delete
your account.
• If you selected “Show trial info”, check the trial
information and then press 9ENTER.

y
“Show trial info” appears only when you are using the trial
service.

■ Searching contents by keyword
Use this feature to search Rhapsody® music contents by
artist, album name, or track name.

In the top “Rhapsody” menu screen, press
9k / n to select “Search” and then press
9h.

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the
category you want to search and then press
9ENTER.

Use 9k / n / l / h and 9ENTER to input
the desired keyword, select “OK” and then
press 9ENTER.
The list of the contents that match the specified
keyword is displayed.

Add to My Library
Select this item to add the track or album currently
selected to “My Library”.
Add Album to My Library
Select this item to add the album currently selected to “My
Library”.
Remove from My Library
Select this item to remove the track or album currently
selected from “My Library”.
Play
Select this item to start playback of the item currently
selected.
y
Available submenu items vary depending on the screen where
you press 0SUBMENU.

Before performing the following operations, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then
press 3USB/NET.

Using shortcut buttons
Use this feature to access the desired music sources (WAV,
MP3 and WMA files on the connected PC, MCX-2000 or
USB storage devices, Internet Radio Stations and
Rhapsody® music contents) directly. You can preset 8
items for each sub input source.

■ Assigning the items to the numeric
button (1-8) (B)

Select a desired content you want to assign
to a numeric button (1-8) (B), and then play
back the content.

y
“No match data” appears if no content matches the specified
keyword.

79 En

BASIC
OPERATION

In the top “Rhapsody” menu screen, press
0SUBMENU.
The submenu screen appears.

In the “Rhapsody” menu, the following submenu items are
also available in addition to “Play Control” and “Play
Style” (page 76).

Using USB and network features

Press 0 MEMORY.
The PRESET indicator lights up in the front panel
and this unit automatically selects an empty preset
number.
Lights up

PRESET

Memory 1
USB

Notes

• To store the selected content under an empty preset number
automatically, press and hold 0MEMORY for more than 2
seconds instead of step 2. In this case, the following steps are
unnecessary.
• To cancel the preset, press 0MEMORY again.
• When you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the memory preset mode is automatically canceled.
In this case, start over from step 2.

Press a numeric button (1-8) (B) that you
want to assign.
Preset number

PRESET

Memory 7
USB

MEMORY

y
If you select a preset number being used (“*” appears next to
the preset number), the current preset number will be
overwritten.

Press DENTER (or 9ENTER).
The preset content is set and the PRESET indicator
disappears.

80 En

Press one of the numeric button (1-8) (B) to
which the desired item is assigned to select the
item as the input source.
This unit starts the playback of the source assigned to
the selected numeric button.

MEMORY

■ Select an item by using numeric buttons
(1-8) (B)

• “Empty Memory!” appears in the front panel display and
the short message display when you press the numeric
button (1-8) (B) to which no items are assigned.
• This unit does not recall the correct item assigned to the
selected numeric button (1-8) (B) in the following cases:
– the connected USB device is incorrect.
– the PC or MCX-2000 which stores the selected item is
turned off or disconnected from the network.
– the selected Internet Radio station or Rhapsody® service
is temporary unavailable or out of service.
– the directory of the selected item has been changed.

y
This unit stores the relative position of the preset items in a
directory or playlist, and does not recall the correct item
by using numeric buttons (1-8) (B) if you add or delete
music files to or from the same directory or playlist as the
preset items. In such cases, preset the desired item to the
numeric buttons (1-8) (B) again.
We recommend the following methods:
USB storage devices
Create eight directories which contain the desired items in a
directory beside the directory which contains all music files,
and then preset the top item of each directory to the numeric
buttons (1-8) (B). When you change the items which are
preset to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B), replace the items in
the directory to the desired items without deleting the
directory.
PC server/MCX-2000
Create eight playlists which contain the desired items, and
then preset the top item of each playlist to the numeric
buttons (1-8) (B). When you change the items which are
preset to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B), replace the
registered items in the playlist with the desired items
without deleting the playlist.

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
■ GUI menu tree
Stereo/Surround
(page 85)
SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
XM (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
TUNER
MULTI CH
PHONO
CD
TV
MD/CD-R
BD/HD DVD
DVD
CBL/SAT
DVR
VCR
VIDEO AUX
DOCK*
USB
PC/MCX
NET RADIO
Rhapsody (U.S.A. model only)

Music Content
(page 92)

iPod
USB
PC/MCX
NET RADIO
Rhapsody (U.S.A. model only)

Setup

Auto Setup
(page 35)
Speaker
(page 93)

Configuration

Front
Center
Surround
Surround Back
Front Presence
Subwoofer

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Input Select
(page 90)

Phase
Bass Out

Distance
Level
Test Tone
Volume
(page 95)

Adaptive DRC
Adaptive DSP Level
Max Volume
Initial Volume
Muting Type

Sound (page 96)

LFE Level
Dynamic Range
Parametric EQ
Tone Control

Lipsync

Speaker
Headphone
Speaker
Headphone
Control
Bass
Treble
Auto Bypass
Mode
Auto
Manual

HDMI Audio
Pure Direct
Channel Mute

81 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

Video (page 99)

HDMI
(page 101)

Analog ` Analog
Analog ` HDMI
HDMI ` HDMI
Processing

Standby Through
Audio Output
Control Monitor
Monitor Info.

System Memory
(page 108)

Main

Zone2

Zone3

Zone4

Network
(page 102)

Configuration
Network Standby
Information

Multi Zone
(page 103)

Zone SP Assign
Component Assign
Party Mode Set

Zone2 Set

Zone3 Set

Zone OSD
Zone Rename

Option
(page 105)

Language
(page 107)

Mode
Input
Output
HDMI OUT1
HDMI OUT2
Main Load
Main Save
Main Rename
Zone2 Load
Zone2 Save
Zone2 Rename
Zone3 Load
Zone3 Save
Zone3 Rename
Zone4 Load
Zone4 Save
Zone4 Rename

Target: Zone2
Target: Zone3
Target: Zone4
Zone2 Volume
Zone2 Max Vol.
Zone2 Initial Vol.
Zone2 Balance
Zone2 Tone Control
Zone2 Mono
Zone2 Muting Type
Zone3 Volume
Zone3 Max Vol.
Zone3 Initial Vol.
Zone3 Balance
Zone3 Tone Control
Zone3 Mono
Zone3 Muting Type
Main
Zone2
Zone3
Zone4

Memory Guard
I/O Assignment
Input Rename
Display Set

Front Panel Display

iPod

Short Message
Playback Screen
Position
Wall Paper
Standby Charge

Initial Set

Trigger Output

82 En

Resolution
Aspect
Prog. Re-Processing
Adjustment

Audio Select
Decoder Mode
EXTD Surround
Trigger1
Trigger2

Dimmer
Scroll

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

Note
* “iPod” appears when an iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal. “Bluetooth” appears
when a Yamaha Bluetooth receiver is connected to the DOCK terminal.

GUI menu overview
This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) menu that helps you to control the amplifier function of
this unit. With the GUI menu, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit.
y
• Refer to “GUI menu tree” (page 81) for the complete menu structure.
• Refer to “GUI menu operations” (page 84) for details about the basic operations in the GUI menu.

Input Select

Sound

Music Content

Video

Setup

HDMI

Language

System Memory

Stereo/Surround

Network

■ Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu)
Use this feature to select the sound field programs and customize the program parameter settings (page 85).

■ Input Select (Input select menu)
Use this feature to select the input source and customize the parameters of each input source (page 90).

■ Music Content (Music content menu)

■ Setup (Setup menu)
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.
Auto Setup (Automatic setup menu)
Use this feature to run the automatic setup and specify which speaker parameters to be adjusted (page 35).
Speaker (Speaker menu)
See page 93 for details.
Volume (Volume menu)
See page 95 for details.
Sound (Sound menu)
See page 96 for details.
Video (Video menu)
See page 99 for details.
HDMI (HDMI menu)
See page 101 for details.
System Memory (System memory menu)
See page 108 for details.
Network (Network menu)
See page 102 for details.
Multi Zone (Multi-zone menu)
See page 103 for details.
Option (Option menu)
See page 105 for details.

83 En

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Use this feature to browse the music contents of iPod, USB component, PC/MusicCAST, Internet radio and Rhapsody®
(U.S.A. model only) (page 92).

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

■ Language (Display language menu)
Use this feature to select the language of your choice that appears in the front panel display or in the GUI menu of this
unit (page 107).

GUI menu operations
This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) menu that helps you to control the amplifier function of
this unit. With the GUI menu, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit. You can
also set up this unit using the GUI menu.

■ Items in the GUI menu

Decoder
Input
source

qPLIIx Movie

DVD

Menu
item

Sound field
program

Sci-Fi

Input Select

Sound

Music Content

Video

Setup

HDMI

Language

System Memory

Stereo/Surround

Network

DVD

qPLIIx Movie

Sci-Fi

MD/CD-R
BD/HD DVD

Menu
area

DVD

Input Select
[ENTER]

CBL/SAT
DVR
SUBMENU

Top Menu

-40.0dB

Menu directory

y
Set the operation mode selector to FAMP when you operate
the GUI menu using the remote control.
Function

9k / n

Selects the item in the current menu level.

Selects the currently selected menu item and
moves to the next menu level.

Returns to the previous menu level.

9ENTER

Selects the currently selected menu item and
moves to the next menu level.

0SUBMENU

Turns on or off the submenu. (The submenu
icon appears when any submenu items exist
under the menu currently selected.)

IMENU

Turns on or off the GUI menu. Press and
hold IMENU to display the top GUI menu
(Top Menu).

Note
If you simply press IMENU, the menu directory displayed
before you turned off the GUI menu appears. To display the top
GUI menu (Top Menu), press and hold IMENU.

84 En

-40.0dB

Submenu
icon

Volume level

■ Remote control operation

Button

Input Select

■ Front panel control operation
Control

Function

CMENU

Turns on of off the GUI menu.

Selects the currently selected menu item and
moves to the next menu level.

Returns to the previous menu level.

DENTER

Selects the currently selected menu item and
moves to the next menu level.

MPROGRAM

Selects the item in the current menu level.

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

Stereo/Surround
You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory
settings. Although you do not have to change the initial
factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to
better suit the input source or your listening room.
y
To customize the program parameter settings, press
0SUBMENU to turn on the submenu after you select the
desired program.

The ideal
dialogue
position

If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video
monitor screen, increase the value of “Dialogue Lift”.

■ Basic configuration of sound field
programs
Each sound field program has some parameters defining
the characteristics of the program. To customize the
selected sound field program, adjust “DSP Level” and/or
“Dialogue Lift” first, and then try other parameters.
Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound
field programs (DSP Level)
Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect
sounds) to the original source sound to create sound field
in the listening room. Use the “DSP Level” parameter to
adjust the level of the effect sounds.

Move up to the ideal dialogue position

Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
“0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the
highest position.
Notes

The DSP effect
sound level is low

The DSP effect sound
level is high

Adjust “DSP Level” as follows:
Increase the value of “DSP Level” when
• the effect sound of the selected sound field
program is too weak.
• you cannot recognize any difference between the
sound field programs.
Decrease the value of “DSP Level” when
• the sound is vague.
• you feel that the additional sound effect is
excessive.
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB
Adjusting the vertical dialogue position
(Dialogue Lift)
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the
dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is
at the center of the video monitor screen.

85 En

ADVANCED
OPERATION

• “Dialogue Lift” is available when “Front Presence” is set to
“Yes” (page 93) and headphones are not connected.
• You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial
dialogue position.

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

■ Sound field parameter descriptions
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
Sound field parameter

Features

Decode Type

Decoder type. Select the decoder used with the selected sound field program. The decoder parameters for
“Surround Decoder” vary depending on the selected decoder type. See page 66 for details.

Init. Delay
Sur. Init.Delay
SB. Init. Delay

Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the apparent size of the
sound field by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The
smaller the value, the smaller the sound field seems to the listener.

y
When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the corresponding room
size parameters likewise.
Control range: 1 to 99 ms (Init. Delay)
1 to 49 ms (Sur. Init. Delay and SB Init. Delay)
Source sound

Level

Early
reflections

Time

Delay

Delay
Sound source

Reflection face

Small value = 1 ms

Room Size
Sur. Room Size
SB. Room Size

Large value = 99 ms

Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the sound field.
The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around
a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent
reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the
virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.
y
When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the corresponding initial
delay parameters likewise.
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

Time

Early
reflections
Time

Level

Source sound

Time

Sound source

Small value = 0.1

86 En

Large value = 2.0

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

Sound field parameter

Liveness
Sur. Liveness
SB. Liveness

Features
Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by
changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much
faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A
room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective
surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the
“liveness” of the room.
Control range: 0 to 10
Source sound

Level

Dead

Level

Live

Time

Large reflected
sound

Small reflected
sound

Small value = 0

Rev. Time

Time

Large value = 10

Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s
Reverberation

Source sound

Reverberation

Early reflections
60 dB

Rev. Time
Sound source

Short
reverberation

Small value = 1.0 s

60 dB

Rev. Time

60 dB

Rev. Time
Long
reverberation

Large value = 5.0 s

87 En

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay
by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range.
Set a longer reverberation time to get more sustaining reverberation sound, and set a shorter time to get
articulate sound.

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

Sound field parameter

Rev. Delay

Features
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning
of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later
reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.

Level

Control range: 0 to 250 ms
Source sound

(dB)

60 dB
Reverberation
Time
Rev. Delay

Rev. Level

Rev. Time

Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the
reverberation becomes.

Level

Control range: 0 to 100%
Source sound

Rev. Level

Time

■ Stereo program parameter descriptions
Sound field parameter

Direct
(“2ch Stereo” only)

Features
2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo sound
when playing 2-channel analog sources.
Choices: Auto, Off
y
• Select “Auto” to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when “BASS” and
“TREBLE” are set to “BYPASS” (page 54).
• Select “Off” not to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when “BASS” and
“TREBLE” are set to “BYPASS”.
• When multi-channel signals are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and
right speakers.
• The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are redirected to the subwoofer in the
following cases:
– “Bass Out” is set to “Front + SWFR” (page 94).
– “Front” is set to “Small” (page 93) and “Bass Out” is set to “SWFR” (page 94).

Center Level
Surround L Level
Surround R Level
Sur.Back L Level
Sur.Back R Level
F.PRNS L Level
F.PRNS R Level
(“7ch Stereo” only)

88 En

7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right levels.
Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode. The available parameters differ
depending on the speaker settings.
Control range: 0 to 100%

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

■ Compressed Music Enhancer mode parameter descriptions
The Compressed Music
Enhancer mode

Level
(“Straight Enhancer” and
“7ch Enhancer” only)

Features
Straight enhancer or 7-channel enhancer effect level. Select “High” or “Low” to adjust the effect for the highfrequency.
Choices: High, Low

■ Decoder parameter descriptions
Decoder parameter

Panorama
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII
Music” only)

Center Width
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII
Music” only)

Features
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well
as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.
Choices: Off, On
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely
towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center
channel output towards the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to
7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)
Initial setting: 3

Dimension
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII
Music” only)

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front or
towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)
Initial setting: STD (standard)

(“Neo:6 Music” only)

DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel
to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.
Control range: 0.0 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) to
1.0 (center channel sound output only from the center speaker)
Initial setting: 0.3

FOCUS
(“CSII Cinema” and “CSII
Music” only)

SRS Circle Surround II Cinema and SRS Circle Surround II Music focus. Adjusts the clearness of a sound
image by elevating the perception of the sound image to compensate for non-optimally placed speakers from
a lower location. A larger value makes speakers sound as if they are positioned at ear level.
Control range: 0 (lower location) to 8 (higher location)

TruBass
(“CSII Cinema” and “CSII
Music” only)

SRS Circle Surround II Cinema and SRS Circle Surround II Music TruBass. Adjusts the lower register by
producing the perception of improved low frequency performance. A larger value improves bass even without
a subwoofer and provides deeper, richer bass in the presence of a subwoofer.
Control range: 0 (standard low-frequency performance) to 8 (enhanced low-frequency performance)

■ Initialize (Parameters initialization)
Use this feature to initialize the parameter of the selected sound field program.
Choices: No, Yes
• Select “Yes” and then press 9ENTER to set the program parameters to the factory default settings.
• Select “No” (or press 9l) to cancel the program parameter initialization.
y
Use “DSP PARAM” of “INITIALIZE” in “Advanced setup” to initialize the parameters of all sound field programs (page 131).

89 En

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Center Image

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

■ Audio Select (Audio input jack selection)

Input Select
Use this menu to adjust the parameters of each input
source.
y

Use this feature to select the type of the input jack you
want to use.
Choice
Auto

Automatically selects input signals in the
following order:
(1) HDMI
(2) Digital signals
(3) Analog signals

HDMI

Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI
signals are not input, no sound is output.

Coax/Opt

Automatically selects input signals in the
following order:
(1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL
jack.
(2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL
jack.
When no signals are input, no sound is
output.

Analog

Selects only analog signals. If no analog
signals are input, no sound is output.

To customize the input source settings, press 0SUBMENU to
turn on the submenu after you select the input source.
Input source

Parameter

SIRIUS SATELLITE
RADIO
(U.S.A. and Canada
models only)

Volume Trim
Video Adjustment
Parental Lock

XM
(U.S.A. and Canada
models only)
iPod
PC/MCX
NET RADIO
Rhapsody
(U.S.A. model only)

Volume Trim
Video Adjustment

TUNER

Volume Trim
Video Adjustment
Station Search (U.S.A. model
only)

MULTI CH

Volume Trim
Video Adjustment
Multi CH Assign
BGV

PHONO
CD
TV
MD/CD-R
BD/HD DVD
DVD
CBL/SAT
DVR
VCR
VIDEO AUX

Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Volume Trim
Video Adjustment

Bluetooth

Volume Trim
Video Adjustment
Pairing
Connect

USB

Volume Trim
Video Adjustment
USB Select

Functions

y
• You can also select the audio input jack by pressing CAUDIO
SELECT (or OAUDIO SEL) (page 43).
• You can set the default audio input jack select of this unit by
using “Audio Select” in “Initial Set” (page 106).

■ Decoder Mode (Decoder mode)
Use this feature to switch the decoder mode.
Choice

Functions

Auto

Automatically detects digital audio signal
input types and selects the appropriate
decoder.

DTS

Activates the DTS decoder when digital
audio signals are input.

Note
“Decoder Mode” is available only when the digital audio input
jacks (HDMI, OPTICAL and/or COAXIAL) are assigned to the
selected input source.

■ Volume Trim (Volume trimming)
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at
each input source. This feature is useful if you want to
balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden
changes in volume when switching between input sources.
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
y
This parameter also affects the signals output at the ZONE OUT
jacks.

90 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

■ Parental Lock
(SIRIUS Satellite Radio parental lock)
Use this feature to set the code number for locking the
desired SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels. Refer to “Setting
the Parental Lock” (page 69) for details.

■ Station Search (Station search)
(U.S.A. model only)
You can search for preset HD Radio stations by specifying
a keyword (station name).

Press 9k / n / l / h to select a character or
function and then press 9ENTER to
confirm the selection.
Repeat step 1 until you input a keyword you want to
use.

Front Input (Front channel input jacks)
If you selected “8ch” in “Input Channels”, you can select
analog jacks at which front left and right channel signals
from an external decoder will be input.
Choices: CD, TV, MD/CD-R, BD/HD DVD, DVD,
CBL/SAT, DVR, VCR, VIDEO AUX
Note
If you have renamed an input source in “Input Rename”
(page 105), the name of the input source appears in the choices
of this parameter.

■ BGV (Back ground video)
Use this feature to select the video source played in the
background of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks.
Choice

Press 9k / n / l / h to select “OK” and then
press 9ENTER.
The search result is displayed.
y
If your keyword does not match the any station, “Not
Found” appears. Press 9l to return to the previous
screen.

Functions

BD/HD DVD,
DVD, CBL/SAT,
DVR, VCR,
VIDEO AUX

Selects the corresponding input source as the
background video source.

Off

Does not play the video source in the
background.

Note

■ Multi CH Assign
(Multi channel assignment)
Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input
into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a
source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks.
Input Channels (Input channels)
Use this setting to select the number of channels input
from an external decoder (page 27).
Choice

Description

6ch

Select “6ch” the connected component
outputs discrete 6-channel audio signals.

8ch

Select “8ch” the connected component
outputs discrete 8-channel audio signals.
Also set “Front Input” (see below) to the
analog audio jacks at which the front left
and right channel signals output from the
connected component are input.

Note
Depending on the settings of the zone configuration, no sound
is output at the surround back speakers even if you set “Input
Channels” to “8ch”. In this case, select “6ch” and set the audio
output setting of the source component to 6 channels.

If you have renamed an input source in “Input Rename”
(page 105), the name of the input source appears in the choices
of this parameter.

■ Video Adjustment (Video adjustment)
Use this feature to select the desired preset setting (video
quality adjustments) to be applied to the selected input
source.
Choices: Preset 1, Preset 2, Preset 3, Preset 4, Preset 5,
Preset 6
y
You can preset video quality parameters or edit video quality
parameters stored in a preset number with “Adjustment”
(page 100).

Note
This feature is available only when “Analog ` HDMI” (page 99)
or “HDMI ` HDMI” (page 99) is set to “Processing”.

■ Pairing (Bluetooth pairing)
Use this feature to start pairing the connected Yamaha
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold
separately) with your Bluetooth component. For details
about the pairing, refer to “Pairing the Bluetooth™
receiver and your Bluetooth component” (page 71).
To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the
pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully
understand all the instructions before starting.

91 En

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Press 9k / n to select the preset HD Radio
station you want to listen to and then press
9ENTER.

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

Press 9ENTER to start pairing.
The connected Bluetooth receiver starts searching
Bluetooth components.
Check that the Bluetooth component detects
the Bluetooth receiver.
For details, refer to the instruction manual of the
Bluetooth component.
Select the Bluetooth receiver in the
Bluetooth device list and then enter the pass
key “0000” on the Bluetooth component.
Once this unit completes the pairing successfully,
“Completed” appears.
Press 9l to return to the previous menu
level.
Note
If the connected Bluetooth receiver cannot find any
Bluetooth components, “Not found” appears.

■ Connect (Bluetooth connection)
Use this feature to establish a connection between the
Yamaha Bluetooth receiver (such as YBA-10, sold
separately) and your Bluetooth component.
Note
Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth component
with the Bluetooth receiver connected to this unit for the first
time of if the pairing data has been deleted.

Press 9ENTER to establish a connection.
The connected Bluetooth receiver starts searching
Bluetooth components. Once the connection is established
successfully, “BT Connected” appears.
Note
If the connected Bluetooth receiver cannot find any Bluetooth
components, “Not found” appears.

y
To terminate the connection, press 9ENTER again.

■ USB Select (USB port select)
Selects the component connected to the front or rear USB
port as the input source (page 28).
Choice

Functions

Front

Selects the component connected to the front
USB port as the input source.

Rear

Selects the component connected to the rear
USB port as the input source.

92 En

Music Content
Use this feature to browse the music contents of iPod,
USB component, PC/MusicCAST, Internet radio and
Rhapsody® (U.S.A. model only). See the following pages
for details.
• iPod (page 73)
• USB (page 75)
• PC/MCX (page 75)
• NET RADIO (page 75)
• Rhapsody (page 75)

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

Surround Back
(Surround back left/right speakers)

Setup (Speaker)
Use this feature to manually adjust the basic speaker
settings. Most of the “Speaker” parameters are set
automatically when you run the automatic setup.
y
• Set “Test Tone” to “On” to output the test tone for the
“Configuration”, “Distance” and “Level” settings.
• If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the
crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or
slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum.

Choice
Large x1

Select this setting when the single surround
back speaker is large.

Small x1

Select this setting when the single surround
back speaker is small.

Small x2

Select this setting when the surround back
left and right speakers are small.

Large x2

Select this setting when the surround back
left and right speakers are Large.

None

Select this setting when you do not use the
surround back speakers. The surround back
channel signals are directed to the surround
left and right speakers.

■ Configuration (Speaker configurations)
Measure for the speaker size
The woofer section of a speaker is
– 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large
– smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small
Front (Front speakers)
Choice

Descriptions

Large

Select this setting when the front speakers
are large.

Small

Select this setting when the front speakers
are small.

When “Bass Out” is set to “Front” (page 94), you can select
only “Large” in “Front”. If the value of “Front” is set to other
than “Large” in advance, this unit change the value to “Large”
automatically.

Note
If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to
the SUR.BACK SINGLE jack, and configure the “Surround
Back L” settings under “Distance” and “Level”.

Cross Over (Cross over)
Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of the
speaker(s) that is set to “Small”. All frequencies below the
selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the
speakers set to “Large” in “Configuration”.
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
Front Presence (Front presence speakers)
Use this feature if you want to use the front presence
speakers connected to this unit.

Center (Center speaker)
Choice
Choice

Descriptions

Large

Select this setting when the center speaker is
large.

Small

Select this setting when the center speaker is
small.

None

Select this setting when you do not use the
center speaker. The center channel signals
are directed to the front left and right
speakers.

Surround (Surround left/right speakers)
Choice

Descriptions

Large

Select this setting when the surround
speakers are large.

Small

Select this setting when the surround
speakers are small.

None

Select this setting when you do not use the
surround speakers. This unit is set to the
Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (page 51), and
“Surround Back” is automatically set to
“None”.

Descriptions

Yes

Select this setting when you use the front
presence speakers.

None

Select this setting when you do not use the
front presence speakers.

Subwoofer (Subwoofer)
Phase (Subwoofer phase)
Use this feature to switch the phase of your
subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear.
Choice

Functions

Normal

Does not change the phase of your subwoofer.

Reverse

Sets the phase of the subwoofer to reverse.

93 En

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Note

Descriptions

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

Bass Out (Bass out)
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the
LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency
signals.

Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Control step: 0.05 m (0.2 ft)

LFE signals output

Distance

Adjusted speaker

Subwoofer and speakers

Front L

Front left speaker

Front
speakers

Front R

Front right speaker

Center

Center speaker

Surround L

Surround left speaker

Surround R

Surround right speaker

Surround Back L

Surround back left speaker

Surround Back R

Surround back right speaker

Front Presence L

Front presence left speaker

Front Presence R

Front presence right speaker

Subwoofer

Choice
Subwoofers

Other
speakers

Front +
SWFR

Output

No output

SWFR

Output

No output

Front

No output

Output

No output

Low-frequency signals output
Subwoofer and speakers
Choice
Subwoofers

Front
speakers

Other
speakers

Front +
SWFR

SWFR

Front

No output

*1 Output(s) the low-frequency signals of the front
channels and other speakers set to “Small”.
*2 Always output the low-frequency signals of the front
channels.
*3 Output the low-frequency signals if the speakers are set
to “Large”.
*4 Outputs the low-frequency signals of the speakers set to
“Small”.

Note
The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting
of the speakers.

■ Level (Speaker level)
Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels
between the front left or surround left speakers and each
speaker selected in “Configuration” (page 93).
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Level

Adjusted speaker

■ Distance (Speaker distance)

Front L

Front left speaker

Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in most
home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be
applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will
arrive at the listening position at the same time.

Front R

Front right speaker

Center

Center speaker

Surround L

Surround left speaker

Surround R

Surround right speaker

Surround Back L

Surround back left speaker

Unit (Unit)
Selects the unit for displaying the values of “Distance”
parameter.
Initial setting: Feet (U.S.A. and Canada models)
Meter (Australia model)

Surround Back R

Surround back right speaker

Front Presence L

Front presence left speaker

Front Presence R

Front presence right speaker

Subwoofer

Choice

Functions

Meter (m)

Adjusts speaker distances in meters.

Feet (ft)

Adjusts speaker distances in feet.

94 En

y
If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s
length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening
position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW,
calibrate each speaker to 75 dB.

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

Note
The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting
of the speakers.

Setup (Volume)
Use this menu to manually adjust the various volume
settings.

Output level

Adaptive DRC (Adaptive dynamic range control)
Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range in
conjunction with the volume level. This feature is useful
when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. When
“Adaptive DRC” is set to “Auto”, this unit controls the
dynamic range as follows:
– If the VOLUME setting is low: the dynamic range is
narrow
– If the VOLUME setting is high: the dynamic range
is wide

Auto
Off

Input level

Notes
• When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level
is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “Max
Volume” setting.
• The “Max Volume” setting takes priority over the initial volume
setting.

Auto
Off

Choice

Functions

Full

Mutes all the audio output.

–20dB

Reduces the current volume by 20 dB.

–40dB

Reduces the current volume by 40 dB.

VOLUME: high

Functions

Auto

Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.

Off

Does not adjust the dynamic range
automatically.

y
• You can also adjust the dynamic range of the bitstream signal
sources by using “Dynamic Range” in “Sound” (page 96).
• This function is also useful for listening with your headphones.

Note
The adaptive dynamic range control feature does not function
when this unit is in the PURE DIRECT mode (page 54).

Adaptive DSP Level (Adaptive DSP effect level)
Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the DSP
effect level (page 85) automatically in conjunction with
the volume level.
Choice

Functions

Auto

Adjusts the DSP effect level in conjunction
with the volume level.

Off

Does not adjust the DSP effect level
automatically.

Note
Even if you set “Adaptive DSP Level” to “Auto”, this unit does
not change but fine-tunes the specified value of “DSP Level”
(page 85).

95 En

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Choice

Initial Volume (Initial volume)
Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone
when the power of this unit is turned on.
Choices: Off, Mute, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB

Muting Type (Muting type)
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function
reduces the output volume (page 44).

Input level

VOLUME: low

Max Volume (Maximum volume)
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the main
zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud
sound by mistake. For example, the original volume range is
–80.0 dB to +16.5 dB. However, when “Max Volume” is set
to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes –80.0 dB to –5.0 dB.
Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB
Control step: 5.0 dB

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

■ Parametric EQ (Parametric equalizer)

Setup (Sound)
Use this menu to adjust the sound parameters.

■ LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level)
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the
LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the
capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE
channel carries low-frequency special effects which are
only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only
when this unit decodes bitstream signals.
Control range: –20.0 to 0.0 dB
Control step: 1.0 dB

Use this feature to adjust the parametric equalizer of each
speaker.
PEQ Data Copy (Parametric equalizer data copy)
Use this feature to copy the result data of the automatic
setup to the manual configuration area. You can select the
parametric equalizer type applied to the copied result data
of the automatic setup. See page 40 for the descriptions of
each parametric equalizer type.
Choice

Descriptions

Flat h Manual

Speaker (Speaker low-frequency effect level)
Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.

Copies the result of the automatic setup that
the “Flat” type parametric equalizer is
applied to.

Front h Manual

Headphone
(Headphone low-frequency effect level)
Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.

Manual Copies the result of the automatic
setup that the “Front” type parametric
equalizer is applied to.

Natural h Manual

Copies the result of the automatic setup that
the “Natural” type parametric equalizer is
applied to.

Note
Depending on the settings of “Bass Out” (page 94), some
signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
jacks.

PEQ Select (Parametric equalizer type select)
Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer type that
applied to the results of the automatic setup. See page 40
for the descriptions of each parametric equalizer type.

■ Dynamic Range (Dynamic range)
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range
compression to be applied to your speakers or
headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is
decoding bitstream signals.
Speaker (Speaker dynamic range)
Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the speakers.
Headphone (Headphone dynamic range)
Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the
headphones.
Choice

Functions

MAX

Preserves the greatest amount of dynamic
range.

STD

Adjusts the dynamic range to medium.
When this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD
signals, the dynamic range control is always
active regardless of the instruction of the
input source signals.

MIN/AUTO

• MIN: Adjusts the dynamic range to
narrow when this unit is decoding
bitstream signals (except Dolby TrueHD).
• AUTO: Adjusts the dynamic range
according to the instruction of the input
source signals when this unit is decoding
Dolby TrueHD signals.

96 En

Choice

Descriptions

Manual

Applies the manually configured parametric
equalizer in “Setup”.

Flat

Applies the “Flat” type parametric equalizer.

Front

Applies the “Front” type parametric
equalizer.

Natural

Applies the “Natural” type parametric
equalizer.

Through

Does not use the parametric equalizer.

Notes
• When you carry out the automatic setup, this unit automatically
set “PEQ Select” to “Natural”.
• “Level” settings (page 94) also change corresponding to the
setting of “PEQ Select”.
• This unit does not change the configurations of “Manual” even
if you perform the automatic setup.

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

Manual parametric equalizer configuration of
each speaker
Use this feature to adjust the tonal quality of each speaker.
You can copy the results of the automatic setup for the
base of the manual configuration by using “PEQ Data
Copy”. Set “PEQ Select” to “Manual” in advance.

Press 9 n to select “EDIT” and press
9 ENTER to access the edit window.
For more information on the parametric equalizer and
each parameter, see page 153.
PEQ Data Copy

Press 9 k / n / l / h to select “Test Tone” or
the speaker you want to adjust.
Choice

PEQ Select

Front left speaker

Front R

Front right speaker

Center

Center speaker

Surround L

Surround left speaker

Surround R

Surround right speaker

Surround Back L

Surround back left speaker

Surround Back R

Surround back right speaker

Front Presence L

Front presence left speaker

Front Presence R

Front presence right speaker

Subwoofer

#1
0.0dB
62.5Hz
1.000

Front L

Adjusted speaker

Front L

Band
Gain
Freq
Q

Front R
Center
Exit:ENTER

Choice

y
• When you select “Band” in step 3, you can use this menu
as a graphic equalizer.
• “Band #5”, “Band #6”, and “Band #7” can adjust the
frequencies of above 500 Hz.
• When you select “Subwoofer” in step 1 and “Band” in step 3,
you can adjust “Band #1”, “Band #2”, “Band #3” and “Band
#4” only. In this case, “Band #1”, “Band #2”, “Band #3” and
“Band #4” adjust the frequencies of below 200 Hz.

Functions

Outputs the test tone.

Off

Does not output the test tone.

If you want to reset all “Parametric EQ” parameter settings
for the selected speaker, select “RESET” and press
9ENTER.

6
2

Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you are satisfied
with the results.

Press 9 h to access the settings window.

Select “EXIT” and press 9 ENTER to exit
from the settings window.

■ Tone Control (Tone control)
PEQ Data Copy
PEQ Select

PARAM

RESET

EDIT

EXIT

Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble
output to your speakers or headphones.

Band / Gain
Front L

Note

Front R
Center

Tone Control is not effective when:
– the PURE DIRECT mode (page 54) is selected.
– MULTI CH is selected as the input source.

Control (Control mode)

Press 9 k / n / l / h to select “PARAM” and
then press 9 ENTER repeatedly to select a
parameter from “Band” (band), “Freq.”
(frequency) or “Q” (Q factor).

Choice
Speaker

Adjust the bass/treble balance of your speakers.

Headphone

Adjust the bass/treble balance of your
headphones.

y
You can adjust “Gain” (gain) with any parameter.

Functions

y
“Speaker” and “Headphone” adjustments are stored
independently. The adjustments for “Speaker” affects the front
left/right speaker, center speaker and subwoofer channels.

97 En

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Test Tone
Use this feature to select whether to turn on or off the
test tone output while you are adjusting the tonal
quality of each speaker.

The parameter selected in “PARAM” is highlighted.
• Press 9 l / h to adjust the parameter.
• Press 9 k / n to adjust the “Gain”.
• Press 9 ENTER to exit the edit window.

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

Bass (Bass control)
Use this feature to adjust low-frequencies output to your
speakers or headphones.
Choices: 125 Hz, 350 Hz, 500 Hz
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB

Treble (Treble control)
Use this feature to adjust high-frequencies output to your
speakers or headphones.
Choices: 2.5 kHz, 3.5 kHz, 8.0 kHz
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB

Manual (Manual audio delay adjustment)
Use this feature to adjust the delay of the sound output
manually to synchronize audio with video images when
you set “Mode” to “Manual”.
Control range: 0 to 240 ms
Control step: 1 ms

Auto Bypass (Auto bypass)
Use this feature to select whether the audio output
bypasses the tone control circuitry when “Treble” and
“Bass” are set to 0 dB.

■ Pure Direct (Pure Direct)

Choice
Auto

Functions
Automatically bypasses the tone control
circuitry to provide the purest signal possible
when “Treble” and “Bass” are set to 0 dB.

“Offset” indicates the difference between the value of the audio
delay that this unit sets automatically and the value of the audio
delay that you set in “Mode”. This unit stores the value of
“Offset” and applies the value to other automatic lip sync
compatible video monitors.

Use this feature to select whether this unit outputs the
video signals when this unit is in the PURE DIRECT
mode.
Choice
Audio

Does not output video signals.

Audio + Video

Outputs video signals. For the better sound
quality, this unit only activates the limited video
features.

Does not bypass the tone control circuitry.

Off

■ Lipsync
(Audio and video synchronization)
Mode (HDMI automatic lip sync mode)
If the video monitor is connected to the HDMI OUT jack
of this unit and compatible with the automatic audio and
video synchronization function (automatic lip sync), this
unit adjusts the audio and video synchronization
automatically. Use this feature to activate or deactivate the
automatic lip sync.
Choice
Auto

Manual

Descriptions
Select this setting if the connected video
monitor is compatible with the automatic lip
sync. Use “Auto” to fine adjust the audio and
video synchronization.
Select this setting if the video monitor is not
compatible with the automatic lip sync or you
do not want to use the automatic lip sync. Use
“Manual” to adjust the audio and video
synchronization.

Note
When “HDMI OUT SEL” is set to “OUT 1+2” and video
monitors are connected to both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI
OUT 2 jacks, the automatic lip sync function does not work
even if “Auto” is selected.

Auto (Automatic audio delay adjustment)
Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the audio and
video synchronization when you set “Mode” to “Auto”.
Control range: 0 to 240 ms
Control step: 1 ms

98 En

Functions

Note
You cannot use the GUI menu while this unit is in the PURE
DIRECT mode even if “Pure Direct” is set to “Audio + Video”.

■ Channel Mute (Channel mute)
Use this feature to mute specific speaker channels.
Mode (Mode)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the “Channel
Mute” setting for each speaker.
Choice

Functions

Disable

Deactivates the “Channel Mute” function.

Enable

Activates the “Channel Mute” function.

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

Each speaker settings
Select whether this unit mutes each speaker channel when
you set “Mode” to “Enable”.
Channel Mute

Speaker channel

Front L

Front left

Front R

Front right

Center

Surround L

Surround left

Surround R

Surround right

Surround Back L

Surround back left

Surround Back R

Surround back right

Front Presence L

Front presence left speaker

Front Presence R

Front presence right speaker

Subwoofer

Choice

Functions

Mute On

Mutes the selected speaker channel.

Mute Off

Does not mute the selected speaker channel.

Setup (Video)

• Analog-to-HDMI video conversion is always possible unless
video signals are being input at the HDMI input jacks or 1080presolution analog video signals are being input.
• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line
video signals interchangeably.
• 480p-, 576p-, 1080i- and 720p-resolution video signals cannot
be output at the S VIDEO and VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR
OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the
same type of video connections between each component.
• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are
converted into component video signals, the picture quality may
suffer depending on your VCR.
• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video
jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such
cases, set “Analog ` Analog” to “Through”.

■ Analog ` HDMI (Analog-to-HDMI video
signal processing)
Use this feature to select whether this unit processes the
analog-to-HDMI video signals (input at VIDEO,
S VIDEO, or COMPONENT VIDEO input jacks and
output at HDMI OUT jacks).
Choice
Through

Select this setting when you do not want this
unit to process the analog-to-HDMI video
signals.

Processing

Select this setting when you want this unit to
apply the video processing configured in
“Processing” to the analog-to-HDMI video
signals.

y
You can reset the all parameters in “Video” to the initial factory
settings by using “VIDEO” of “INITIALIZE” in “ADVANCED
SETUP” (page 131).

■ Analog ` Analog
(Analog-to-analog video conversion)
Use this feature to enable or disable the video conversion
among the analog video jacks (VIDEO, S VIDEO, and
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks).
Choice

Functions

Through

Disables the video conversion among the analog
video jacks.

Conversion

Enables the video conversion among the analog
video jacks.

Functions

■ HDMI ` HDMI
(HDMI-to-HDMI video signal processing)
Use this feature to select whether this unit processes the
HDMI-to-HDMI video signals (input at HDMI input jacks
and output at HDMI OUT jacks).
Choice

Functions

Through

Select this setting when you do not want this
unit to process the HDMI-to-HDMI video
signals.

Processing

Select this setting when you want this unit to
apply the video processing configured in
“Processing” to the HDMI-to-HDMI video
signals.

■ Processing
(HDMI video signal processing)
Use this feature to configure the resolution, aspect, and
progressive re-processing settings for the video signals
output at the HDMI OUT jacks.
Note
This feature is available only when “Analog ` HDMI” or
“HDMI ` HDMI” is set to “Processing”.

99 En

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Use this menu to adjust the video parameters.

Notes

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

Resolution (HDMI video signal resolution)
Use this feature to enable or disable the upscaling of the
analog-to-HDMI video signals and/or HDMI-to-HDMI
video signals.
This unit up-scales the video signals as follows:
• 480i(576i) → 480p(576p)/720p/1080i/1080p
• 480p(576p) → 720p/1080i/1080p
• 720p → 480p(576p)/1080i/1080p
• 1080i → 480p(576p)/720p/1080p
• 1080p → 480p(576p)/720p/1080i
Choice

up to six of your favorite video quality settings.

Press 9 k / n repeatedly to select
“Adjustment” and then press 9 ENTER.

Press 9 l / h repeatedly to select a preset
number to which you want to save the video
quality adjustments and then press
9 ENTER.
y

Functions

Through

Does not up-scale any video signals.

480p (or
576p), 1080i,
720p, 1080p

Up-scales video signals to 480p or 576p, 1080i,
720p, or 1080p of resolution.

To recall the preset video quality adjustments, press 9l /
h to select a preset number to recall, press 9ENTER
and then skip to step 8.
Preset Select
1

Aspect (HDMI aspect ratio)
Use this feature to select whether this unit converts the
aspect ratio of the analog-to-HDMI video signals and/or
HDMI-to-HDMI video signals.
Choice

Does not make any adjustments to the aspect
ratio for the HDMI video signal sources.

16:9 Normal

Displays video images with the aspect ratio of
4:3 on your video monitor with the aspect ratio
of 16:9. Black stripes appear on the right and
left sides as a result.

Smart Zoom

EDIT

Press 9 n to select “EDIT” and then press
9 ENTER.

Press 9 l / h repeatedly to select the video
quality parameter you want to adjust and then
press 9 n to move to the adjustment field.

Functions

Through

Mosquito NR

Fits video images with the aspect ratio of 4:3
to your video monitor with the aspect ratio of
16:9.

Video quality parameter
Adjustment

Off
CANCEL

Notes

• If the aspect ratio of the input video source is other than 4:3, this
unit automatically ignores the setting of “Aspect”.
• When “Aspect” is set to “Smart Zoom”, the video images of the
edge of the video monitor are rather stretched.

Press 9 l / h repeatedly to adjust the
setting of the selected video quality
parameter.

Prog. Re-Processing (Progressive re-processing)
Use this feature to enable or disable the progressive reprocessing of the analog-to-HDMI video signals and/or
HDMI-to-HDMI video signals.

To adjust another video quality parameter,
press 9 k / n repeatedly to select the
parameter field and then repeat steps 4 and 5.

Press 9 n to select “OK” and then press
9 ENTER.

Choice

Functions

Off

Disables the progressive re-processing of the
HDMI video signals.

Enables the progressive re-processing of the
HDMI video signals.

Note
This setting is effective only for video signals of which
resolution is 480p (576p), 720p, or 1080p.

Adjustment (Video quality adjustments)
Use this feature to fine adjust the video quality of the
analog-to-HDMI video signals and/or HDMI-to-HDMI
video signals. You can also use the preset feature to save

100 En

y
To cancel the operation without change, press 9l / h
to select “CANCEL” and then press 9ENTER.

Press 9 k / n / l / h to select “CLOSE” and
then press 9 ENTER.

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

Mosquito NR (Mosquito noise reduction)
Mosquito noise is a type of noise that appears along
edges of compression artifacts. Use this feature to
adjust the mosquito noise reduction level.
Choices: Off, Low, Medium, High
Block NR (Block noise reduction)
Block noise is often caused when the bitrate is too
low to accurately encode the video. Use this feature
to adjust the block noise reduction level.
Control range: 0 to 50
Detail Enhancement (Detail enhancement)
Use this feature to adjust finesses of images.
Control range: 0 to 50
Edge Enhancement (Edge enhancement)
Use this feature to adjust sharpness of images.
Control range: 0 to 50
Brightness (Brightness)
Use this feature to adjust brightness of images.
Control range: -50 to 50
Initial setting: 0
Contrast (Contrast)
Use this feature to adjust contrast of images.
Control range: -50 to 50
Initial setting: 0

Fix

When “Mode” is set to “Last” or “Fix”, the amount of power
consumption in the standby mode increases.

Input (HDMI IN jack select)
Use this feature to select an HDMI IN jack that accepts
HDMI signals when this unit is in the standby mode.
Note
This setting is available only when “Mode” is set to “Fix”.
Choice

Mode (Standby through mode)
Use this feature whether this unit allows the HDMI signals
input at the HDMI IN jacks to pass thorough this unit
when this unit is in the standby mode. You can also
designate an HDMI IN jack and HDMI OUT jack(s) that
accept the signals when “Mode” is set to “Fix” and this
unit is in the standby mode.

HDMI IN jack

IN1

HDMI IN1 (BD/HD DVD) jack

IN2

HDMI IN2 (DVD) jack

IN3

HDMI IN3 (CBL/SAT) jack

IN4

HDMI IN4 (DVR) jack

Front

HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX) jack

Output (HDMI OUT jack select)
Use this feature to select HDMI OUT jack(s) that output
HDMI signals when this unit is in the standby mode.
Note
This setting is available only when “Mode” is set to “Fix”.
Choice

■ Standby Through (Standby through)

Choice

HDMI signals pass through this unit (from the
HDMI IN jack specified in “Input” to the HDMI
OUT jack(s) specified in “Output”) even when
this unit is in the standby mode.

Note

Setup (HDMI)
Use this feature to set the HDMI functions or check the
information about the video monitors connected to the
HDMI OUT jacks.

Functions

HDMI IN jack

OUT1 + 2

HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks

OUT1

HDMI OUT 1 jack

OUT2

HDMI OUT 2 jack

■ Audio Output (HDMI audio output)
Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI
audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component
connected to the HDMI OUT jacks on the rear panel of
this unit.
Choice

Functions

Amp

Outputs HDMI audio signals at the speakers
connected to this unit.

Functions

Off

Disables the HDMI standby through feature.
HDMI signals do not pass through this unit if
this unit is in the standby mode.

Outputs HDMI audio signals at the speakers of
the TV connected to this unit. The speakers
connected to this unit are muted.

Last

HDMI signals pass through this unit (only from
the HDMI IN jack to the HDMI OUT jack(s)
used when this unit is set to the standby mode)
even when this unit is in the standby mode.

Amp + TV

Outputs HDMI audio signals at the speakers
connected to this unit and speakers of the TV
connected to this unit.

y
If “Audio Output” is set to “TV” or “Amp + TV”, available
audio signals vary depending on the specification of the
connected video monitor.

101 En

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Saturation (Saturation)
Use this feature to adjust saturation of images.
Control range: -50 to 50
Initial setting: 0

Choice

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

■ Control Monitor (Control monitor)
Use this feature to select the HDMI OUT jack at which
HDMI control signals are output.
Choice

Functions

HDMI OUT1

Outputs HDMI control signals at the HDMI
OUT 1 jack.

HDMI OUT2

Outputs HDMI control signals at the HDMI
OUT 2 jack.

■ Monitor Info. (Monitor information)
Use this feature to check the information (interface and
frequency for each video resolution) about the video
monitors connected to the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT
2 jacks of this unit.

Subnet Mask (Subnet mask)
Use this parameter to specify the subnet mask value
assigned to this unit.
y
For most of the cases, the subnet mask value can be set as
“255.255.255.0”.

Default Gateway (Default gateway)
Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the default
gateway.
DNS Server (P) (Primary DNS server)
DNS Server (S) (Secondary DNS server)
Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the primary
and secondary DNS (Domain Name System) servers.

y
Press 9h repeatedly to toggle between “OUT1” (information
about the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack)
and “OUT2” (information about the video monitor connected to
the HDMI OUT 2 jack).

Setup (Network)
Use this menu to adjust the network parameters.
Note

Note
If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in
“DNS Server (P)”. If you have two or more DNS addresses,
enter one of them in “DNS Server (P)” and another in “DNS
Server (S)”.

■ Network Standby (Network standby)
Use this feature to select whether this unit accepts the
commands via LAN network when this unit is in the
standby mode.

In case you changed your network configuration, you may
need to reconfigure the network settings.
y
You can reset the all parameters in “Network” to the initial
factory settings by using “NETWORK” of “INITIALIZE” in
“ADVANCED SETUP” (page 131).

■ Configuration (Network configurations)
Use this feature to view the network parameters (IP
address, etc.) or to change them manually.
DHCP (DHCP setting)
Use this feature to select whether this unit can obtain the
network parameters (IP address, subnet mask, default
gateway, primary DNS server and secondary DNS server)
from the DHCP server of the connected network.
Choice

Descriptions

Select this setting when this unit can obtain the
network parameters from the DHCP server of
the connected network.

Off

Select this setting when you set the network
parameters manually.

IP Address (IP address)
Use this parameter to specify an IP address assigned to
this unit. This value must not duplicate the one used for
other devices in the target network.

Choice

Descriptions

Off

Does not accept the operations via LAN
network when this unit is in the standby mode.

Accepts the operations via LAN network when
this unit is in the standby mode.

Note
When “Network Standby” is set to “On”, the amount of power
consumption in the standby mode increases.

■ Information (Network information)
Use this feature to display the network system
information.
MAC Address
(MAC (Media Access Control) address)
This information displays the MAC address that is
assigned to this unit.
Status (Network status)
This information displays the current link status of the
network.
Display status: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, No Link,
Full Duplex, Half Duplex
Note
“No Link” appears when network connection is not made.

System (System ID)
This information displays the system ID that is assigned to
this unit.

102 En

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

Setup (Multi Zone)
Use this menu to set the functions of the multi-zone
configuration.

Zone3

Select this setting when you want to connect the
video monitor in the Zone 3 to the
COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT) jacks.

Zone4

Select this setting when you want to connect the
video monitor in the Zone 4 to the
COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT) jacks.

■ Zone SP Assign
(Zone speaker assignment)
Use this feature to assign the speaker terminals for Zone 2
and Zone 3.
Note
If you want use the external amplifiers for the all channels in the
main zone, you can use all the speaker terminals of this unit for
Zone 2 and/or Zone3 (pre-amplifier mode). Set “PREAMP
MODE” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to “ON” (page 131).

Press 9k / n to select the speaker terminal
and then press 9l / h repeatedly to select
the desired zone of which you want to use
the speakers.

Zone SP Assign
Component Assign
Party Mode Set

M 2

–

SP1
2

SP2
OK

CANCEL

The party mode enables you to play the same source in
multiple zones simultaneously (page 129). Use this
feature to enable or disable the party mode in each zone.

Choice

y
• To return to the previous menu level without change,
select “CANCEL” in step 2.

■ Component Assign
(Component assignment)
Use this feature to assign the COMPONENT VIDEO
(MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT) jacks to the main zone or
another zone. Video signals are directed to the video
monitor in the selected zone if the corresponding input
source is selected.
Functions

Main

Select this setting when you want to connect the
video monitor in the main zone to the
COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT) jacks.

Zone2

Select this setting when you want to connect the
video monitor in the Zone 2 to the
COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT) jacks.

Descriptions

Disable

Select this setting to exclude the selected zone
from the party mode coverage. You can select
the input source of the selected zone
independently even if this unit is in the party
mode.

Enable

Select this setting to include the selected zone to
the party mode coverage.

■ Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set
(Zone 2/Zone 3 settings)
Zone2 Volume/Zone3 Volume
(Zone 2/Zone 3 volume)
Use this menu to select whether this unit controls the
volume level of the audio signals output at the ZONE
OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks.
Choice

Descriptions

Fixed

Select this setting when you want to control the
volume level of the selected zone on the external
amplifier. This unit fixes the ZONE OUT
(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) volume level to a standard
line level.

Variable

Select this setting when you want to control the
volume level of the selected zone on this unit.
You can adjust the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or
ZONE 3) volume level simultaneously with
JVOLUME +/– on the remote control.

103 En

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Press 9k / n to select “OK” and then press
9 ENTER to confirm the setting.

Choice

■ Party Mode Set (Party mode settings)

Zone :
SP Terminal :

M : Main zone
2 : Zone 2
3 : Zone 3

• The video conversion function does not work for the
COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT) jacks
if “Component Assign” is set to “Zone2”, “Zone3”, or “Zone4”.
• The COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT)
jacks do not output OSD signals.

Target: Zone2/Target: Zone3/Target: Zone4
(Party mode target zone setting)

Zone4 Set
Zone OSD

Notes

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

Note
When “Zone2 Volume” or “Zone3 Volume” is set to “Fixed”,
you cannot select the following parameters:
– Zone2 Max Vol./Zone3 Max Vol.
– Zone2 Initial Vol./Zone3 Initial Vol.

Zone2 Max Vol./Zone3 Max Vol.
(Zone 2/Zone 3 Maximum volume setting)
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the
Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Control range: –30.0 dB to +15 .0 dB, +16.5 dB
Control step: 5.0 dB
Note
The “Zone2 Max Vol.” or “Zone3 Max Vol.” setting takes
priority over the “Zone2 Initial Vol.” or “Zone3 Initial Vol.”
setting.

Zone2 Initial Vol./Zone3 Initial Vol.
(Zone 2/Zone 3 initial volume setting)
Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone
3 when the power of each zone is turned on.
Control range: Off, Mute, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Note
The “Zone2 Max Vol.” or “Zone3 Max Vol.” setting takes
priority over the “Zone2 Initial Vol.” or “Zone3 Initial Vol.”
setting.

Zone2 Balance/Zone3 Balance
(Zone 2/Zone 3 balance)
Use this feature to adjust the balance of the volume of the
left and right channels in each zone.
Choices: L10 to L1, 0, R1 to R10
Zone2 Tone Control/Zone3 Tone Control
(Zone 2/Zone 3 tone control)
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble
output to the selected zone.
Choices: Bass (Bass control), Treble (Treble control)
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Zone2 Mono/Zone3 Mono
(Zone 2/Zone 3 monaural mode)
Use this feature to select whether you play back sources
monaurally in the selected zone.
Choice

Descriptions

Off

Turns off the monaural playback mode. This
unit plays back sources in stereo.

Turns on the monaural playback mode. This unit
mixes down the left and right channel signals
and plays the sources monaurally.

104 En

Zone2 Muting Type/Zone3 Muting Type
(Zone 2/Zone 3 muting type)
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function
reduces the output volume of the selected zone.
Choice

Functions

Full

Mutes all the audio output.

–20dB

Reduces the current volume by 20 dB.

–40dB

Reduces the current volume by 40 dB.

■ Zone OSD (Zone on-screen display)
Use this feature to display the operational status of Zone 2,
Zone 3, and Zone 4 on the Zone 2 video monitor
connected to the ZONE VIDEO jacks on the rear panel of
this unit.
Choice

Functions

Off

Turns off the zone on-screen display feature.

Zone2

Displays the operational status of Zone 2 only.

All

Displays the operational status of Zone 2, Zone
3 and Zone 4.

■ Zone Rename (Zone Rename)
Main/Zone2/Zone3/Zone4
(Main/Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 rename)
Use this feature to edit the name of the selected zone.

Press 9k / n / l / h to select a character or
function and then press 9ENTER to
confirm the selection.
Repeat step 1 until you input a name you want to use.

Press 9k / n / l / h to select “SAVE” and
then press 9ENTER.
y
• To reset the name, select “RESET” and then press
9ENTER.
• To cancel the operation without change, select
“CANCEL” and then press 9ENTER.

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

Setup (Option)

Press 9k / n /l / h to select “EXIT” and
then press 9ENTER.

This menu adjusts the optional system settings.

■ Memory Guard (Memory guard)
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to sound
field program parameter values and other system settings.
Choice

Functions

You cannot select a specific item more than once for the
same type of jack.

■ Input Rename (Input rename)

Off

Turns off the “Memory Guard” feature.

Use this feature to change the name of the input source
that appears in the GUI screen and in the front panel
display.

Protects the following parameters:
– sound field program parameters
– GUI menu parameters
– speaker levels settings

Press 9k / n /l / h to select a character or
function and then press 9ENTER to
confirm the selection.
Repeat step 1 until you input a name you want to use.

Press 9k / n /l / h to select “SAVE” and
then press 9ENTER.

y
When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, “ ” appears on the left
side of the name of a parameter being protected.

■ I/O Assignment
(Input/output assignment)

y
• To reset the name, select “RESET” and then press
9ENTER.
• To cancel the operation without change, select
“CANCEL” and then press 9ENTER.

■ Display Set (Display settings)
Front Panel Display (Front panel display setting)
Dimmer (Dimmer)
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front
panel display.
Control range: –4 to 0

Example: Assigning the CD DIGITAL INPUT
COAXIAL jack to “MD/CD-R”.

Press 9ENTER to display the
“I/O Assignment” screen.
Coax Opt
In
In
PHONO
CD
TV
MD/CD-R
BD/HD DVD
DVD

Scroll (Front panel display message scroll)
Use this feature to set the front panel display message
scroll pattern.

Opt Comp HDMI
Out
In
In

Choice

Functions

Continue

Continuous mode.
Select this to display the operation status in the
front panel display in a continuous manner.

Once

Scroll-once mode.
Select this to display the operation status in the
front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric
characters after scrolling all characters once.

EXIT

4
8

IN 1

IN 2

Press 9k / n /l / h to select the cell in row
“MD/CD-R”, column “Coax In” and then
press 9ENTER.

Short Message (Short message display)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the short message
display displayed in the GUI screen in the main zone.

Press 9l / h to select “1” and then press
9ENTER.
Select “None” to clear the existing assignment.

Activates the short message display function.

Off

Deactivates the short message display function.

Choice

Functions

To return to the previous screen without change, press
9 k.

105 En

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according
to the component to be used if the initial settings of this
unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the
parameter to reassign the respective jacks and effectively
connect more components.
Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select
the corresponding component by using the LINPUT
selector (or the input selector buttons (3)).

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

■ iPod (iPod settings)

Note
The short message display (except some status messages) does
not appear when the component video signals with 720p, 1080i
or 1080p resolutions are input.

Playback Screen (Playback screen display time)
Use this feature to set the playback screen display time.
Choice

Displays the menu unceasingly during an
operation.

10sec

Turns off the menu 10 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.

30sec

Turns off the menu 30 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.

y
This setting is applied to the GUI screen in the main zone and
OSD in Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4.

Position (GUI screen position)
Use this feature to adjust the vertical and horizontal
position of the GUI screen.
Control range: –5 (downward/left) to +5 (upward/right)

9 n

Down

9 h

Right

9 l

Left

Wall Paper (Wall paper)
Use this feature to display the wall paper or gray
background in your video monitor when there is no video
signal being input.

Functions

Auto

Charges the battery of the stationed iPod when
this unit is turned on and in the standby mode.

Off

Charges the battery of the stationed iPod only
when this unit is turned on.

■ Initial Set (Initial settings)
Audio Select (Default audio input jack select)
Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack
select setting (page 43) for the input sources connected to
the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of
this unit.
Choice

Functions

Auto

Automatically detects the type of audio input
signals and selects the appropriate audio input
jack select setting.

Last

Automatically selects the last audio input jack
select setting used for the connected input
source.

Moving direction of the GUI display

9 k

Choice

Functions

Always

Button

Standby Charge
(iPod charge on the standby mode)
Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the
battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the
standby mode.

Decoder Mode (Default decoder mode)
Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode
(page 53) for the input sources when you turn on the
power of this unit.
Choice

Functions

Auto

Automatically detects the type of input signals
and select the appropriate decoder mode setting.

Last

Automatically selects the last decoder mode
setting used for the connected input source.

Functions

None

Does not display any background in your video
monitor.

Piano

Displays a background image (the photograph
of a piano) in your monitor when there is no
video signal being input.

Horn

Displays a background image (the photograph
of a horn) in your monitor when there is no
video signal being input.

Electric Guitar

Displays a background image (the photograph
of an electric guitar) in your monitor when there
is no video signal being input.

Auto

Display a gray background in your monitor
when there is no video signal being input.

Automatically detects the input digital audio
signals and activates the appropriate decoder.

Last

Selects the last selected extended surround
decoder mode.

Gray

106 En

EXTD Surround (Default extended surround
decoder mode setting)
Use this feature to designate the extended surround
decoder mode (page 54) for the input sources connected to
the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of
this unit.
Choice

Functions

Graphical user interface (GUI) menu

■ Trigger Output (Trigger output)

Manual Test (Manual test)

Use this feature to select the functions of each TRIGGER
OUT jack of this unit.

Note

Choice
Trigger1
Trigger2

Function

This setting is available only when “Trigger Mode” is set to
“Manual”.

Sets the functions for the TRIGGER OUT 1
jack.
Sets the functions for the TRIGGER OUT 2
jack.

Choice

Functions

High

Sends the voltage signals.

Low

Stops sending the voltage signals.

Trigger Mode (Trigger mode)
Choice

Descriptions

Power

Select this setting to send the voltage signals at
the selected TRIGGER OUT jack while the
selected zone is turned on.

Source

Select this setting to send the voltage signals at
the selected TRIGGER OUT jack while the
selected input source is selected.

Manual

Select this setting to send the voltage signals
manually.

Language
Use this feature to select the language of the menu items
and messages.
(Japanese),
Choices: English (English),
Français (French), Deutsch (German),
Español (Spanish), Русский (Russian)
y

Target Zone (Target zone)

You can also select the display language with the
“LANGUAGE” parameter in “ADVANCED SETUP”
(page 132).

Note

Language

This setting is not available when “Trigger Mode” is set to
“Manual”.

Front panel
display

Русский
(Russian)

Zone OSD
—

Target zone

Main

Main zone

(Japanese)

Zone2

Zone 2

Other
languages

Zone3

Zone 3

Zone4

Zone 4

All

Main zone, Zone 2, Zone 3 and Zone 4

—

··· The selected language is displayed.
— ··· The selected language is not displayed. The menu
items and messages are displayed in English.

Input Level (Input level)
Select the input source and then set the input level applied
to the selected input source.
Note
This setting is available only when “Trigger Mode” is set to
“Source”.
Choice

Descriptions

High

Sends the voltage when the input source is
selected.

Low

Stops sending the voltage when the input source
is selected.

107 En

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Choice

GUI menu

Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)
Use this feature to save and recall up to six of your favorite
setting for the main zone. You can also save up to four of
your favorite settings for Zone 2, Zone 3 or Zone 4.

Saving the system settings
■ Saving by the 7SYSTEM MEMORY
buttons
You can save the system settings stored in “Memory1” to
“Memory4” by pressing the corresponding 7 SYSTEM
MEMORY buttons.

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired
zone and then press 9h.

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “xxx Save”
and then press 9h.
“xxx” indicates the zone you selected in step 4.

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired
memory number and then press 9ENTER.
The list of the parameter groups to be saved appears. Available
parameter groups vary depending on the selected zone.

Press and hold one of the 7SYSTEM MEMORY
buttons on the remote control for 4 seconds.
“Memory1 SAVE” (example) appears in the front panel
display, and then this unit saves the current system setting
to the corresponding memory number.

Main Save
Input/HDMI Out
Audio
Volume
SP Config
Video/Display Set
Others

SAVE
CANCEL

SYSTEM MEMORY

y
y
• If system settings are already stored in the selected memory
number, this unit overwrites the old settings.
• To save the system settings for Zone 2, Zone 3 or Zone 4, press
HZONE on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired
zone and then press and hold one of the 7SYSTEM
MEMORY buttons for 4 seconds. To save the system settings
for the selected zone, the zone should be turned on.
• This unit saves the parameters in the groups you select by using
the GUI menu when you save the parameters by using the
7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons.

• If system settings are already stored in the selected memory
number, this unit overwrites the old settings.
• To load the system settings with the 7SYSTEM MEMORY
button operation, use one of “Memory1” to “Memory4”.

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the
parameter group and then press 9ENTER
to check or uncheck the box.
Check the boxes for the parameter groups to be saved.
For details on parameters to be saved, see
“Parameters to be saved” (page 109).

Press 9k / n / l / h repeatedly to select
“SAVE” and then press 9ENTER to save
the current system settings to the selected
memory number.

■ Saving by the GUI menu operation
You can save the current system settings stored in
“Memory1” to “Memory6” by using the “System
Memory” menu in the GUI menu.

Set the operation mode selector on the
remote control to FAMP and then press
IMENU.

y
To cancel the operation, select “CANCEL” and then press
9ENTER.

y
If the menu directory other than “Top Menu” (page 84) is
displayed, press and hold IMENU to display the top GUI
menu.

Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu.

■ Renaming the stored settings

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Setup”
and then press 9h.

Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Saving by the GUI
menu operation” (page 108).

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “System
Memory” and then press 9h.

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “xxx
Rename” and then press 9h.
“xxx” indicates the zone you selected in step 1.

108 En

Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired
memory number and then press 9h.

Group
SP Config

Parameters

Page

Parametric EQ

Configuration

Distance

Level

Information (Auto Setup)

Setup Menu (Auto Setup)

Analog ` Analog

Analog ` HDMI

HDMI ` HDMI

Processing

Short Message

105

Playback Screen

106

Position

106

Wall Paper

106

Lipsync

■ Parameters to be saved

Front Panel Display

105

The parameter groups indicated in bold are selected by
default.

Audio Output

101

Press 9k / n / l / h to select a character or
function and then press 9ENTER to
confirm the selection.
Repeat step 4 until you input a name you want to use.
Press 9k / n / l / h to select “SAVE” and
then press 9ENTER.

Video/
Display Set

y
• To reset the name, select “RESET” and then press 9ENTER.
• To cancel the operation without change, select “CANCEL” and
then press 9ENTER.

Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu.

Note
If you change the language setting (page 107) or 132), names of
the memory settings will be automatically reset.

Input/HDMI
Out

Audio

Parameters

Page

Audio Select

Decoder Mode

Input source

HDMI OUT SEL

Stereo/Surround

PURE DIRECT on/off

EXTD SUR. setting

Adaptive DRC

Adaptive DSP Level

LFE Level

Dynamic Range

Tone Control

Pure Direct

CINEMA DSP 3D mode on/off

Volume level

Parameter

Descriptions

Page

Input

Input source

127

Volume

Volume level

127

Tone Control

Tone control settings

128

Note
For zone 4, only the input source setting is saved.

Volume

Loading the system settings
Note
If you load the system settings, the settings currently configured
are overwritten. If you do not want to erase the current settings,
save the settings using the System Memory feature in advance.

■ Loading by the 7 SYSTEM MEMORY
buttons
You can recall the system settings stored in “Memory1” to
“Memory4” by pressing the corresponding 7SYSTEM
MEMORY buttons.

109 En

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Zone 2, Zone 3 and Zone 4 parameters

Main zone parameters
Group

Others

Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)

Press one of the 7SYSTEM MEMORY
buttons on the remote control to select the
desired memory number.
“Memory1 LOAD” (example) appears in the front
panel display.
SYSTEM MEMORY

Using examples
■ Example 1: Comparing the results of the
automatic setup and manual setup
This unit is equipped with three types of parametric
equalizer settings (page 96), and you can also make your
customized configuration of the sound settings of this unit
by using the “Speaker” parameters (page 93). To compare
the results of the automatic setup or your manual
configuration, use the 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons.

“Empty” appears in the menu screen if no system settings
are stored in the selected memory number.

SYSTEM MEMORY 1
Results of the automatic setup
(PEQ Select: Natural)

Press the selected 7 SYSTEM MEMORY
button once more to confirm the selection.
This unit loads the settings stored in the selected
memory number.

SYSTEM MEMORY 2
Results of the automatic setup
(PEQ Select: Front)

SYSTEM MEMORY

■ Loading by the GUI menu operation

1
2

Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Saving by the GUI
menu operation” (page 108).
Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “xxx Load”
and then press 9h.
“xxx” indicates the zone you selected in step 1.
Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired
memory number and then press 9ENTER.

Perform the automatic setup (page 35).

Press and hold 7 SYSTEM MEMORY 1 for
4 seconds.
This unit stores the results of the automatic setup
(PEQ Select: Natural) to “Memory1”.

Set “PEQ Select” to “Front” (page 96).

Press and hold 7SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for
4 seconds.
This unit stores the results of the automatic setup
(PEQ Select: Front) to “Memory2”.

Configure the parameters of “Speaker”
(page 93) and parametric equalizer
configuration of each speaker manually
(page 97).

Press and hold 7SYSTEM MEMORY 3 for
4 seconds.
This unit stores the settings configured manually to
“Memory3”.

y
To cancel the operation and return to the previous menu,
select “CANCEL” and then press 9ENTER.

Press I MENU to turn off the GUI menu.

110 En

Saving each setting

If the memory number you selected is empty, “Memory
Empty” appears.

Press 9k / n / l / h repeatedly to select
“LOAD” and then press 9ENTER to load
the settings stored in the selected memory
number.

SYSTEM MEMORY 3
Settings configured manually

Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)

■ Example 2: Switching the settings for
different room environments
The tonal characteristics of the listening room may vary
depending on the situations of the room (for example,
whether the curtains are open or closed), and the settings
of this unit should be arranged for each situation of the
room. You can switch between the settings of this unit
easily by using 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons.
SYSTEM MEMORY 1
The settings when the curtains of the
listening room are closed
SYSTEM MEMORY

SYSTEM MEMORY 2
The settings when the curtains of
the listening room are open

Saving each setting
Close the curtains of the listening room and
then perform the automatic setup (page 35).

Press and hold 7 SYSTEM MEMORY 1 for
4 seconds.
This unit stores the settings for the current room
situation (i.e. the curtains are closed) to “Memory1”.

Open the curtains of the listening room and
the perform the automatic setup.

Press and hold 7SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for
4 seconds.
This unit stores the current room situation (i.e. the
curtains are open) to “Memory2”.

ADVANCED
OPERATION

111 En

Controlling this unit by using the Web browser (Web Control Center)
You can operate this unit by using a Web browser. You can select the input source and sound field program, browse the
iPod or USB/network contents, select the preset items, and adjust the parameters of this unit by using the graphical user
interface (Web Control Center) that appears in the Web browser. Check the IP address of this unit by using “IP Address”
in “Network” menu (page 102) in advance, and then enter the IP address to the Web browser to access this unit to control
it.
PC

Web browser

Control

Selecting the input source

Controlling USB/
Network features

Adjusting the system parameters

Power on/off

And many other features...

y
• To use this feature, this unit and your PC must be connected properly in the network (page 28).
• We recommend that you use Windows Internet Explorer 6 or 7 that is installed on Windows XP or Windows Vista PC to access this
unit.
• You can select whether this unit accepts the controls by using the Web browser when this unit is in the standby mode (page 102).
• You can register the MAC address of the PCs you want to use to control this unit and limit the PCs that can control this unit by using
the Web browser. You can select that this unit allows the access to this unit by the PCs whose MAC addresses are registered to this unit
or allows the access by any PCs by using “MAC FILTER” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (page 131)

112 En

Remote control features
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code
for each input source (page 116).

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
■ Controlling this unit

Set the operation mode selector to FAMP to control this
unit.

POWER

MULTI
BD
HD DVD

STANDBY

POWER

V-AUX

PHONO

DOCK

DVD

MD
CD-R

CBL
SAT

DVR

VCR

SIRIUS

USB
NET

Set the operation mode selector to F TV to control your
TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate
remote control code for the TV operation mode in advance
(page 116).
y

TUNER

■ Controlling a TV

If no code has been set for the TV operation mode, the remote
control operates the component that is set to the TV control area
(page 116).
Set to AMP

AMP
TV

SOURCE
SELECT

SETUP

MACRO

MODE

STATUS
TITLE
BAND

PRESET/CH

VOLUME
MENU
SRCH MODE

MULTI
BD
HD DVD

STANDBY

POWER

V-AUX

PHONO

DOCK

DVD

MD
CD-R

CBL
SAT

DVR

VCR

TUNER

SIRIUS

USB
NET

CAT.
A-E

ENTER

POWER

ZONE

SYSTEM MEMORY

POWER

AMP

Set to TV

SUBMENU
RETURN
MEMORY

PLAY INFO
DISPLAY

SOURCE
SELECT

MUTE

ZONE

LIVE/CLUB
2

PRG SELECT
ENTERTAIN
3

MOVIE
4

ENHANCER SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT
6
7
8

HDMI OUT
0

INFO

LEVEL

SLEEP
MUTE

TV VOL

TV CH

PRESET/CH

VOLUME
MENU
SRCH MODE
CAT.
A-E

ENTER

SUBMENU
RETURN
MEMORY

EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT
ENT
10

INPUT
PARTY

1
STATUS
TITLE
BAND

ADVANCED
OPERATION

SYSTEM MEMORY

TAG

STEREO
5

MACRO

MODE

REC

CLASSICAL
1

SETUP

PLAY INFO
DISPLAY
MUTE

AUDIO SEL
AUDIO
REC

3D DSP
TAG
CLASSICAL
1
STEREO
5

LIVE/CLUB
2

PRG SELECT
ENTERTAIN
3

MOVIE
4

ENHANCER SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT
6
7
8

HDMI OUT
0

INFO

LEVEL

TV VOL

TV CH

EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT
ENT
10
SLEEP
MUTE

AUDIO SEL
AUDIO

TV
INPUT
PARTY

3D DSP

Notes
*1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the
operation mode selector position.
*2 These buttons control this unit only when the component
operation mode selector is set to FAMP.

Notes
*1 2TV POWER can always turn on or off the power of the TV
regardless of the operation mode selector position.
*2 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode
selector is set to F TV. For details, see the “TV” column on
page 114.
*3 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode
selector is set to F TV or F SOURCE.
Remote control

Functions

TV VOL +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level.

TV CH +/–

Changes the TV channel.

TV MUTE

Mutes the audio output.

TV INPUT

Changes the input source.

113 En

Remote control features

■ Controlling other components
Set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE to control
other components selected with the input selector buttons
(3). You must set the appropriate remote control code for
each input source in advance (page 116). The following
table shows the function of each control button used to
control other components assigned to each input selector
button (3). Be advised that some buttons may not
correctly operate the selected component.

[1]

POWER

MULTI

V-AUX

STANDBY

POWER

[2]

PHONO

DOCK

[3]

BD
HD DVD

DVD

MD
CD-R

CBL
SAT

DVR

VCR

TUNER

SIRIUS

USB
NET

[4]

STATUS
TITLE
BAND

TAG
CLASSICAL
1

MACRO
MODE

[6]

ZONE

SYSTEM MEMORY

STATUS
TITLE

PRESET/CH

STEREO
5

4
VOLUME

The remote control has 16 modes (input areas) to control
components so that the remote control can operate up to 16
different components.

[8]

MUTE

[5]

PLAY INFO
DISPLAY

REC

AMP

SETUP

[7]

CAT.
A-E

ENTER

SUBMENU
RETURN
MEMORY

SOURCE
SELECT

VOLUME
MENU
SRCH MODE

PRESET/CH

LIVE/CLUB
2

PRG SELECT
ENTERTAIN
3

MOVIE
4

ENHANCER SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT
6
7
8

HDMI OUT
0

INFO

LEVEL

EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT
ENT
10
SLEEP
MUTE

TV VOL

TV CH

AUDIO SEL
AUDIO

INPUT
PARTY

[9]
[10]

3D DSP

Set to SOURCE

Blu-ray Disc/
HD DVD
DVD player LD player
player/
recorder

DVD
recorder/
Digital
video
recorder

VCR

Cable TV/
Satellite
tuner

CD player

MD
recorder/
CD
recorder

Tape deck

Tuner

Power *1

DVR power

Power *1

[1]

AV POWER

[2]

TITLE,
BAND

Title

[3]

PRESET/
CH k

Menu up

Channel up
Channel
down

Power *1

PRESET/
CH n

Menu down

CAT. A-E
l

Menu left

Title

Band

Menu up

Channel up

Menu up

Menu down

Channel
down

Menu down

Menu left

Menu left
Direction
A/B

CAT. A-E
h

Menu right

ENTER

Menu enter

Return

Memory

Record

DVR record DVR record Disc skip
*2

DVR pause

[4]

RETURN,
MEMORY

[5]

REC

Record
(recorder)

Disc skip

Record

Menu right

Record

Pause

Play

DVR play *2 DVR play *2 Play

Play

Stop

DVR stop *2 DVR stop *2 Stop

Stop

Search
backward

DVR search DVR search Search
backward *2 backward *2 backward

Search
backward

Search
forward

DVR search DVR search Search
forward
forward *2
forward *2

Search
forward

Skip
backward

DVR skip
DVR skip
Skip
backward *2 backward *2 backward

Skip
backward

Audio
Direction A program
down *3

Skip forward

Skip
forward

DVR skip
forward *2

Skip
forward

Audio
Direction B program up

[6]

1-9, 0, +10

Numeric
buttons

[7]

MENU,
SRCH
MODE

[8]

DISPLAY

Display

[9]

ENT

Index

Chapter/
time

Index

Enter

Index

Enter

Audio

[10] AUDIO

Pause

Numeric
buttons
Search
mode

Notes
*1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a power button.
*2 These buttons operate your video recorder (DVD recorder, etc.) only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR
(page 116).
*3 These functions are used for selecting HD Radio audio programs (U.S.A. model only).

114 En

Remote control features

■ Selecting a component to be controlled
You can select a component to be controlled
independently of the input source selected with the input
selector buttons (3).
Press 5 SELECT l / h repeatedly to select the
desired component.
The name of the component to be controlled appears in the
display window (4) on the remote control.

DVD

Customizing the remote control
Use the setup mode of the remote control to customize the
remote control.

Press GSETUP on the remote control using
a ballpoint pen or similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window on the
remote control.

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired
setup mode.

■ Controlling optional components
(Option mode)

Setup
mode

“OPTN1” and “OPTN2” are optional component control
areas that can be programmed with remote control
functions independently from any input source. These
areas are useful for programming commands that are to be
used only as a part of a macro function or for components
that do not have a valid remote control code.
To select the option mode, press 5 SELECT l /
h repeatedly until “OPTN1” or “OPTN2” appears
in the display window (4) on the remote control.
or

OPTN2

SETUP

Top setup mode menu.

—

LEARN

Learning mode. Use this feature to program
codes from other remote controls.

118

P-SET

Preset mode. Use this feature to change the
remote control code of each control area.

116

RNAME

Renaming mode. Use this feature to change
the name of each control area.

119

MACRO

Macro programming mode. Use this
feature to set the macro program.

120

CLEAR

Clearing mode. Use this feature to clear the
configurations of this unit.

122

ERASE

Erase mode. Use this feature to erase the
learned functions of each button.

122

EX-IR

Extended IR code mode. This feature is for
the authorized custom installers only.

—

LIGHT

Backlight mode. Use this feature to set the
light up mode of the remote control.

116

Note
You cannot set a remote control code for the optional areas. See
page 118 to program buttons operated within this component
control area.

Page

After the configurations, press GSETUP
again to exit from the setup menu.
Note
If you do not complete each of the operations within 30
seconds, this unit automatically exits from the setup menu.

115 En

ADVANCED
OPERATION

OPTN1

Descriptions

Remote control features

Setting the backlight mode of the
remote control
1

Press GSETUP on the remote control using
a ballpoint pen or similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4) on the
remote control.
Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “LIGHT”
and then press 9ENTER.
“LIGHT” and the current “LIGHT” setting appears in
the display window (4) alternately.

Setting remote control codes
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for
each input area. For a complete list of available remote
control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” in
“Appendix” (separate booklet).
The following table shows the default component
(Library: component category) and the remote control
code for each control area.
Remote control code default settings

LIGHT
3

Press 9k / n to select the desired setting
and then press 9ENTER.
Choice
ON
OFF

Descriptions
Lights up the backlight when a button is
pressed.
Lights up the backlight only when
6LIGHT is pressed.

Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup
mode.

Control
area

Library
(component
category)

Manufacturer

Default
code

MULTI

DVD

Yamaha

04306

V-AUX

—

PHONO

—

DOCK

SOURCE

Yamaha

00012

BD
HD DVD

Yamaha

04706

DVD

Yamaha

04306

Yamaha

01205

MD
CD-R

CD-R

Yamaha

01405

CBL
SAT

—

DVR

Yamaha

00707

VCR

—

TUNER

SOURCE

Yamaha

00012

SOURCE

Yamaha

00012

SIRIUS

SOURCE

Yamaha

00012

USB
NET

SOURCE

Yamaha

00012

Note
You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if
a Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above.
In this case, try setting another Yamaha remote control code.

116 En

Check the remote control code for your
component in advance.
For a complete list of available remote control codes,
see “List of remote control codes” in “Appendix”
(separate booklet).

Set the operation mode selector on the
remote control to FSOURCE.
If you want to set the remote control code for “TV”,
set the operation mode selector to FTV.

Remote control features

Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4) on the
remote control.

SETUP
4

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “P-SET”
and then press 9ENTER.
The remote control enters the preset mode. “P-SET”
and name of the currently selected control area
appears in the display window (4) alternately.

P-SET
5

Press an input selector button (3) or
5SELECT l / h repeatedly to select the
control area you want to customize.
If you selected “TV” in step 2, skip this step.

Press 2 AV POWER or A p to confirm
whether you can control your component
using the remote control.

y
• If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your
component has more than one code, try each of them until you
find the correct one.
• If you set “00012” as the remote control code of the selected
control area, you can operate the currently selected internal
source (DOCK, TUNER, XM, SIRIUS, or USB/NET).

Notes
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) on the remote
control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,
or when you press more than one button simultaneously.
• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes
for commercially available audio and video components
(including Yamaha components). If operation is not possible
with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote
control function using the learning feature (page 118) or use the
remote control supplied with the component.
• Functions programmed using the learning mode take priority
over remote control code functions.

ADVANCED
OPERATION

DVD
Press 9ENTER.
The current code setting appears.

04306
7

Press the numeric buttons (B) to enter the
five-digit remote control code for your
component.

Press 9ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window (4) if setting
was successful.
“NG” appears in the display window (4) if the
setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from
step 5.

OK
y
If you continuously want to set up another code for
another control area, repeat steps 5 through 8.

Press G SETUP again to exit from the setup
menu.

117 En

Remote control features

Programming codes from other
remote controls

Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2
to 4 in) apart from the other remote control
on a flat surface so that their infrared
transmitters are aimed at each other and
then press 9ENTER.
“L–KEY” appears in the display window (4).
Other remote control

DOCK

Set to
SOURCE

MUTE

5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)
TAG

CLASSICAL
1
STEREO
5

STATUS
TITLE
BAND

PRESET/CH

ENTER

VOLUME
MENU
SRCH MODE

ENTERTAIN
3

9
INFO

LEVEL

TV VOL

TV CH

SLEEP
MUTE

Press the button for which you want to
program the new function.
“START” appears in the display window (4).

AUDIO SEL
AUDIO

TV
INPUT
PARTY

CAT.
A-E

MOVIE
4

EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT
ENT
10

3D DSP

PLAY INFO
DISPLAY

DOCK

POWER

USB
NET

AMP

ZONE

SOURCE

PHONO

MACRO

STANDBY

VCR

MD
CD-R

V-AUX

POWER

DVR

DVD

MULTI

CBL
SAT

BD
HD DVD

SIRIUS

ID
MODE

TUNER

SETUP

V-AUX

POWER

PHONO

STANDBY

DOCK

POWER

VCR

MD
CD-R

MULTI

DVD

DVR

POWER

BD
HD DVD

USB
NET

CBL
SAT

AMP

SIRIUS

ZONE

SOURCE

MODE

MACRO

TUNER

118 En

SYSTEM MEMORY

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “LEARN”
and then press 9ENTER.

SELECT

SETUP

VOLUME
MENU
SRCH MODE

SYSTEM MEMORY

PRESET/CH

SELECT

Other remote control

Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to
F SOURCE or FTV. When you set the operation mode
selector to FAMP and program a remote control codes
from other remote controls, the programmed key cannot
operate the amplifier function of this unit.

Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).

VOLUME
MENU
SRCH MODE

Press and hold the button you want to
program on the other remote control until
“OK” appears in the display window (4).
“NG” appears in the display window (4) if learning
was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.

Note

PRESET/CH

STATUS
TITLE
BAND

Set the operation mode selector to
FSOURCE and then press an input selector
button (3) to select the desired control area.
If you want to program the remote control code for
“TV”, set the operation mode selector to FTV.

CAT.
A-E

PLAY INFO
DISPLAY

• The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote
control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn
most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program
some special signals or extremely long transmissions.
• You cannot program the desired remote control code even if you
select the buttons in the highlighted area in the above
illustration depending on the selected control area and the
assigned library.

STATUS
TITLE
BAND

ENTER

Notes

POWER

MUTE

REC

SUBMENU
RETURN

SUBMENU
RETURN
MEMORY

LIVE/CLUB
2

PRG SELECT

ENHANCER SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT
6
7
8
HDMI OUT
0

SYSTEM MEMORY

POWER

PHONO

ZONE

STANDBY

MODE

V-AUX

VCR

MD
CD-R

MACRO

POWER

AMP
SOURCE

SETUP

MULTI

DVR

PLAY INFO
DISPLAY

SUBMENU
RETURN
MEMORY

REC

SELECT

POWER

USB
NET

DVD

SIRIUS

CBL
SAT

BD
HD DVD

TUNER

VCR
USB
NET

AMP

DVR

SIRIUS

ZONE

SOURCE

CBL
SAT
TUNER

MODE

MD
CD-R

MACRO

DOCK

PHONO

DVD

SETUP

V-AUX

BD
HD DVD

SYSTEM MEMORY

CAT.
A-E

ENTER
MULTI

SELECT

VOLUME
MENU
SRCH MODE

PRESET/CH

STATUS
TITLE
BAND

POWER

STANDBY

VOLUME
MENU
SRCH MODE

CAT.
A-E

PLAY INFO
DISPLAY

POWER

PRESET/CH

ENTER

POWER

STATUS
TITLE
BAND

SUBMENU
RETURN

You can program remote control codes from other remote
controls. Use the learning feature if you want to program
functions not included in the basic operations covered by
the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control
code is not available. You can program the function of
other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas
in the following illustration. The buttons can be
programmed independently for each control area.

OK
y
When you want to program another function, repeat steps
4 through 6.

Remote control features

Press G SETUP again to exit from the setup
menu.

Edit the name of the control area.
To locate the position to edit, press 9l / h.
To select a character, press 9k / n.

Notes
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) on the remote
control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,
or when you press more than one button simultaneously.
• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.
However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may
appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this
case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room
for further learning (page 122).
• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:
– when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other
components are weak.
– when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.
– when the function to be programmed is continuous or
uncommon.

BD/HD
y
Press 9k to change the character in the following order,
or press 9n to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a to z,
0 to 9, space, symbols (–, +, /, :).

Press 9ENTER to set the new name.
“OK” appears in the display window (4) on the
remote control if renaming was successful.
y
When you want to rename the another control area, press
the input selector button (3) or 5SELECT l / h
repeatedly to select the desired control area and then press
9ENTER and then carry out the operations of steps 4
through 6.

Changing source names in the
display window
You can change the name of the control area (input
source) that appears in the display window (4) on the
remote control.

Note

Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window.

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “RNAME”
and then press 9ENTER.

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select 3-letter
name or 5-lettered name you want to edit and
then press 9ENTER.
Each control area has both 3-letter name and 5-letter
name. You can rename the 3-letter name and 5-letter
name independently.
3-letter name

“ERROR” appears in the display window (4) on the remote
control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,
or when you press more than one button simultaneously.

5-letter name

BD/HD

119 En

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Set the operation mode selector to
FSOURCE and then press an input selector
button (3) to select the desired control area.

Press G SETUP again to exit from the setup
menu.

Remote control features

Macro programming features
The macro programming feature makes it possible to
perform a series of operations with the press of a single
button. For example, when you want to play a CD,
normally you would turn on the components, select the
CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The
macro programming feature lets you perform all of these
operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The
buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with
macro programs. You can also program your own macros
(page 121).

■ Recalling programmed macrooperations
STANDBY

POWER

V-AUX

PHONO

DOCK

DVD

MD
CD-R

POWER

MULTI
BD
HD DVD
CBL
SAT

DVR

VCR

TUNER

SIRIUS

USB
NET

Macro buttons

■ Default macro functions
Pressing
macro
button
STANDBY

To automatically transmit these
signals in order
First

Second

STANDBY

—

POWER

(*1)

MULTI

V-AUX

PHONO

DOCK

BD
HD DVD

DVD

AMP
TV
SOURCE
SELECT

SETUP

MACRO

MODE

ZONE

MACRO

SYSTEM MEMORY

Press HMACRO on the remote control.

MACRO
2

Press the desired macro button.
“M:the 3-letter name of the selected control area” (for
example, “M:DVD”) appears in the display window
(4), and this unit transmits the programmed
functions. When you press DSTANDBY or
EPOWER, “M:STB” or “M:PWR” appears in the
display window (4), and this unit transmits the
programmed functions.
Press HMACRO again to exit from the
macro-operation mode.

Notes
• While the remote control is running a macro program (the
transmission indicator flashes), it does not accept any other
operation.
• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro
is operating until the macro operation is complete.
• If you do not complete each of the operations within 30
seconds, this unit automatically exits from the macro-operation
mode.

120 En

MD
CD-R

POWER

MD
CD-R

CBL
SAT

DVR

VCR

TUNER

(*2)

SIRIUS

(*2)

USB
NET

*1 Set the appropriate remote control code for TV in advance
(page 116).
*2 This unit plays the last received station before the unit was set
in the standby mode.

Remote control features

■ Programming macro operations
You can program your own macro to transmit several
remote control commands in sequence at the press of a
button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or perform
learning operations before programming the macro.

Press the buttons for the functions you want
to include in the macro operation in
sequence.
Example
Set the input source to DVD → Turn on the DVD
player → Turn on the video monitor

Notes
• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is
programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again
when the programmed macro is cleared.
• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default
macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.
• We do not recommend that you program continuous operations
(for example, volume control) in a macro.

Step 1 (“MCR1”): Press DVD.
Step 2 (“MCR2”): Press AV POWER.
Step 3 (“MCR3”): Press TV POWER.

POWER

2
3

Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).

POWER

MULTI

V-AUX

PHONO

DOCK

BD
HD DVD

DVD

MD
CD-R

CBL
SAT

DVR

VCR

TUNER

SIRIUS

USB
NET

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “MACRO”
and then press 9ENTER.

MCR 1
M:DVD

Indicates the number of macro
steps entered

(Selected macro button)

Flashes alternately so you can set the
next step

DVD

(Selected control area)

Notes
• To change the selected input area, press 5 SELECT l / h.
Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step,
whereas 5 SELECT l / h only changes the selected input area.

• The position of the operation mode selector (AMP/TV/
SOURCE) affects the assigned function. When the
operation mode selector is set to FAMP or FTV, the
input source selectors do not function.

Press HMACRO to confirm the program.
You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you
have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote
control automatically exits from the macro
programming mode.

Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup
menu.

Note
“ERROR” appears in the display window (4) if you press more
than one button simultaneously.

121 En

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Press the desired macro button you want to
assign the macro program to and then press
9ENTER.
“M:the three-letter name of the selected macro
button” (for example, “M:DVD”) and the name of the
currently selected control area appears in the display
window (4) alternately.
When you press DSTANDBY or EPOWER,
“M:STB” or “M:PWR” and the name of the currently
selected control area appears in the display window
(4) alternately.

STANDBY

Remote control features

Clearing configurations

You can clear all changes made in each function set, such
as learned functions, macros, renamed control area names
and setup remote control ID.

■ Clearing function sets

Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “CLEAR”
and then press 9ENTER.

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired
clear mode.

Clear mode
L:DVD (etc.)

L:AMP

Notes
• “NG” appears in the display window (4) if clearing was
unsuccessful.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) if you press a
button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more
than one button simultaneously.

Sets all learned functions for controlling the
amplifier functions to the initial factory settings.
Set the operation mode selector to FAMP to
select this clear mode.

L:TV

Clears all learned functions for TV control area.
Set the operation mode selector to FTV to
select this clear mode.

L:ALL

Clears all learned functions.

M:DVD (etc.)

(M:Name of the selected macro button) Clears
the macro programmed for the selected macro
button (page 121). The assigned macro to the
selected macro button reverts to the initial
factory macro. Press the desired macro button if
you want to change the macro button you want to
clear the programmed functions of.

M:ALL

Clears all programmed macros. The assigned
macro to the selected macro button reverts to the
initial factory macro.

RNAME

Set all the name of the control areas to the
default settings.

FCTRY

Set all settings of the remote control to the initial
factory settings.

Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup
mode.

■ Clearing a learned function

Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).

Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “ERASE”
and then press 9ENTER.

Set the operation mode selector to
F SOURCE and then press an input selector
button (3).
If you want to erase the function learned in the AMP
or TV control area, set the operation mode selector to
FAMP or F TV.

Press 9ENTER.
“E-KEY” appears in the display window (4).

Press and hold the button you want to clear
for about 3 seconds.
If clearing is successful, “OK” appears in the display
window (4).

Descriptions
(L:Three-digit name of the selected control area)
Clears all learned functions the respective
control area. You can change the control area to
be cleared by pressing the desired input selector
button (3) or 5SELECT l / h repeatedly.

Press and hold 9ENTER for about 3
seconds.
When the clearing is successful, “OK” appears in the
display window (4).

y
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 3 through 5.
• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the
factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have
set remote control codes).

Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup
menu.

Notes
• “NG” appears in the display window (4) on the remote control
if clearing was unsuccessful.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) if you press more
than one button simultaneously.

122 En

Remote control features

Simplified remote control
Use the supplied simplified remote control to make basic controls of this unit.
STANDBY
Sets the selected zone to the
standby mode.
☞ P. 31, 127

SYSTEM MEMORY
Save or recall the system
settings.
☞ P. 108

STANDBY

POWER

POWER
Turn on the power.
☞ P. 31, 127

SYSTEM MEMORY
1

INPUTl / h
Select the input source.
☞ P. 42

INPUT

VOLUME
STATUS

VOLUME +/–
Adjust the volume level.
☞ P. 42

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

SUBMENU

MUTE

MUTE
Mutes the audio output.
☞ P. 44
Remove the insulation sheet before using the remote
control.

■ Setting the controlling zone of the
simplified remote control

Change the battery when the operation range of the
simplified remote control decreases.

Use this feature to set the controlling zone (page 127) and
remote control ID (page 130) of the simplified remote
control.
Setting the remote control ID
• ID1: Press and hold l (left cursor) and 1 for 3
seconds.
• ID2: Press and hold l (left cursor) and 2 for 3
seconds.
Setting the controlling zone
• Main zone: Press and hold h (right cursor) and 1 for 3
seconds.
• Zone 2: Press and hold h (right cursor) and 2 for 3
seconds.
• Zone 3: Press and hold h (right cursor) and 3 for 3
seconds.
• Zone 4: Press and hold h (right cursor) and 4 for 3
seconds.

■ Replacing the battery in the simplified
remote control

Use a straight
pin to remove
the cover.

Replace the
battery with a
new CR2025
battery.

Close the
cover.

Notes
• Insert the battery according to the polarity markings
(+ and –).
• If the batteries run out, immediately remove them from the
simplified remote control to prevent an explosion or acid leak.
• If a battery starts leaking, dispose of it immediately. Be careful
not to let the leaking battery acid touch your skin or clothing.
• Before inserting new batteries, wipe the compartment clean.
• Dispose of batteries according to your regional regulations.

123 En

ADVANCED
OPERATION

These buttons function as
well as the following
identical buttons on the
main remote control (when
the operation selector mode
is set to FAMP).
8STATUS
9k / n / l / h
9ENTER
0RETURN, SUBMENU
IMENU
KDISPLAY

Using multi-zone configuration
This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The multi-zone configuration feature enables you to set this
unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone, second zone (Zone 2), third zone (Zone 3) and fourth zone
(Zone 4). You can control this unit from the second, third or fourth zone using the supplied remote control.

Connecting the Zone 2, Zone 3 and Zone 4 components
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in the second zone, third zone and/or fourth zone.
• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the
infrared signal receiver in the second zone, third zone and/or fourth zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the
main zone.
• An amplifier and speakers in the second zone, third zone and/or fourth zone.
• A video monitor for the second room.
y
Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone connections that best meet your requirements.

■ Using external amplifiers
Connect the external amplifiers in the second zone and third zone to the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2/ZONE 3) jacks with
analog cables and connect the external amplifier in the fourth zone to the OPTICAL (ZONE 4) jack with the optical
digital audio cable.
y
You can also connect the external amplifier (with volume control) in the fourth zone to the analog ZONE 4 OUT jacks with an audio
cable.

Only analog signals are sent to the second, third and fourth (analog ZONE 4 OUT) zones. Any source you want to
listen to in these zones must be connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
y
When this unit is in the party mode (page 129), audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks or DIGITAL INPUT jacks are output at the
ZONE OUT (ZONE 2/ZONE 3) and OPTICAL (ZONE 4) jacks.

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

This unit

ZONE OUT
DIGITAL OUTPUT

OPTICAL
ZONE 4

Audio in

Amplifier
(Zone 2)

124 En

Audio in

Amplifier
(Zone 3)

Optical in

Amplifier
(with volume control)
(Zone 4)

Using multi-zone configuration

Notes
• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT use the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
• Adjust the second zone and/or third zone volume by using the amplifier in each zone when “Zone2 Volume” or “Zone3 Volume” is set
to “Fixed” (page 103).

■ Using the internal amplifiers of this unit
Important safety notice
The speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than
one loudspeaker per channel.
Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low
impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.
Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This
information is found on the back panel of your Receiver.
If you want to use one internal amplifier (SP1 or SP2) of this unit
Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals.
If you want to use two internal amplifiers (SP1 and SP2) of this unit
Connect the Zone 2 and Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 and SP2 speaker terminals.

PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3
L
SP1
R

ZONE 2/ZONE 3
SP2

Speakers
(Zone 3)
This unit

■ Connecting zone video monitors
Connect the video monitor(s) in Zone 2, Zone 3 and/or Zone 4 to the ZONE VIDEO and/or COMPONENT VIDEO
(MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT) jacks. If you connect the multiple zone video monitors to these jacks, the video monitors
play back the same source simultaneously.
y
To assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT) jacks to the main zone or another zone, configure the
“Component Assign” setting (page 103).
Source component
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

ZONE
VIDEO

This unit
PR

Video In

Video monitor
(Zone 2)

Video In

Video monitor
(Zone 3)

Component
video in

Video monitor
(Zone 4)

125 En

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Speakers
(Zone 2)

Using multi-zone configuration

■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks for multi-zone components
This unit is equipped with two REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks. You can use these jacks to control this unit and
other components from Zone 2, Zone 3 or Zone 4. The following diagram shows an example of the connections.
This unit
Remote control
signal out

REMOTE

OUT

External amplifier

DVD player (etc.)

Remote control
signal in

CD player (etc.)

Remote control
signal in

Remote control
(Zone 2)

Remote control
signal out

Remote
control
Infrared signal
receiver
(Zone 3)

y
Some Yamaha models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use
an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown below.
REMOTE

REMOTE

Infrared signal
receiver

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

Yamaha
component

This unit

REMOTE

OUT

Yamaha
component

■ Using TRIGGER OUT jacks for multi-zone components
This unit is equipped with two TRIGGER OUT jacks. You can turn on and off the component corresponding to the
selection of the input source of the desired zone or turning on and off the desired zone by configuring the “Trigger
Output” settings (page 107).
This unit

Trigger in

Trigger in
1

TRIGGER OUT

Projector (etc.) in the
main zone

126 En

Power amplifier (etc.)
Zone 2 (etc.)

Using multi-zone configuration

After the connections, turn on this unit and set the
speaker terminal assignments with “Zone SP Assign”
(page 103).

Remote control operations

Controlling Zone 2, Zone 3 or Zone 4

Press H ZONE repeatedly to select the zone
you want to control.
“MAIN”, “ZONE2”, “ZONE3” or “ZONE4”
indicator appears in the display window (D) on the
remote control.

You can select the zone you want to control by using the
control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control.
Note

Press O ZONE 2, O ZONE 3 or O ZONE 4
on the front panel to turn on or off each zone.

Press O ZONE CONTROLS on the front
panel repeatedly to select the zone you want
to control.

ZONE 4
(Zone 4)

(Main zone)

Press EPOWER to turn on the selected
zone.

Perform the desired operation in the selected
zone (page 127).

Front panel operations

ZONE 3
(Zone 3)

MAIN

While Zone 4 is turned on, no signal is output at the DVR OUT,
VCR OUT and MD/CD-R OUT jacks.

■ Basic operation

ZONE 2
(Zone 2)

ZONE2

ZONE3

ZONE4

No indicator flashes
when the main zone is selected.

ZONE2
Controls the Zone 2 amplifier or tuner functions.
ZONE3
Controls the Zone 3 amplifier or tuner functions.

Rotate the LINPUT selector (or set the
operation mode selector to FAMP and then
press one of the input selector buttons (3)).
• Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the FM/AM
tuning features (page 56) in the selected zone.
• Select “XM” as the input source to use the XM
Satellite Radio features (page 61) in the selected zone.
• Select “SIRIUS” as the input source to use the SIRIUS
Satellite Radio features (page 65) in the selected zone.
• Select “DOCK” as the input source to use the iPod
features (page 73) or Bluetooth features (page 71) in
the selected zone.
• Select “USB/NET” as the input source to use the USB
features (page 76) or network features (page 76) in the
selected zone.

ZONE4
Controls the Zone 4 amplifier and tuner functions

Note

■ Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or
Zone 3

You must complete this step within 10 seconds while the
selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise,
the currently selected zone mode is automatically
canceled.

■ Selecting the input source of Zone 2,
Zone 3 or Zone 4

Perform the desired operation in the selected
zone (page 127).

The input sources are shared across all zones.

Rotate P VOLUME (or press J VOLUME +/–).
y
Press L MUTE on the remote control to mute the sound output
to the selected zone.

y
To turn off the desired zone, press OZONE2, OZONE3
or OZONE4 again.

127 En

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Each time you press O ZONE CONTROLS, the
front panel display changes as shown below, and the
indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for
approximately 10 seconds. However, no indicator
flashes when the main zone is selected.

To turn off the desired zone, press DSTANDBY.

Using multi-zone configuration

Notes
• When you use the external amplifiers in Zone 2 or Zone 3,
J VOLUME +/– can be used only when “Zone2 Volume” or
“Zone3 Volume” is set to “Variable” (page 103).
• You cannot adjust the volume level of Zone 4 with the controls
on this unit. Use controls on the Zone 4 component to adjust it.

■ Adjusting the front speaker balance of
Zone 2 or Zone 3
Press DTONE CONTROL repeatedly to select
“BALANCE” and then rotate the MPROGRAM
selector for adjustment.

■ Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or
Zone 3
Note
You cannot adjust the front speaker balance of Zone 4 with the
controls on this unit. Use controls on the Zone 4 component to
adjust it.

Press DTONE CONTROL repeatedly to select
the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the
low-frequency response (BASS) and then rotate
the MPROGRAM selector for adjustment.
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

■ Setting the sleep timer for Zone 2, Zone
3 or Zone 4
Use this feature to turn of the desired zone after a certain
amount of time.
Set the operation mode to FAMP and then press
CSLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time.
The sleep timer setting changes as shown below.
120min.
OFF

90min.
30min.

60min.

■ Using the zone OSD
You can display the FM/AM radio, XM Satellite Radio
(U.S.A. and Canada models only), or HD Radio
information (U.S.A. model only) in the video monitor
connected to the ZONE VIDEO jacks. You can also
browse music contents (such as iPod contents) by using
the zone OSD.

Set the operation mode selector to FAMP
and then press the desired input selector
button (3).

Press KDISPLAY to display the menu
screen on the zone OSD.

128 En

Use 9k / n / l / h and 9ENTER to
navigate the menu on the zone OSD.
Notes
• The menu displayed in the zone OSD appears in English
even if Japanese or Russian is selected.
• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the
front panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those
characters are replaced with underscores “_”.

y
• You can select the zone(s) of which the operational status
is displayed (page 104).
• You can operate the zone OSD in the same way as GUI
operations.

Using multi-zone configuration

Using the party mode
Use this feature to play main zone sources in other zones
simultaneously. This feature is useful when you want to
play back main sources as background music in a home
party, etc.
y
You can select the zones covered by the party mode with “Party
Mode Set” (page 103).

MAIN ZONE
MASTER

PURE DIRECT

ON/OFF

OFF

INPUT

STRAIGHT

TUNING MODE

MEMORY

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

DISPLAY

MAN'L/AUTO

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

ZONE
CONTROLS

REC OUT/
ZONE 2

PROGRAM

VOLUME

EDIT

SPEAKERS
AUDIO SELECT

EFFECT

ZONE ON/OFF

TONE CONTROL

MULTI
ZONE
ZONE 2
SILENT CINEMA

PHONES

YPAO

OPTIMIZER
MIC

S VIDEO

ZONE 3
VIDEO

ZONE 4
L

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

PUSH ENTER

OPTICAL

HDMI IN

USB

1 2
4 3

ADVANCED
OPERATION

1,2,3 ··· In the party mode, this unit distributes the same
sources to the zones which join the party mode.
4 ··· You can also operate the specific zone
separately when this unit is in the party mode.
Set the operation mode selector on the remote
control to FAMP and then press CPARTY to
turn on or off the party mode.
“PARTY MODE ON” or “PARTY MODE OFF” appears
in the front panel display and GUI screen.
While this unit is in the party mode, the corresponding
zone indicators turn on in the front panel display.
y
Input audio signals are mixed down to monaural and output at
the analog ZONE OUT (ZONE 2/ZONE 3) jacks.

Notes
• When this unit is in the party mode, audio signals input at the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks cannot be output.
• When this unit is in the party mode, no signal is output at the
DVR OUT, VCR OUT and MD/CD-R OUT jacks.
• When this unit is in the party mode, only the analog audio
signals (same type as the signal input at the main zone) can be
output at the analog ZONE 4 OUT jacks.

129 En

Advanced setup
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional
operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each
parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.
Notes
• Only B MASTER ON/OFF, N STRAIGHT and the M PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup
menu.
• All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.

Using the advanced setup menu
1

Press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front
panel to release it outward to the OFF
position to turn off this unit.
Press and hold N STRAIGHT and then
press B MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON
position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and “ADVANCED SETUP”
appears in the front panel display.

■ Remote sensor REMOTE SENSOR
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor on the
front panel of this unit.
Choice

Descriptions

Select this setting if you want to activate the
signal-receiving capability of the remote control
sensor.

OFF

Select this setting if you want to deactivate the
signal-receiving capability of the remote control
sensor.

Note
STRAIGHT

While holding
down

MASTER

EFFECT

3
4
5

Rotate the MPROGRAM selector to select
the parameter you want to adjust.
Press N STRAIGHT repeatedly to change
the selected parameter setting.
Press B MASTER ON/OFF to release it
outward to the OFF position to save the new
setting and turn off this unit.

y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this
unit.

■ Speaker impedance SPEAKER IMP.
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit
so that it matches that of your speakers.
Choice

■ Wake on RS-232C access
RS232C STANDBY
Use this feature to set this unit to transmit data via the RS232C interface when this unit is in the standby mode.
Choice

Select this setting to set the speaker impedance to
8 Ω. The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω
or higher.

6ΩMIN

Select this setting to set the speaker impedance to
6 Ω. The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω
or higher (front speakers only: 4 Ω or higher).

Functions

YES

Select this setting to set this unit to transmit data
via the RS-232C interface.

Select this setting to set this unit not to transmit
data via the RS-232C interface.

Initial setting:
[U.S.A. and Canada models]: YES
[Australia model]: NO

■ Remote control ID setting
REMOTE CON AMP
Use this feature to set the remote control ID of this unit for
remote control recognition.
Choice

Descriptions

ID1

Select this setting when the ID of the remote
control is set to “ID1”

ID2

Select this setting when the ID of the remote
control is set to “ID2”

Descriptions

8ΩMIN

130 En

We recommend setting the parameter to “ON” in most cases.

Setting remote control ID
Use this feature to set the remote control ID. This feature
is useful when you control multiple Yamaha AV receiver
or amplifier with using the remote control.

Advanced setup

Press GID repeatedly using a ballpoint pen or
similar object on the remote control to select the
desired remote control ID.
Each time you press GID, the remote control ID indicator
changes as shown below.

ID1

■ Recovery and backup of the system
settings RECOV./BACKUP
Use this feature to save and restore the settings of this unit.
Choice
RECOVERY

Restoring the saved setting of this unit.

BACKUP

Saves the current settings of this unit.

CANCEL

Cancels the recovery or backup of the settings of
this unit.

ID2
y
To set the remote control ID of the simplified remote control,
see page 123 for details.

■ SIRIUS Satellite Radio Parental Lock
code number reset SIRIUS PIN
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Use this feature to set the code number for the SIRIUS
Satellite Radio Parental Lock feature to the initial factory
setting.

Descriptions

Notes
• This unit does not save the FM/AM preset stations, preset USB/
network items, and system memory settings.
• If no settings are saved, you cannot select “RECOVERY”.

■ Parameter initialization INITIALIZE
Use this feature to reset the parameters of this unit to the
initial factory settings. You can select the category of
parameters to be initialized.
Choice

Descriptions

DSP
PARAM

Select this setting to initialize all the parameters of
the sound field parameters (page 85).

RESET

Sets the code number to the initial factory setting.

VIDEO

CANCEL

Cancels the reset of the code number.

Select this setting to initialize all the parameters in
“Video” and “Display Set” (except “Short
Message” and “Playback Screen”).

NETWORK

Select this setting to initialize all the parameters in
“Network” and MusicCAST information stored in
this unit.

ALL

Select this setting to initialize all the parameters of
this unit.

CANCEL

Select this setting to cancel the initialization
procedure.

■ Bi-amplifier mode BI-AMP
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the bi-amplifier
function.
Choice

Descriptions

Select this setting if you want to activate the biamplifier function.

OFF

Select this setting if you want to deactivate the biamplifier function.

Note
When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, the SURROUND BACK
terminals cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in
that the terminals are already used for the bi-amplifier
connection (page 19) and the presence speaker output is
disabled.

■ Pre-amplifier mode PREAMP MODE
Use this feature to select whether you use this unit as the
preamplifier in the main zone.
Choice

Descriptions

Select this setting when you use this unit as the
preamplifier in the main zone. The audio signals
for the main zone are only output at the PRE OUT
jacks of this unit.

OFF

Select this setting to use the internal amplifiers of
this unit for the main zone.

y
To initialize the parameters of each sound field program, use
“Initialize” in “Stereo/Surround” (page 89).

■ MAC address filter

MAC FILTER
Use this feature to filter the access to this unit via LAN to
control this unit by the MAC address of the accessing PC
(page 112).
Choice

Descriptions

Only allows to accept the access from the PC
whose MAC address is registered to this unit.

OFF

Allows to accept the access from any PC.

y
You can register the MAC address that is allowed to access
when “MAC FILTER” is set to “ON” by using the Web browser
(page 112).

y
This setting does not affect the amplifier assignments for the
other zones (SP1 and SP2).

131 En

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Descriptions

Choice

Advanced setup

■ TV format TV FORMAT
Use this feature to set the color encoding format of your
television.
Choices: NTSC, PAL
Initial setting:
[U.S.A. and Canada models]: NTSC
[Australia model]: PAL
■ HDMI monitor check

MONITOR CHECK
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the monitor check
function of this unit.
Choice
YES

SKIP

Descriptions
This unit receives the information of the available
video signal resolutions from the video monitor
connected via HDMI and you can only select the
resolutions supported by the video monitor in
“Resolution” (page 100).
You can select any resolution in “Resolution”
(page 100).

■ Language

LANGUAGE
Use this feature to select the language of your choice that
appears in the GUI (graphical user interface) menu, OSD
display in the zone monitor and the messages that appear
in the front panel display.
Choices: ENGLISH (English), JAPANESE (Japanese),
FRENCH (French), GERMAN (German),
SPANISH (Spanish), RUSSIAN (Russian)
y
You can also select the display language with the GUI menu
(page 107).
LANGUAGE

GUI menu

Front panel
display

RUSSIAN
JAPANESE

Zone OSD
—

—

Other
languages
··· The selected language is displayed.
— ··· The selected language is not displayed. The menu
items and messages are displayed in English.

132 En

■ Firmware update FIRM UPDATE
Use this feature to update the firmware of this unit. For
details on how to update the firmware, refer to information
supplied with updates.
Choice

Descriptions

USB

Updates the firmware of this unit using a USB
memory.

NETWORK

Updates the firmware of this unit via network.

y
To start updating the firmware, rotate the MPROGRAM
selector to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and then press
DMENU.

Notes
• Do not use this feature unless you need to update the firmware.
• Be sure to read information supplied with updates before
performing firmware updates.

■ Firmware version VERSION
Use this feature to check the version of the firmware
currently installed on this unit.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.

■ General
Problem
This unit fails to turn
on or enters the
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.

No sound.

Cause

Remedy

See
page

The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.

Connect the power cable firmly.

—

The speaker impedance setting is
incorrect.

Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.

The protection circuitry has been
activated.

Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire
for each connection does not touch anything other
than its respective connection.

This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
or strong static electricity).

Turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, plug it
back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally.

—

Incorrect input or output cable
connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.

23-29

Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”,
“COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”.

Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO”.

Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG” while the input source
component outputs digital audio signals.

Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO” or
“COAX/OPT”.

No appropriate input source has been
selected.

Select an appropriate input source with the L INPUT
selector (or the input selector buttons (3)).

Speaker connections are not secure.

Secure the connections.

The volume is turned down or muted.

Turn up the volume.

—

Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being input from a source component,
such as a CD-ROM.

Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this
unit.

—

The HDMI components connected to this
unit do not support the HDCP copy
protection standards.

Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP
copy protection standards.

42, 43

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION

133 En

Troubleshooting

Problem
No picture.

Cause

Remedy

See
page

Your video monitor is connected to one of
the analog video output jacks of this unit
and the picture is input at different types
of video jacks.

Set “Analog ` Analog” to “Conversion” or connect
your source components in the same way as you
connect your video monitor to this unit.

1080p-resolution analog video signals are
only output at the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT jacks.

Connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR jacks.

480p-, 576p-, 1080i- and 720p-resolution
video signals cannot be output at the S
VIDEO and VIDEO MONITOR OUT
jacks.

Connect your video monitor to the HDMI OUT or
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.

—

This unit outputs the video signals not
supported by the video monitor connected
to the HDMI OUT jack.

Select “VIDEO” in “INITIALIZE” to reset the video
parameters.

131

Set “MONITOR CHECK” to “YES”.

132

PURE DIRECT mode is active.

Turn off the PURE DIRECT mode.

Set “Pure Direct” to “Audio + Video”.

105

Non-standard video signals are input.
Short message
displays do not
appear on the video
monitor.

“Short Message” is set to “Off”.

Set “Short Message” to “On”.

The sound suddenly
goes off.

The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.

Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.

31, 130

Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.

—

The sleep timer has turned off this unit.

Turn on this unit, and play the source again.

—

Sound is heard from
the speaker on one
side only.

Incorrect cable connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.

The speaker level settings are incorrect.

Adjust “Level” settings.

Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.

When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.

No sound is heard
from the center
speaker.

“Center” in “Configuration” is set to
“None”.

Set “Center” to “Small” or “Large”.

No sound is heard
from the presence
speakers.

This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode.

Press N STRAIGHT to turn off the “STRAIGHT”
mode.

You are using a source or program
combination that does not output sound
from all channels.

Try another sound field program.

“Surround” in “Configuration” is set to
“None”.

Set “Surround” to “Small” or “Large”.

This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode
and a monaural source is being played
back.

Press N STRAIGHT to turn off the “STRAIGHT”
mode.

The surround speakers are connected to
the SURROUND BACK speaker
terminals.

Connect the surround speakers to the SURROUND
speaker terminals.

No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.

134 En

Troubleshooting

Problem
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.

Cause

Remedy

See
page

“Bass Out” in “Configuration” is set to
“Front” when a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being played.

Set “Bass Out” to “SWFR” or “Front + SWFR”.

“Bass Out” in “Configuration” is set to
“SWFR” or “Front” when a 2-channel
source is being played.

Set “Bass Out” to “Front + SWFR”.

The source does not contain lowfrequency signals.
No sound is heard
from the surround
back speakers.

“Surround Back” in “Configuration” is set
to “None”.

The audio input
sources cannot be
played in the desired
digital audio signal
format (Desired input
source indicator or
decoder indicator in
the front panel
display does not light
up).

The connected component is not set to
output the desired digital audio signals.

Make an appropriate setting following the operating
instructions for your component.

—

Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG”.

Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO”.

A humming sound is
heard.

Incorrect cable connections.

Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.

—

No connection from the turntable to the
GND terminal.

Connect the grounding cable of the turntable to the
GND terminal of this unit.

The volume level is
low while a record is
being played.

The record is being played on a turntable
with an MC cartridge.

Connect your turntable to this unit through an MChead amplifier.

The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.

The component connected to the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned
off.

Turn on the power of the component.

—

A source cannot be
recorded by the
recording component.

The audio source connected to the MULTI
CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be
recorded.
A given input source is not output at the
same output channel (e.g. DVR IN to
DVR OUT).

Connect the recording component to another channel
that is not being used for connecting the source
component.

While “Zone 4” is set to “ON”, no signal
is output at the analog AUDIO OUT
(DVR, VCR, MD/CD-R) and OPTICAL
(MD/CD-R) jacks.

Set “Zone 4” to “OFF”.

127

You are trying to record a DTS source.
(DTS signal is a digital bitstream.
Attempting to record the DTS bitstream
digitally will result in noise being
recorded.)

Make a setting so that the analog signal will be output
from your DTS-compatible player and then connect
the DTS-compatible player to the AUDIO IN jacks
while the recording component is connected to the
analog AUDIO OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/CD-R)
jacks.

Check whether “Surround” is set to “Small” or
“Large” and configure “Surround Back” properly.

93, 93

While this unit is in the CINEMA DSP 3D
mode, no sound is output at the surround
back speakers.

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION

135 En

Troubleshooting

See
page

Problem

Cause

Remedy

An audio source
cannot be recorded by
the digital recording
component connected
to the DIGITAL
OUTPUT jacks.

The audio source component is not
connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks.

Connect the audio source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks.

You are trying to record an audio source
input at the DOCK terminal by the digital
recording component connected to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.

Connect the recording component to the analog
AUDIO OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/CD-R) jacks.

(U.S.A. model only)
HD Radio signals are not output at the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks

Connect the recording component to the analog
AUDIO OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/CD-R) jacks.

An audio source
cannot be recorded by
the analog recording
component connected
to the analog AUDIO
OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/
CD-R) jacks.

The audio source component is not
connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks.

Connect the audio source component to the AUDIO
IN jacks.

Recorded materials
sound differently.

The settings made on this unit (such as
tonal quality, volume level and sound field
programs) do not affect recorded material.

The sound field
parameters and some
other settings of this
unit cannot be
changed.

“Memory Guard” is set to “On”.

Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”.

105

This unit does not
operate properly.

The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

—

“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.

Speaker cables are short-circuited.

Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.

There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency equipment.

This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment.

Move this unit further away from such equipment.

—

The picture is
disturbed.

The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.

This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.

The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.

Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.

—

136 En

Some components cannot records Dolby
Digital or DTS sources.

XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS Satellite
Radio signals are not output at the analog
AUDIO OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/CD-R)
jacks.

Troubleshooting

■ HDMI
Problem
No picture or sound.

Cause

Remedy

See
page

The number of the connected HDMI
components is over the limit.

Reduce the number of the connected HDMI
components.

—

HDCP authentication failed.

Check that the connected HDMI components support
the HDCP copy protection standards.

—

■ Tuner (FM/AM)
Problem

Cause

FM stereo reception is
noisy.

The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.

See
page

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.

There is multi-path interference.

Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multi-path interference.

—

The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.

The signal is too weak.

Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned into.

This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.

Preset the stations again.

The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.

The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for the best reception.

Use the manual tuning method.

There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.

Supplied AM loop antenna is not
connected.

Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even
if you use an outdoor antenna.

Noises can result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.

There are buzzing and
whining noises.

A TV set is being used nearby.

Move this unit away from the TV set.

—

Remedy

See
page

■ HD Radio (U.S.A. model only)
Problem

Cause

This unit cannot
receive the HD Radio
signals of the
selected radio
station.

The radio station provides analog FM/
AM radio service only.

Select other radio stations that provides the HD
Radio service.

The signal is too weak.

Adjust the antenna position.

—

Use a high-quality FM/AM antenna.

—

This unit cannot
select other audio
programs than the
main program.

The radio station provides an audio
program only.

HD Radio information
does not appear.

The radio station does not provide the
information.

137 En

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION

Remedy

Troubleshooting

■ iTunes Tagging (U.S.A. model only)
Status message

Cause

Insufficient Data

Tag data is not saved because of invalid
data.

Tag already saved

Tag data for the same content has been
already saved.

Tag storage full
Connect iPod

Remedy

See
page

The HD Radio station currently selected does not
support the iTunes Tagging feature.

—

Tag data cannot be stored because the
internal memory of this unit is full.

Station your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock
connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit.

iPod full
Tags cannot be
stored

Tag data cannot be stored on your iPod
because the HDD space of your iPod is
full.

Delete unnecessary data from your iPod to make
room and try again.

—

Transferring Failed

Tag data cannot be transferred to your
iPod.

Check if the Yamaha iPod universal dock is
connected to the DOCK terminal properly. Restation your iPod and try again.

138 En

Troubleshooting

■

XM Satellite Radio

If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel
display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.
Status message

Cause

Remedy

See
page

The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed in
the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the
XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock is not
connected to this unit.

Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the
dock and check the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock
cable is connected to this unit.

CHECK ANTENNA

The XM antenna is not connected to the
XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM
antenna cable has become damaged.

Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to
the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock and check the
antenna cable for damage. Replace the XM antenna
if the cable is damaged.

The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or
program information from the XM
satellite signal. This message can also
occur in weak XM signal conditions.
Note that this unit may not respond to
some operations while this message is
displayed.

This message should disappear in a few seconds in
good signal conditions. If you see this message often,
reposition the XM antenna to get better signal
reception. Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information
in the front panel display or “XM Information”
screen in the video monitor to check the antenna
reception level.

NO SIGNAL

The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the
XM satellite signal. Something may be
blocking the XM antenna’s view of the
satellites or the antenna is not properly
aimed.

Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the
XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the
“ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel
display or “XM Information” screen in the video
monitor to check the antenna reception level. See
instructions supplied with the XM Mini-Tuner and
Dock for antenna installation information.

CH OFF AIR

The XM channel you selected is not
currently broadcasting.

Check back at a later time; in the meantime, select
another channel.

—

CH UNAUTH

You may be attempting to tune to an XM
channel that is blocked or that you cannot
receive with your XM subscription
package.

Consult the latest channel guide at
http://www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and
http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian residents) for the
current list of channels. For information on receiving
this channel, visit http://www.xmradio.com/ (US
residents) and http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian
residents) or contact XM Satellite Radio at
1-800-967-2346 (US residents) and 1-877-438-9677
(Canadian residents).

CH UNAVAIL

The selected channel is not available. The
channel may have been reassigned to a
different channel number. This message
may occur initially with a new XM MiniTuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not
received XM’s signal for an extended
period.

Consult the latest channel guide at
http://www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and
http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian residents) for the
current list of channels. For cases of a new XM MiniTuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not received
XM’s signal for an extended period, allow the XM
Mini-Tuner to receive the XM satellite signal for at
least 5 minutes and then try to select the channel
again.

—

UPGRADE XM
TUNER

The connected XM Mini-Tuner is
incompatible with this unit.

Use the XM Mini-Tuner compatible with the XM
Rev 4x.

—

----

No artist name or song title is available
for this selection.

No action required.

—

139 En

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION

CHECK XM TUNER

Troubleshooting

■ SIRIUS Satellite Radio
If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel
display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.
Status message

Cause

Remedy

See
page

ANTENNA ERROR

The antenna is not connected to the
SiriusConnect tuner properly.

Check the connection of the antenna and
SiriusConnect tuner.

CHECK SR TUNER

The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected
to the SIRIUS jack of this unit correctly.

Check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and
this unit.

The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected
to the AC wall outlet.

Connect the power cable of the SiriusConnect tuner
to the AC wall outlet.

NOT SUPPORTED

This unit does not support the connected
SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner.

Connect the SiriusConnect tuner that this unit
supports.

ACQUIRING

The signal is too weak.

Adjust the orientation of the antenna of the
SiriusConnect tuner. Use the “ANTENNA INFO”
information in the front panel display or “SIRIUS
Information” screen in the video monitor to check
the antenna reception level.

UPDATING

The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the
channel list.

Wait until the updating is complete.

—

The period of the subscription is end.

Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to renew the
subscription.

F/W UPDATING

The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the
firmware.

Wait until the updating is complete.

—

CALL SIRIUS
(CALL 888-539SIRIUS TO
SUBSCRIBE)

The selected channel is not subscribed.

Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to subscribe the
selected channel.
URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/
Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)

Select another channel.

SUB UPDATED

The subscription information is updated.

INVALID

The selected channel is currently out of
service.

Not Available

The operation you made is not available.

140 En

Troubleshooting

■ Remote control
Problem
The remote control
does not work or
function properly.

Remedy

See
page

Wrong distance or angle.

The remote control will function within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.

Reposition this unit.

—

The batteries are weak.

Replace all batteries.

The batteries do not last long and get
quickly exhausted.

Using alkaline batteries is strongly recommended.

—

Set the backlight mode to “OFF”.

116

The operation mode selector is set
incorrectly.

Set the operation mode selector correctly. When
operating this unit, set it to the FAMP position.
When operating the component selected by the input
selector button, set it to the F SOURCE position.
When operating the TV set in the 3 TV area, set it to
the F TV position.

—

The control zone setting is incorrect.

Select the zone you want to control.

127

The remote control code is not correctly
set.

Set the remote control code correctly using
“List of remote control codes” in “Appendix”
(separate booklet).

116

Try setting another code of the same manufacturer
using “List of remote control codes” in “Appendix”
(separate booklet).

116

123, 130

The remote control ID of the remote
control and this unit do not match.

Match the remote control ID of this unit and the
remote control.

Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.

Program the necessary functions independently into
the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.

The batteries of this remote control and/or
the other remote control are too weak.

Replace the batteries.

The distance between the two remote
controls is too much or too little.

Place the remote controls at the proper distance.

118

The signal coding or modulation of the
other remote control is not compatible
with this remote control.

Learning is not possible.

—

Memory capacity is full.

Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for
the new functions.

122

118

141 En

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION

The remote control
does not learn new
functions.

Cause

Troubleshooting

■ USB and Network
Problem

Cause

Remedy

See
page

“No Device” is
displayed even when
a USB device is
present.

This unit recognized the USB storage
device as an illegal device.

Turn this unit off then on again.

The music files and
directories in the USB
device cannot be
viewed.

The music files and directories are placed
in locations other than the FAT area.

Place music files and directories in the FAT area.

—

You are attempting to browse directory
hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory
with more than 500 files.

Modify the data structure on your USB device.

—

The PC server/MCX2000/Internet Radio
does not function
properly.

The IP address is not set properly.

Set the DHCP server function of the router to ON.
Alternately, perform manual configuration according
to the current operating environment.

102

The network cable is not connected.

Connect it properly.

The music in the PC
server cannot be
played back.

The PC does not have Windows Media
Player 11 or Windows Media Connect 2.0
installed in it.

Install Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media
Connect 2.0 in the PC.

—

The music is recorded in a format that
cannot be played on this unit. This unit
cannot play music formats other than
WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WAV
(PCM format). Also note that it cannot
play certain music files even if these are
recorded in the WMA, MP3, MPEG-4
AAC, or WAV format.

Play music recorded in a format that this unit is
compatible with.

—

You are attempting to connect to MCX1000. The MusicCAST server that can be
connected by this unit is MCX-2000.

Use MCX-2000 or the PC server.

—

Auto Configuration is not executed.

Set your Yamaha MCX-2000 to the “Auto Config”
mode.

The firewall of the network device is
activated. The Internet Radio can be
played only when it passes through the
port designated by each radio station. The
port number is variable depending on
radio station.

Check the firewall setting of the network device.

—

Connection to the Internet is
disconnected.

Check the configuration of the network device, and
then contact the network connection provider.

—

This unit does not
recall the correct item
by using numeric
buttons (1-8).

The connected USB device is incorrect.

Connect the USB device that stores the preset item.

The directory that stores the selected item
is changed.

Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8)
again.

This unit does not
recall the selected
item by using numeric
buttons (1-8).

The USB device is not connected
correctly.

Connect the USB device properly.

The PC or MCX-2000 that stores the
selected item is turned off.

Turn on the PC or MCX-2000.

—

The selected Internet Radio station is
temporary unavailable or out of service.

Try again when the selected Internet Radio is
providing the service.

Preset other Internet Radio stations.

The MusicCAST
server cannot be
connected.

The Internet Radio
cannot be played.

142 En

Troubleshooting

Status message

Cause

Remedy

See
page

This unit is in the middle of waking up
MCX-2000 that has been set to the
standby mode.

Wait for approximately 20 seconds.

—

Connect error

There is a problem with the signal path
from your network to this unit.

Check the connection between this unit and the LAN
port on your router or hub.

Make sure your router is properly connected and
turned on. Also, make sure your modem is properly
connected and turned on when you are attempting to
listen to Internet Radio.

Your USB storage device or USB portable
audio player has been disconnected from
the USB port of this unit.

Check the connection between this unit and your
USB storage device or USB portable audio player.

—

The PC server or MCX-2000 previously
connected to this unit no longer exists.

Connect this unit to the available PC server or MCX2000.

There is a problem with the signal path
from your USB storage device or USB
portable audio player to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB storage
device or USB portable audio player to the USB port
of this unit.

Try resetting your USB storage device or USB
portable audio player.

—

This unit cannot access your USB storage
device or USB portable audio player.

Try another USB storage device or USB portable
audio player.

—

There is a problem with the signal path
from your USB storage device or USB
portable audio player to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB storage
device or USB portable audio player to the USB port
of this unit.

Try resetting your USB storage device or USB
portable audio player.

—

Make sure Windows Media Player 11 or Windows
Media Connect 2.0 is installed on your PC.

—

Check that the songs currently stored on your PC are
playable (MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, and WAV).

—

Store some other playable music files (MP3, WMA,
MPEG-4 AAC, and WAV) on your PC.

—

Try preparing a network exclusively for use with this
unit to separate it from general network traffic.

—

Disconnected

No Device

Access error

Unable to play

This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your PC.

The network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic, and playback is interrupted.

List updated

The list of the contents stored on your PC
server or MCX-2000 has been updated.

Bookmark ON

The desired Internet Radio station has
been added to the “Bookmarks” list.

Bookmark OFF

The stored Internet Radio station has been
removed from the “Bookmarks” list.

Empty Memory!

No items are assigned to the selected
numeric button.

Assign the desired item to the numeric button.

Not found!

This unit cannot find the assigned item for
the selected numeric button.

Connect the USB device that stores the preset item.

—

Turn on the PC or MCX-2000.

—

Try again when the selected Internet Radio is
providing the service.

Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8) again.

Turn off this unit and then disconnect the USB
device. If the message appears when you connect the
USB device again, this unit may not compatible with
the USB device.

—

USB Overloaded

Over current passes through the connected
USB device.

143 En

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION

Please wait
(Starting Server)

Troubleshooting

■ iPod
Note
In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the panel display or in the GUI screen, check the connection of
your iPod (page 27).

Status message
Loading...

Cause

Remedy

See
page

This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your iPod.
This unit is in the middle of acquiring
song lists from your iPod.

Connect error

There is a problem with the signal path
from your iPod to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod
universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Try resetting your iPod.

—

This unit supports iPod touch, iPod (Click Wheel,
including iPod classic), iPod nano and iPod mini.

—

Unknown iPod

The iPod being used is not supported by
this unit.

iPod Connected

Your iPod is properly stationed in a
Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as
YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit, and the
connection between your iPod and this
unit is complete.

iPod Disconnected

Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha
iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11,
sold separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit.

Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Unable to play

This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your iPod.

Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod
are playable.

—

Store some other playable music files on your iPod.

—

■ Bluetooth
Status message
Searching...

Cause
The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
and the Bluetooth component is in the
middle of the pairing.
The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
and the Bluetooth component is in the
middle of establishing the connection.

Completed

The pairing is completed.

Canceled

The pairing is canceled.

BT Connected

The connection between the Yamaha
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such
as YBA-10, sold separately) and the
Bluetooth component is established.

BT Disconnected

The Bluetooth component is
disconnected from the Yamaha Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10,
sold separately).

144 En

Remedy

See
page

Troubleshooting

■ Automatic setup
Before automatic setup
Error message

Cause

Remedy

See
page

Connect MIC!

Optimizer microphone is not connected.

Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.

Unplug Phones!

Headphones are connected.

Unplug the headphones.

—

Select Setup Item!

No check items are selected as the
measurement items.

Select the desired check items.

Memory Guard!

The parameters of this unit are protected.

Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”.

105

During automatic setup
Error message

Cause

Remedy

See
page

E01:No Front SP

Front L/R channel signals are not detected.

Check the front L/R speaker connections.

E02:No Sur. SP

A surround channel signal is not detected.

Check the surround speaker connections.

E03:No PRNS SP

A presence channel signal is not detected.

Check the presence speaker connections.

E04:SBR→SBL

Only right surround back channel signal is
detected.

Connect the surround back speaker to the
SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) speaker
terminal if you only have one surround
back speaker.

E05:Noisy

Background noise is too loud.

Perform the automatic setup in a quiet
environment.

—

Turn off noisy electric equipment like air
conditioners or move them away from the
optimizer microphone.

—

Surround back speakers are connected,
though surround L/R speakers are not.

Connect surround speakers when you use
surround back speakers.

E07:No MIC

The optimizer microphone was unplugged
during the “automatic setup” procedure.

Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.

E08:No Signal

The optimizer microphone does not detect
test tones.

Check the microphone setting.

Check the speaker connections and
placement.

The optimizer microphone or OPTIMIZER
MIC jack may be defective. Contact the
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center.

—

E09:User Cancel

The “automatic setup” procedure was
cancelled due to user activity.

Perform the automatic setup again.

E10:Internal Err.

An internal error occurred.

Perform the automatic setup again.

145 En

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION

E06:Check Sur.

Troubleshooting

After automatic setup
Warning message

Cause

Remedy

See
page

W1:Out of Phase

Speaker polarity is not correct. This
message may appear depending on the
speakers even when the speakers are
connected correctly.

Check the speaker connections for proper
polarity (+ or –).

W2:Over Distance

The distance between the speaker and the
listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).

Bring the speaker closer to the listening
position.

—

W3:Level Error

The difference of volume level among
speakers is excessive.

Readjust the speaker installation so that all
speakers are set in locations with similar
conditions.

—

Check the speaker connections.

Use speakers of similar quality.

—

Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer.

The result of “Wiring” checked by the
automatic setup is different from the
settings manually configured in
“Configuration”.

Manually configure the speaker settings in
“Configuration”.

“Wiring” has not been checked.

Manually configure the speaker settings in
“Configuration”.

W4:SP Mismatch

Notes
•
•
•
•

If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run perform the automatic setup again.
If warning message “W2” or “W3” appears, the adjustments are made, however the adjustment may not be optimal.
Depending on the speakers, warning message “W1” may appears even if the speaker connections are correct.
If error message “E10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center.

146 En

RESETTING THE SYSTEM

Resetting the system
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.
Notes
• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “GUI menu” parameters.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.

y
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position.

Press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front
panel to release it outward to the OFF
position to turn off this unit.

Press and hold N STRAIGHT and then
press B MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON
position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and “ADVANCED SETUP”
appears in the front panel display.

STRAIGHT

While holding
down

MASTER

EFFECT

Rotate the M PROGRAM selector to select
“INITIALIZE”.

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION

INITIALIZE
CANCEL

Press N STRAIGHT repeatedly to select
“ALL”.

INITIALIZE
ALL
y
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure
without making any changes.

Press A MASTER ON/OFF to release it
outward to the OFF position to confirm your
selection and turn off this unit.

147 En

OPERATION MODES OF FRONT PANEL CONTROLS

Operation modes of front panel controls
If you perform a mode trigger operation using the front panel controls, this unit enters the following mode. In each mode,
you can use the front panel controls as shown below. If no operation is performed for five seconds in each mode, this unit
automatically returns to the default mode.
Mode trigger button

Mode to enter

—

Default mode

Press CAUDIO SELECT/REC OUT

Audio select mode

Press and hold CAUDIO SELECT/REC OUT

Rec out mode

Press CMENU

GUI menu mode

Press CTONE CONTROL

Tone control/speaker level mode

Press and hold DENTER

BT pairing mode

Available operations in each mode
Mode

CAUDIO
SELECT/REC
OUT

CMENU

CTONE
CONTROL

DENTER

MPROGRAM
selector

Default

to Audio select mode

to GUI menu mode

to Tone control/
speaker level mode

—

Select a sound field
programs (page 46)

Audio select

to default mode

to GUI menu mode

to Tone control/
speaker level mode

—

Select an audio input
jack (page 43)

Rec out

to default mode

to GUI menu mode

to Tone control/
speaker level mode

—

Select a recording
source (page 55)

GUI menu

Left cursor

to default mode

Right cursor

Confirm the
selection in the GUI
menu (page 84)

Menu up/down

Tone control/
speaker level

to Audio select mode

to GUI menu mode

Select a parameter
for adjustment
(page 54)

Select a speaker for
level adjustment
(page 55)

Adjust parameters

—

to GUI menu mode
(the pairing process
continues)

to default mode (the
pairing process
continues)

Select a sound field
program

BT pairing*

—

Note
* In the BT pairing mode, this unit searches for Bluetooth components to be paired. This mode is available only when “DOCK” is
selected as an input source and a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) is connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit.

148 En

GLOSSARY

Glossary
■ Audio and video synchronization
(lip sync)
Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical
term that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining
audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and
transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires
complex end-user adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an
automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices
to perform this synchronization automatically and accurately
without user interaction.

■ Bi-amplification connection
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker.
One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker
while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter
section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a
restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each
amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely
to influence the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the
speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high pass
filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes frequencies below a
cutoff and rejects frequencies above the cutoff frequency.
Likewise, the HPF passes frequencies above its cutoff.

■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is
separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR
signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more
faithfully with this system because each of these signals is
independent. The component signal is also called the “color
difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted
from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is
required in order to output component signals.

With the composite video signal system, the video signal is
composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color,
brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a
video component transmits these three elements combined.

■ Deep Color
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays,
up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI
specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other
displays go from millions of colors to billions of colors and
eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions
and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio
can represent many times more shades of gray between black and
white. Also Deep Color increases the number of available colors
within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space.

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you
completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front
channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels,
Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an
additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low
Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is
counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the
surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum
volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise
sound orientation generated using digital sound processing
provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.

■ Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from
5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that
derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording.
For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie
sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and
“fly-around” effects.

■ Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed
for high-definition programming and media including HD
broadcasts, HD DVD, and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory
audio standard for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for
Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with
discrete channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps,
Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels
simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for
the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future,
Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate Dolby
Digital.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast
numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new
technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left
and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right
channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro
Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and
“Game mode” for game sources.

■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There
are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources,
“Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only)
and “Game mode” for game sources.

149 En

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION

■ Composite video signal

■ Dolby Digital

Glossary

■ Dolby Surround

■ DTS Express

Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to
reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and
right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural),
and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The
surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency
range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The
Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume
on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and
directionality.

DTS Express is an advanced audio technology for the optional
feature on Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD, which offers high-quality,
low bit rate audio optimized for network streaming, and Internet
applications. DTS Express is used for the Secondary Audio
feature of Blu-ray Disc or the Sub Audio feature of HD DVD.
These features deliver audio commentaries (for example, the
additional commentaries made by the director of a film) on
demand by the users via the Internet, etc. DTS Express signals are
mixed down with the main audio stream on the player
component, and the component sends the mixed audio stream to
the AV receivers/amplifiers via digital coaxial, digital optical, or
analog connections.

■ Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology
developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD
DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard
for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc,
this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the
studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up
to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.
Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc
players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby TrueHD
also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel
audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby
Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range
control.

■ DSD
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on
digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD,
signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency
sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and
oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence
with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high
sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that
offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs.

■ DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for
multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backwardcompatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz
sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24”
refers to 24-bit word length.
DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24
master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion
video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on
DVD video.

■ DTS Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound track, and
is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the
world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you
can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of
DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces
practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, front left
and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1
(subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit
incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel
reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing
5.1-channel format.

150 En

■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an high resolution audio
technology developed for high-definition disc-based media
including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional
audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this
technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from
the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 3.0 Mbps for HD DVD and 6.0 Mbps
for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up
to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.
Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc
players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing
multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital
Surround.

■ DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology
developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD
DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard
for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers
sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a
high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to
18.0 Mbps for HD DVD and up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc,
DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of
24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version
1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/
amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains
fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.

■ HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first
industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video
interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a
set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a
digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or highdefinition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a
single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and
supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to
accommodate future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video
interface that meets the security requirements of content
providers and system operators. For further information on
HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.

Glossary

■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency
range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is
counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range
compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels
in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

■ MP3
One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It
employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a
high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible
part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the
data quantity by about 1/11 (128 kbps) while maintaining a
similar audio quality to music CD.

■ MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. As it allows compression of data at a
bit rate lower than that of MPEG-2 AAC, it is used among others
for mobile telephones, portable audio players and other lowcapacity devices requiring high sound quality.
In addition to the above types of devices, MPEG-4 AAC is also
used to distribute contents on the Internet, and as such is
supported by computers, media servers and many other devices.

■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel
playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the
full-range channels with higher separation just like digital
discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.

■ Neural-THX Surround

■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio
signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any
compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and
DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the
size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for
“Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses
and then modulated for recording.

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the
signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency,
while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into
a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range
of rates that can be played back is determined based on the
sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound
level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In
principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range
of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number
of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be
reproduced.

■ SRS CS II (SRS Circle Surround II™)
SRS CS II (SRS Circle Surround II) is a high-performance
6.1 channel matrix surround sound decoding system. It is the
next-generation of the original SRS Circle Surround technology,
incorporating powerful industry-first features including the dialog
clarity enhancement technology and added cinema-like bass to
the front channels and subwoofer.

■ S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y
signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance
through the S-video cable. Using the
S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and
allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images.

■ WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of
recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. It
does not specify the compression (coding) method so a desired
compression method can be used with it. By default, it is
compatible with the PCM method (no compression) and some
compression methods including the ADPCM method.

■ WMA
An audio compression method developed by Microsoft
Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression method,
which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data
of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of
compressing the data quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while
maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD.

■ “x.v.Color”
A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a
more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression
of colors that could not be expressed before. While remaining
compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color”
expands the color space and can thus produce more vivid, natural
images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer
graphics.

151 En

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION

“Neural-THX” Surround is taking surround sound to the next
level. This revolutionary new technology delivers the rich
envelopment and discrete image detail of surround sound in a
format that is fully compatible with stereo. Neural-THX Surround
reduces the bandwidth needed for broadcasters to deliver true,
multi-channel surround presentations, and enables 7.1-channel
support for gaming and movies. By unmasking the audio details,
typically lost by other playback systems, audiences will
experience the deep ambience and subtle details of movies, music
and games. And with this technology being used by sound
designers during content creation, as well as embedded into
playback devices, Neural-THX Surround promises a listening
experience that is true to the original mix. Neural-THX Surround
has been chosen as the official surround sound broadcast format
for XM Satellite Radio’s “XM HD Surround”, as well as other
leading FM/HD radio stations worldwide. For additional
information, please visit http://www.neuralsurround.com/.

■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION

Sound field program information
■ Elements of a sound field

■ CINEMA DSP 3D

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable
us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size
and shape of the room in which we are sitting.
There are two distinct types of sound reflections that
combine to make up the sound field in addition to the
direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s
instrument.

The actually measured sound field data contain the
information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate
height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate
and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening
room.

Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms
to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface (for example, from the walls, and/or the ceiling) so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the
clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberations taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a
concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any
size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is
exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound field
processor.

■ CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for
acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP provides the audiovisual
experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your
own home by using the Yamaha original sound field
technology combined with various digital audio systems.

152 En

■ SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound field so that
accurate representations of all the sound field programs
can be enjoyed on headphones.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm
that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects
even without any surround speakers by using virtual
surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual
CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that
does not include a center speaker.

■ Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit
enhances your listening experience by regenerating the
missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result,
flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency
fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of lowfrequency bass is compensated, providing improved
performance of the overall sound system.

PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION

Parametric equalizer information
This unit employs Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic
Optimizer (YPAO) technology to optimize the frequency
characteristics of its parametric equalizer to match your
listening environment. YPAO uses a combination of the
following three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor)
to provide highly precise adjustment of the frequency
characteristics.

■ Q factor
The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as
the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the
values 0.5 and 10.

■ Frequency
This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave
increments between 32 Hz and 16 kHz.

■ Gain
This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB
between –20 and +6 dB.

YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your
listening requirements using a combination of the above
three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each
equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit
has 7 equalizer bands for each channel.
The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise
adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2).
This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as
in Figure 1).
Figure 1

Band 1
Frequency
Original frequency
characteristic

Figure 2
Gain
Frequency
characteristic after
correction

Band 1
Frequency

Band 2

Original frequency
characteristic

153 En

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION

Gain
Frequency
characteristic after
correction

SPECIFICATIONS

Specifications
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 140 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
Front L/R 8/6/4/2 Ω ...................................... 170/205/265/345 W
• Dynamic Headroom
8 Ω ..................................................................................... 0.84 dB
• Damping Factor (IHF)
Front L/R 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................ 150 or more
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Voltage
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ................................ 60 mV or more
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ................................... 2.4 V or more
• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance
OUT (REC) ........................................................... 200 mV/900 Ω
PRE OUT .................................................................. 1.0 V/500 Ω
SUBWOOFER ......................................................... 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE OUT .............................................................. 1.0 V/1.4 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ................................ 150 mV/100 Ω
• Frequency Response
CD to Front L/R, Pure Direct ........... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to OUT (REC)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) .......................................... 0.02% or less
CD, etc. to Front L/R
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 70 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R
[Australia model] ................................................... 81 dB or more
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................. 86 dB or more
CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R ........................... 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more
CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R ... 60 dB/45 dB or more

• Tone Control (Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer)
BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................ 350 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency .......................................... 3.5 kHz
• Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control
BASS Boost/Cut ................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................ 450 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/10 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency .......................................... 2.0 kHz
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back, Presence: Small)
12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ........................................................ 24 dB/oct.

VIDEO SECTION
• Video Format [MONITOR OUT] (Wall Paper)
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ...................................... NTSC/PAL
[Australia model]
.................................................................................. PAL/NTSC
• Video Format (Video Conversion)
......................................................................................... NTSC/PAL
• Signal Level
Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video .................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 or 0.3 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)
Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)
• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)
............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off)
.................................................................................... 60 dB or more
• Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT]
Component (Video Conversion Off)
............................................................. 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB
• Video Format [ZONE OUT] (Gray Back)
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................................... NTSC
[Australia model] .................................................................... PAL

FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Australia model] ........................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ........................................ 2.0/25 µV (17.3/39.2 dBf)
• Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ...................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
• Selectivity (400 kHz) .............................................................. 70 dB
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................... 0.2/0.3%
• Stereo Separation (1 kHz)
Stereo .................................................................................... 42 dB
• Frequency Response
Stereo ............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB
• Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω

154 En

Specifications

AM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz
[Australia model] ................................................ 531 to 1611 kHz
• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA
[Australia model] ................................................................ 500 W
• Standby Power Consumption........................................ 0.1 W or less
• AC Outlets
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)
[Australia model] ......................................... 1 (100 W maximum)
• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................ 435 x 196 x 441 mm
(17-1/8 x 7-3/4 x 17-3/8)
• Weight
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................18.4 kg (40 lbs 10 oz)
[Australia model] ............................................19.6 kg (43 lbs 3 oz)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

(U.S.A. model only)
There is a HOT SURFACE label attached to the top
surface of this unit. This label is required to be
attached to a product of which the temperature of the
top cover may rise 40°C or more during operation
(ambient temperature: 25°C).

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE
Responsible Party:
Address:

Yamaha Electronics Corporation, U.S.A.
6660 Orangethorpe Avenue
Buena Park, CA 90620
Telephone:
714-522-9105
Fax:
714-670-0108
Type of Equipment: AV Receiver
Model Name:
RX-Z7

• This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
• Operation is subject to the following conditions:
– This device may not cause harmful interference.
– This device must accept any interference received including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
See the “Troubleshooting” section at the end of this manual if
interference to radio reception is suspected.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your
equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or
distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is
often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group
recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

155 En

Index
■

Numerics

2ch Stereo, sound field program .......... 51
3D indicator ......................................... 32
5.1-channel speaker connection ........... 18
5.1-channel speaker layout .................. 15
6.1-channel speaker connection ........... 18
6.1-channel speaker layout .................. 15
7.1-channel speaker connection ........... 17
7.1-channel speaker layout .................. 15
7ch Enhancer, sound field program ..... 51
7ch Stereo, sound field program .......... 51

■

AC OUTLET(S) .................................. 30
AC power cable connection ................. 30
Action Game, sound field program ...... 49
Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio
subscription ...................................... 66
Activating XM Satellite Radio ............ 62
ADAPTIVE DRC indicator ................. 33
Adaptive DRC, GUI menu ................... 95
Adaptive DSP effect level,
GUI menu ........................................ 95
Adaptive DSP Level, GUI menu ......... 95
Adaptive dynamic range control,
GUI menu ........................................ 95
Adjustment, GUI menu ...................... 100
Advanced automatic setup ................... 38
Advanced setup .................................. 130
Adventure, sound field program .......... 50
All Channel Search mode,
Sirius Satellite Radio ....................... 67
All Channel Search mode,
XM Radio ........................................ 62
AM antenna connection ....................... 29
AM tuner, troubleshooting ................. 137
AM tuning ............................................ 56
AM tuning operation ............................ 56
AMP, operation mode selector ............ 34
Analog ` Analog, GUI menu ............... 99
Analog ` HDMI, GUI menu ................ 99
Analog Resolution,
input video information ................... 45
Analog-to-analog video conversion,
GUI menu ........................................ 99
Angle, automatic setup ........................ 37
ANTENNA terminals .......................... 14
Aspect, GUI menu ............................. 100
Audio and video synchronization,
GUI menu ........................................ 98
Audio input jack selection ................... 43
Audio input jack selection,
GUI menu ........................................ 90
AUDIO jacks ....................................... 20
Audio jacks .......................................... 20
Audio Output, GUI menu .................. 101
AUDIO SELECT ................................. 43
Audio Select, GUI menu .............. 90, 106
Audio signal flow ................................. 22
Audio signals, HDMI ........................... 21
Auto Bypass, GUI menu ...................... 98
AUTO SETUP ..................................... 35
Automatic audio delay adjustment,
GUI menu ........................................ 98
Automatic setup ................................... 35
Automatic setup, toubleshooting ....... 145

156 En

Automatic station preset,
FM/AM tuning ................................. 57

■

Back ground video, GUI menu ............91
Banana plug connection .......................19
Bass Out, GUI menu ............................94
Bass, GUI menu ...................................98
BGV, GUI menu ..................................91
BI-AMP, advanced setup ...................131
Bi-amplification connections ...............19
Bi-amplifier mode, advanced setup ...131
Bitrate, input audio information ........... 44
Block noise reduction, GUI menu ......101
Block NR, GUI menu .........................101
Bluetooth component playback ............71
Bluetooth connection, GUI menu ........92
Bluetooth pairing, GUI menu ...............91
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
connection ........................................27
Bluetooth, troubleshooting .................144
Blu-ray Disc player connection ............25
Brightness, GUI menu ........................101

■

Category Search mode,
Sirius Satellite Radio .......................67
Category Search mode, XM Radio ......62
CD player connection ...........................26
CD recorder connection .......................26
Cellar Club, sound field program .........48
Center Image, decoder parameter ........89
CENTER jack ......................................27
Center Level, sound field parameter ....88
CENTER PRE OUT jack .....................26
Center speaker ......................................16
Center speaker, GUI menu ...................93
Center Width, decoder parameter ........89
Center, GUI menu ................................93
Chamber, sound field program .............48
Channel Mute, GUI menu ....................98
Channel, input audio information ........44
Church in Freiburg,
sound field program .........................48
CINEMA DSP 3D mode ......................52
CINEMA DSP indicator ......................32
CLASSICAL, sound field program .....47
Clearing configurations,
remote control ................................122
Clearing preset channel,
Sirius Satellite Radio .......................68
Clearing preset channels, XM tuning ...64
Clearing preset station,
FM/AM tuning ................................. 58
COAXIAL jacks ..................................20
Component Assign, GUI menu ..........103
Component assignment, GUI menu ...103
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks .............. 20
Compressed Music Enhancer mode .....51
Configuration, GUI menu ............93, 102
Connect, GUI menu .............................92
Connecting AC power cable ................30
Connecting AM antenna ......................29
Connecting banana plug .......................19
Connecting Bluetooth receiver .............27
Connecting Blu-ray Disc player ........... 25
Connecting CD player ..........................26

Connecting CD recorder .......................26
Connecting DVD player .......................25
Connecting DVD recorder ....................25
Connecting FM antenna .......................29
Connecting HD DVD player ................25
Connecting iPod universal dock ...........27
Connecting MD recorder ......................26
Connecting power cable .......................30
Connecting projector ............................23
Connecting set-top box .........................25
Connecting SiriusConnect tuner ...........65
Connecting speaker cable .....................19
Connecting speakers .............................17
Connecting turntable ............................26
Connecting TV monitor ........................23
Connecting VCR ..................................26
Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home
Dock .................................................61
Connecting YBA-10 .............................27
Connecting YDS-11 .............................27
Connecting Zone 2/3/4 components ...124
Connections ..........................................14
Contrast, GUI menu ...........................101
Control Monitor, GUI menu ...............102
Control, GUI menu ...............................97
Controlling iPod ...................................74
Controlling other components,
remote control ................................114
Controlling TV, remote control ..........113
Controlling Zone 2/3/4 .......................127
Cross Over, GUI menu .........................93
CSII Cinema, decoder ..........................53
CSII indicator .......................................32
CSII Music, decoder .............................53

■

Decoder descriptions ............................53
Decoder indicators ................................33
Decoder Mode, GUI menu ...........90, 106
Decoder selection .................................53
Decoder Type,
sound field parameter .......................86
Default Gateway, GUI menu ..............102
Detail Enhancement, GUI menu ........101
Device Over, HDMI error message ......45
DHCP, GUI menu ..............................102
Dialogue Lift, sound field parameter ...85
Dialogue, input audio information .......44
DIGITAL INPUT jacks ........................14
DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks ....................14
Dimension, decoder parameter .............89
Dimmer, GUI menu ............................105
Direct frequency tuning,
FM/AM tuning .................................56
Direct number access mode,
Sirius Satellite Radio ........................67
Direct number access mode,
XM Radio .........................................63
Direct, sound field parameter ...............88
Display information,
Sirius Satellite Radio ........................70
Display language setting ......................31
Display Set, GUI menu ......................105
Display window, remote control ..........33
Displaying information, HD Radio ......60
Displaying information, XM Radio ......64
Displaying input source information ....44

Index

Distance, automatic setup .................... 36
Distance, GUI menu ............................ 94
DNS Server (P), GUI menu ............... 102
DNS Server (S), GUI menu ............... 102
Drama, sound field program ................ 50
DSP indicators ..................................... 32
DSP Level, sound field parameter ....... 85
DVD player connection ....................... 25
DVD recorder connection .................... 25
Dynamic Range, GUI menu ................. 96

■

Edge Enhancement, GUI menu ......... 101
Effect sound level,
sound field parameter ...................... 85
ENHANCER indicator ........................ 32
ENHANCER, sound field program ..... 51
ENTERTAIN, sound field program ..... 49
Equalizing, automatic setup ................. 37
EXTD Surround, GUI menu .............. 106
External amplifier connection .............. 26

■

GUI menu operation ............................ 84
GUI menu tree ..................................... 81
GUI screen position, GUI menu ........ 106

■

Hall in Amsterdam,
sound field program ......................... 48
Hall in Munich, sound field program ... 47
Hall in Vienna, sound field program ... 47
HD DVD player connection ................ 25
HD Radio ............................................. 59
HD Radio, troubleshooting ................ 137
HDCP Error, HDMI error message ..... 45
HDMI ` HDMI, GUI menu ................. 99
HDMI aspect ratio, GUI menu .......... 100
HDMI automatic lip sync mode,
GUI mode ........................................ 98
HDMI cable plug ................................. 21
HDMI error message ........................... 45
HDMI Error,
input video information ................... 45
HDMI IN jack select, GUI menu ....... 101

■

I/O Assignment, GUI menu ...............105
ID1/ID2 indicator, remote control ........33
INFORMATION ................................153
Information display, HD Radio ............60
Information display, remote control .....33
Information display, XM Radio ...........64
Infrared window, remote control ..........33
Init. Delay, sound field parameter ........86
Initial Set, GUI menu .........................106
Initial Volume, GUI menu ...................95
INITIALIZE, advanced setup ............131
Initialize, sound field parameter ...........89
Input channel indicators .......................33
Input Channels, GUI menu ..................91
Input Level, GUI menu ......................107
Input Rename, GUI menu ..................105
Input Select, GUI menu ........................90
Input signal indicators ..........................32
Input source indicators .........................32
Input source information display .........44
Input/output assignment,
GUI menu .......................................105
IP Address, GUI menu .......................102
iPod charge on the standby mode,
GUI menu .......................................106
iPod menu tree ......................................73
iPod playback .......................................73
iPod universal dock connection ...........27
iPod, GUI menu .................................106
iPod, troubleshooting .........................144
iTunes Tagging, HD Radio ..................59

■

LANGUAGE, advanced setup ...........132
Language, advanced setup .................132
Language, GUI menu .........................107
Level, automatic setup .........................37
Level, GUI menu ..................................94
Level, music enhancer parameter .........89
LFE Level, GUI menu ..........................96
Lipsync, GUI menu ..............................98
LIVE/CLUB, sound field program ......48
Liveness, sound field parameter ...........87
Loading the system settings ...............109
Low-frequency effect level,
GUI menu .........................................96

■

MAC address filter,
advanced setup .............................. 131
MAC Address, GUI menu ................. 102
MAC FILTER, advanced setup ......... 131
Macro programming,
remote control ............................... 120
Manual audio delay adjustment,
GUI menu ........................................ 98
Manual station preset,
FM/AM tuning ................................ 57
Manual Test, GUI menu .................... 107
Max Volume, GUI menu ..................... 95
MCX-2000 content playback .............. 77
MD recorder connection ...................... 26
Media Access Control) address,
GUI menu ...................................... 102
Menu browsing indicator ..................... 33
Menu tree, iPod ................................... 73
Menu tree, network .............................. 75
Menu tree, USB ................................... 75
MONITOR CHECK,
advanced setup .............................. 132
Monitor Info., GUI menu .................. 102
Monitor information, GUI menu ....... 102
Mono Movie, sound field program ...... 50
Mosquito noise reduction,
GUI menu ...................................... 101
Mosquito NR, GUI menu .................. 101
MOVIE, sound field program .............. 50
Multi CH Assign, GUI menu ............... 91
MULTI CH INPUT jacks .................... 14
Multi channel assignment,
GUI menu ........................................ 91
Multi Measure, automatic setup .......... 36
Multi Zone, GUI menu ...................... 103
Multi-channel input component
selection ........................................... 43
Multi-channel sources with
headphones ...................................... 51
Multiple point measurement,
automatic setup ................................ 36
Multi-zone configuration ................... 124
Music Content menu ............................ 72
Music Content, GUI menu .................. 92
Music Video, sound field program ...... 49
Muting audio output ............................ 44
Muting Type, GUI menu ..................... 95

■

Neo:6 Cinema, decoder ....................... 53
Neo:6 Music, decoder .......................... 53
Network connection ............................. 28
Network content playback ................... 75
Network Standby, GUI menu ............ 102
Network, GUI menu .......................... 102
Network, troubleshooting .................. 142
neural indicator .................................... 32
NRL-THX Music, decoder .................. 53
NRL-THX, decoder ............................. 53

■

Operation mode selector,
remote control ................................. 34
OPTICAL jacks ................................... 20
Optimizing speaker setting .................. 35
Option, GUI menu ............................. 105
Out Of Resolution,
HDMI error message ....................... 45

157 En

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION

F.PRNS L Level,
sound field parameter ...................... 88
F.PRNS R Level,
sound field parameter ...................... 88
FIRM UPDATE, advanced setup ...... 132
Flag1/Flag2,
input audio information ................... 44
FM antenna connection ........................ 29
FM tuner, troubleshooting ................. 137
FM tuning ............................................ 56
FM tuning operation ............................ 56
FOCUS, decoder parameter ................. 89
Format, input audio information .......... 44
Front Input, GUI menu ........................ 91
FRONT L/R jacks ................................ 27
Front left/right speaker ......................... 16
Front panel display message scroll,
GUI menu ...................................... 105
Front panel door ................................... 34
FRONT PRE OUT jacks ...................... 26
Front presence speakers, GUI menu .... 93
Front Presence, GUI menu ................... 93
Front speakers, GUI menu ................... 93
Front, GUI menu .................................. 93

HDMI indicator ....................................32
HDMI information ...............................21
HDMI jack ...........................................21
HDMI monitor check,
advanced setup ...............................132
HDMI OUT jack select, GUI menu ...101
HDMI OUT jack selection ...................43
HDMI Resolution,
input video information ....................45
HDMI signal .........................................21
HDMI signal,
input video information ....................45
HDMI video signal processing,
GUI menu .........................................99
HDMI video signal resolution,
GUI menu .......................................100
HDMI, GUI menu ..............................101
HDMI, troubleshooting ......................137
Headphones indicator ...........................32
Headphones use ....................................44

Index

■

Pairing with Bluetooth component ...... 71
Pairing, GUI menu ............................... 91
Panorama, decoder parameter .............. 89
Parameter initialization,
advanced setup ............................... 131
Parametric EQ, GUI menu ................... 96
Parametric equalizer data copy,
GUI menu ........................................ 96
Parametric equalizer information ....... 153
Parametric equalizer type select,
GUI menu ........................................ 96
Parametric equalizer, GUI menu ......... 96
Parental Lock, GUI menu .................... 91
Parental Lock, Sirius Satellite Radio ... 69
Party mode ......................................... 129
Party Mode Set, GUI menu ................ 103
Party mode settings, GUI menu ......... 103
PC server content playback .................. 77
PEQ Data Copy, GUI menu ................. 96
PEQ Select, GUI menu ........................ 96
PHONES jack ...................................... 44
Placing speakers ................................... 15
Play information screen,
iPod playback .................................. 74
Play information screen,
USB content ..................................... 76
Playback screen display time,
GUI menu ...................................... 106
Playback Screen, GUI menu .............. 106
Playback style, iPod ............................. 74
Playback, Bluetooth component .......... 71
PLII Game, decoder ............................. 53
PLII Movie, decoder ............................ 53
PLII Music, decoder ............................ 53
PLIIx Game, decoder ........................... 53
PLIIx Movie, decoder .......................... 53
PLIIx Music, decoder .......................... 53
Position, GUI menu ........................... 106
Power cable connection ....................... 30
PRE AMP indicator ............................. 33
PRE OUT jacks .................................... 14
Presence left/right speaker ................... 16
Presence speaker indicators ................. 33
Preset channel clear, XM Radio .......... 64
Preset channel setting,
Sirius Satellite Radio ....................... 68
Preset channel setting, XM Radio ........ 63
PRESET indicator ................................ 32
Preset Search mode,
Sirius Satellite Radio ....................... 67
Preset Search mode, XM Radio ........... 63
Preset station, FM/AM tuning ............. 57
Primary DNS server, GUI menu ........ 102
Pro Logic, decoder ............................... 53
Processing, GUI menu ......................... 99
Prog. Re-Processing, GUI menu ........ 100
Program selection, HD Radio .............. 59
Programming other remote controls .. 118
Progressive re-processing,
GUI menu ...................................... 100
Projector connection ............................ 23
PURE DIRECT mode .......................... 54
Pure Direct, GUI menu ........................ 98
Pure hi-fi sound listening ..................... 54

■

Rear panel ............................................ 14
Recalling a preset station,
FM/AM tuning ................................. 58
Recital/Opera, sound field program ..... 49

158 En

RECOV./BACKUP,
advanced setup ............................... 131
Recovery and backup of the system
settings, advanced setup .................131
Reloading automatic setup
parameter .........................................40
REMOTE CON AMP,
advanced setup ............................... 130
Remote control ...................................113
Remote control code setting ............... 116
Remote control customization ...........115
Remote control ID setting,
advanced setup ............................... 130
Remote control using ...........................33
Remote control, installing batteries ....... 9
Remote control, troubleshooting ........141
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks .....................27
REMOTE SENSOR,
advanced setup ............................... 130
Remote sensor, advanced setup ......... 130
Repeat, iPod playback style ................. 74
Resetting system ................................147
Resolution, GUI menu .......................100
Rev. Delay, sound field parameter .......88
Rev. Level, sound field parameter .......88
Rev. Time, sound field parameter ........87
Reviewing automatic setup
parameter .........................................40
Rhapsody(R) service ............................78
Roleplaying Game,
sound field program .........................49
Room Size, sound field parameter .......86
RS-232C STANDBY,
advanced setup ............................... 130

■

S VIDEO jacks .....................................20
Sampling, input audio information ......44
Saturation, GUI menu ........................101
Saving system settings .......................108
SB. Init. Delay,
sound field parameter .......................86
SB. Liveness, sound field parameter ....87
SB. Room Size,
sound field parameter .......................86
Sci-Fi, sound field program ................. 50
Scroll, GUI menu ............................... 105
Secondary DNS server, GUI menu ....102
Selecting audio input jacks ..................43
Selecting decoder ................................. 53
Selecting multi-channel input
component ........................................43
Selecting sound field programs ............46
Setting remote control ID,
remote control ID setting ............... 130
Set-top box connection .........................25
Setup, GUI menu ..................................93
Short Message, GUI menu .................105
Shortcut button,
Network content playback ...............79
Shortcut button,
USB content playback .....................79
Shuffle, iPod playback style ................. 74
Signal flow ...........................................22
SIGNAL INFO .....................................44
SILENT CINEMA ...............................51
SILENT CINEMA indicator ................32
Simple Remote Mode,
iPod playback ...................................74
Simplified remote control ..................123
Sirius ID display ...................................66

SIRIUS PIN, advanced setup .............131
SIRIUS Satellite Radio operation .........66
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Parental Lock
code number reset,
advanced setup ...............................131
SIRIUS Satellite Radio parental lock,
GUI menu .........................................91
SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription
activation ..........................................66
SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning .............65
SIRIUS Satellite Radio,
troubleshooting ...............................140
SiriusConnect tuner connection ............65
Size, automatic setup ............................36
SLEEP indicator ...................................33
Sleep timer ............................................45
Sound field parameter ..........................86
Sound field program .............................46
Sound field program information .......152
Sound field program selection ..............46
Sound field programs with
headphones .......................................51
Sound field programs without
surround speakers .............................51
Sound, GUI menu .................................96
Source name change ...........................119
SOURCE, operation mode selector ......34
Speaker angle, automatic setup ............37
Speaker cable connection .....................19
Speaker configurations, GUI menu ......93
Speaker connection ...............................17
Speaker distance, automatic setup ........36
Speaker distance, GUI menu ................94
Speaker equalizing, automatic setup ....37
SPEAKER IMP., advanced setup .......130
Speaker impedance setting ...................31
Speaker impedance,
advanced setup ...............................130
Speaker level adjustment ......................55
Speaker level, automatic setup .............37
Speaker level, GUI menu .....................94
Speaker placement ................................15
Speaker setting optimization ................35
Speaker size, automatic setup ...............36
Speaker terminals .................................14
Speaker wiring, automatic setup ..........36
Speaker, GUI menu ..............................93
Specifications .....................................154
Spectacle, sound field program ............50
Sports, sound field program .................49
Standard, sound field program .............50
Standby Charge, GUI menu ...............106
Standby mode .......................................31
Standby through control,
GUI menu .......................................101
Standby Through, GUI menu .............101
Station Search, GUI menu ....................91
Status, GUI menu ...............................102
Stereo playback ....................................51
STEREO, sound field program ............51
Stereo/Surround, GUI menu .................85
Straight Enhancer,
sound field program .........................51
STRAIGHT mode ................................52
Subnet Mask, GUI menu ....................102
Subwoofer ............................................16
SUBWOOFER jack ..............................27
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack ............27
Subwoofer, GUI menu .........................93
Supplied accessories ...............................7

Index

SUR. DECODE,
sound field program ......................... 51
Sur. Init.Delay,
sound field parameter ...................... 86
Sur. Liveness, sound field parameter ... 87
Sur. Room Size,
sound field parameter ...................... 86
Sur.Back L Level,
sound field parameter ...................... 88
Sur.Back R Level,
sound field parameter ...................... 88
SUR.BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT
jacks ................................................. 27
Surround back left/right speaker .......... 16
Surround back left/right speakers,
GUI menu ........................................ 93
Surround back speaker ......................... 16
Surround Back, GUI menu .................. 93
Surround Decode,
sound field program ......................... 51
Surround decoder mode ....................... 51
Surround L Level,
sound field parameter ...................... 88
SURROUND L/R jacks ....................... 27
Surround left/right speaker .................. 16
Surround left/right speakers,
GUI menu ........................................ 93
SURROUND PRE OUT jacks ............. 26
Surround R Level,
sound field parameter ...................... 88
Surround, GUI menu ............................ 93
System ID, GUI menu ....................... 102
System Memory ................................. 108
System reset ....................................... 147
System settings .................................. 108
System, GUI menu ............................. 102

■

Unit, GUI menu ................................... 94
Unprocessed input source listening ..... 52
USB content playback ......................... 75
USB device that can be used ................ 77
USB port select, GUI menu ................. 92
USB Select, GUI menu ........................ 92
USB storage device connection ........... 28
USB, troubleshooting ......................... 142

VCR connection ...................................26
VERSION, advanced setup ................132
Vertical dialogue position,
sound field parameter .......................85
Video Adjustment, GUI menu .............91
VIDEO AUX jacks ..............................29
Video conversion for analog-to-analog,
GUI menu .........................................99
VIDEO jacks ........................................20
Video jacks ...........................................20
Video quality adjustment ...................100
Video signal flow .................................22
Video signal, HDMI .............................21
Video, GUI menu .................................99
Village Vanguard,
sound field program .........................48
Virtual CINEMA DSP .........................51
VIRTUAL indicator .............................32
VOLUME level indicator .....................33
Volume Trim, GUI menu .....................90
Volume, GUI menu ..............................95

■

Zone3 Max Vol., GUI menu .............. 104
Zone3 Mono, GUI menu ................... 104
Zone3 Muting Type, GUI menu ........ 104
Zone3 Set, GUI menu ........................ 103
Zone3 Tone Control, GUI menu ....... 104
Zone3 Volume, GUI menu ................ 103
Zone4 Set, GUI menu ........................ 103

Wake on RS-232C access,
advanced setup ...............................130
Wall Paper, GUI menu .......................106
Warehouse Loft,
sound field program .........................48
Web browser controlling ....................112
Web Control Center ...........................112
Wiring, automatic setup .......................36

■

XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock
connection ........................................61
XM Satellite Radio activation ..............62
XM Satellite Radio operations .............62
XM Satellite Radio tuning ...................61
XM Satellite Radio,
troubleshooting ..............................139

■

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION

Target Zone, GUI menu ..................... 107
The Bottom Line,
sound field program ......................... 48
The Roxy Theatre,
sound field program ......................... 48
Tonal quality adjustment ..................... 54
Tone Control, GUI menu ..................... 97
Transmit indicator, remote control ...... 33
Treble, GUI menu ................................ 98
Trigger Mode, GUI menu .................. 107
Trigger Output, GUI menu ................ 107
Troubleshooting ................................. 133
TruBass, decoder parameter ................ 89
Tuner indicators ................................... 33
Turning off ........................................... 31
Turning on ............................................ 31
Turntable connection ........................... 26
TV FORMAT, advanced setup .......... 132
TV format, advanced setup ................ 132
TV monitor connection ........................ 23
TV, operation mode selector ................ 34

■

YBA-10 connection .............................27
YDS-11 connection ..............................27
YPAO ...................................................35
YPAO indicator ....................................32

■

Zone 2/3/4 component connection .....124
Zone 2/3/4 control ..............................127
Zone indicators, remote control ...........33
Zone on-screen display, GUI menu ...104
Zone OSD, GUI menu ........................104
ZONE OUT jacks .................................14
Zone SP Assign, GUI menu ...............103
Zone speaker assignment,
GUI menu .......................................103
Zone2 Balance, GUI menu .................104
Zone2 Initial Vol., GUI menu ............104
Zone2 Max Vol., GUI menu ..............104
Zone2 Mono, GUI menu ....................104
Zone2 Muting Type, GUI menu .........104
Zone2 Rename, GUI menu ................104
Zone2 Set, GUI menu ........................103
Zone2 Tone Control, GUI menu ........104
Zone2 Volume, GUI menu .................103
ZONE2/ZONE3/ZONE4 indicators .....33
Zone3 Balance, GUI menu .................104
Zone3 Initial Vol., GUI menu ............104

“B MASTER ON/OFF” or
“3 DVD” (example) indicates the
name of the parts on the front panel
or the remote control. Refer to the
attached sheet or “Appendix”
(separate booklet) for the
information about each position of
the parts.

159 En

RX-Z7_UC-cv.fm Page 1 Monday, September 1, 2008 8:23 PM

AV Receiver

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Printed in Malaysia

WQ21580

OWNER’S MANUAL
English

AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo

APPENDIX
APPENDICE

■ Front panel / Face avant

MAIN ZONE
PURE DIRECT

MASTER
ON

ON/OFF

OFF

INPUT

AUDIO SELECT/
REC OUT

TONE
CONTROL

PRESET/TUNING/CH

ENTER

MEMORY

SEARCH
MODE

STEREO/
MONO

VOLUME
CATEGORY

INFO

BAND
STRAIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE
EFFECT

VIDEO AUX
ZONE 2

OPTIMIZER
MIC

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

VIDEO AUX

PHONES

HDMI IN

USB

PROGRAM
YPAO

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

AUDIO

OPTICAL

L
C

AUDIO SELECT/
REC OUT

TONE
CONTROL

ENTER

PRESET/TUNING/CH

MEMORY

SEARCH
MODE

STEREO/
MONO

CATEGORY

INFO

BAND
STRAIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE
EFFECT

OPTIMIZER
MIC

VIDEO AUX
ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

VIDEO AUX

PHONES

HDMI IN

USB

PROGRAM
YPAO

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

AUDIO

OPTICAL

■ Remote control / Boîtier de télécommande

1
D
2

STANDBY

POWER

V-AUX

PHONO

DOCK

BD
HD DVD

DVD

MD
CD-R

CBL
SAT

DVR

VCR

TUNER

SIRIUS

USB
NET

POWER

MULTI

AMP

TV
SOURCE

5
6
7
8

SELECT

MACRO

ZONE

MODE

F
G
H

SYSTEM MEMORY

1
STATUS
TITLE
BAND

9
0

SETUP

PRESET/CH

VOLUME

CAT.
A-E

ENTER

PLAY INFO
DISPLAY

SUBMENU
RETURN
MEMORY

MENU
SRCH MODE

MUTE

K
L

REC

CLASSICAL
1
TAG
CLASSICAL
1

STEREO
5

LIVE/CLUB
2

PRG SELECT
ENTERTAIN
3

MOVIE
4

ENHANCER SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT
6
7
8

HDMI OUT
0

INFO

LEVEL

SLEEP
MUTE

TV VOL

TV CH

EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT
ENT
10

INPUT
PARTY

STEREO
5

AUDIO SEL
AUDIO

3D DSP

LIVE/CLUB
2

ENTERTAIN
3

MOVIE
4

ENHANCER SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT
6
7
8
HDMI OUT
0

M
N

O
P

Sound output in each sound field program
Son émis dans chaque correction de champ sonore
L

Front left speaker

Surround left speaker

SBR

Surround back right speaker

Center speaker

Surround right speaker

Presence left speaker

Front right speaker

SBL

Surround back left speaker

Presence right speaker

Speaker from which no sound is being output

Speaker from which sound is being output

Speaker settings
7-channel
PL

Speaker settings

5-channel

7-channel
PL

PR
C

5-channel

PR
C

1
SL

SBL SBR

PR
C

SBL SBR

PR
C

2
SL

SBL SBR

PR
C

SBL SBR

PR
C

3
SL

SBL SBR

PR
C

SBL SBR

PR
C

4
SL

SBL SBR

PL x

neural

: OFF

PL x

neural

: ON or discrete 6.1/7.1-channel audio signals are input.

Input audio source
Program

CLASSICAL
Hall in Munich
Hall in Vienna
Hall in Amsterdam
Church in Freiburg
Chamber
LIVE/CLUB
Village Vanguard
Warehouse Loft
Cellar Club
The Roxy Theatre
The Bottom Line

2-channel
(monaural)

2-channel (stereo)

5.1-channel*1

6.1/7.1-channel*2

OFF

Input audio source
Program

2-channel
(monaural)

2-channel (stereo)

5.1-channel*1

6.1/7.1-channel*2

ENTERTAINMENT
Sports
Action Game
Roleplaying Game
Music Video
Recital/Opera
MOVIE
Standard
Spectacle
Sci-Fi
Adventure
Drama

MOVIE
Mono Movie

OFF

STEREO
2ch Stereo

––

STEREO
7ch Stereo
MUSIC ENHANCER
7ch Enhancer

––

SUR.DECODE
Surround Decoder
(Pro Logic)
(PLII Movie)
(PLII Game)

––

SUR.DECODE
Surround Decoder
(PLII Music)

––

SUR.DECODE
Surround Decoder
(PLIIx Movie)
(PLIIx Game)
(Neo:6 Cinema)
(CSII Cinema)
(NRL-THX)

––

SUR.DECODE
Surround Decoder
(PLIIx Music)
(Neo:6 Music)
(CSII Music)
(NRL-THX Music)

––

STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
MUSIC ENHANCER
Straight Enhancer

––

OFF

List of remote control codes
Liste des codes de commande
TV
ACURA
ADDISON

00101
01201, 01601,
08401
ADMIRAL
01301, 02201,
05801
ADVENT
09601
AGB
06801
AIKO
01201
AKAI
00101, 00301,
02901, 04601,
06801, 08901,
10501
AKURA
03701
ALBA
00101, 00401,
04801, 08501
AMERICA ACTION
02701
AMPRO
09401
AMSTRAD
00101, 00401,
02501, 04801,
05101, 05301,
06801
ANAM
00101, 02701,
03401
ANAM NATIONAL
03401, 08301
ANITECH
00101
AOC
00101, 00301,
00901, 01201,
01301, 01601,
02601, 02701,
05601
APEX DIGITAL09301, 09701,
09901
ASA
01401
AUDIOSONIC 00401, 01701
AWA
00101
BANG & OLUFSEN
07201
BASIC
00101
BAUR
00401, 04601,
06701
BAYSONIC
02701
BEAUMARK 02601
BEKO
04701, 06201,
09001, 09101
BELL & HOWELL
02001
BEON
00401
BLAUPUNKT 02801
BLUE SKY
08501, 11401
BONDSTEC 03301
BRADFORD 02701
BRANDT
01701, 04201
BROKSONIC 03101, 05801
BUSH
00101, 00101,
00401, 04801,
04901, 08501,
11401
BYDESIGN
14301, 14401,
14501, 14601
CANDLE
00301
CARNIVALE 00301
CARVER
00801, 02401
CASCADE
00101
CATHAY
00401
CCE
00401
CELEBRITY 00001
CELERA
09701
CENTURION 00401
CGE
03301
CHANGHONG 09701
CHING TAI
00101, 01201

CHUN YUN

00001, 00101,
01201, 02701
CHUNG HSIN 00701, 01601,
02701
CIMLINE
00101
CINERAL
01201, 05601
CITIZEN
00301, 00901,
01201
CLARION
02701
CLARIVOX
00401
CLATRONIC 03301, 04701
CONDOR
04101, 04701
CONRAC
10301
CONTEC
00101, 02701
CRAIG
02701
CROSLEY
00801
CROWN
00101, 00401,
02701, 04701,
05201
CTC
03301
CURTIS MATHES
00301, 00501,
00801, 00901,
01301, 01801,
02001, 02301,
05601, 08901,
11801, 12201
CXC
02701
DAEWOO
00101, 00301,
00401, 01201,
01601, 02001,
02401, 02601,
02701, 04901,
05601, 07901,
08201, 13101
DANSAI
00401
DAYTON
00101
DE GRAAF
02901, 06901
DECCA
00401, 06801
DENON
01801
DIGATRON
00401
DIXI
00101, 00401
DUMONT
00201
DWIN
09201, 10101
ECE
00401
ELBE
03501
ELECTROBAND
00001
ELIN
00401, 06901
ELITE
04101
ELTA
00101
EMERSON
02001, 02601,
02701, 03101,
04601, 05801,
07901
ENVISION
00301, 10601
EPSON
11001
ERRES
00401
ETHER
00101, 00301
ETRON
00101
EUROPHON 06801
FERGUSON 00401, 01001,
01701, 03201,
03801, 04201,
07101
FIDELITY
04601
FINLANDIA 02901, 04401
FINLUX
00401, 01401,
01501, 04401,
06801
FIRSTAR
00101, 03101
FIRSTLINE
00101, 03301,
08501
FISHER
01401, 02001,
02901, 04701
FLINT
05701

FORMENTI
FORTRESS
FRONTECH

00401, 04101
01301
02201, 03301,
03701
FUJITSU
08701, 10401
FUNAI
02501, 02701,
03701
FUTURETECH 02701
GATEWAY
13301, 13401
GE
00301, 00501,
00601, 01201,
02601, 02701,
05601, 07101,
11801, 12201,
12601
GEC
00401, 06801
GELOSO
00101
GENEXXA
02201
GIBRALTER 00201, 00301
GOLDSTAR
00301, 00401,
01701, 02001,
02601, 05001
GOODMANS 00401, 04801,
04901, 08201
GOREMJE
04701
GRADIENTE 00701, 02401
GRAETZ
02201, 04601
GRANADA
00401, 02901,
04301, 06801
GRANDIN
07701
GRUNDIG
00401, 02801,
06301, 07001,
07401
GRUNPY
02701
HALLMARK 02601
HANKOOK
00301, 02601,
02701
HANSEATIC 00401, 04101,
04601, 05201,
07001
HANTAREX 06801
HARMAN/KARDON
00801
HARVARD
02701
HAVERMY
01301
HCM
00101, 05101
HELLO KITTY 05601
HINARI
00101, 00401
HISAWA
05701
HITACHI
00101, 00301,
01201, 01501,
01701, 01801,
02201, 02601,
03001, 04501,
06101, 06901,
07301, 11701,
12101
HUA TUN
00101
HUANYU
04901
HYPSON
00401, 03701
ICE
03701, 04801
IMPERIAL
03301, 04701,
05201
INDIANA
00401
INFINITY
00801
INGELEN
02201
INNO HIT
06801
INNOVA
00401
INTEQ
00201
INTERFUNK 00401, 02201,
03301, 04601,
06701
INTERVISION 00401, 03701,
05001
ITS
04801
ITT
02201, 04601,

06901
00801
00001
00101, 00601,
01201, 02101,
03101
JENSEN
09601
JVC
00701, 04801,
05801, 08401,
08701
KAISUI
00101
KAPSCH
02201
KARCHER
07701
KATHREIN
07001
KEC
02701
KENDO
00401
KENWOOD
00301
KNEISSEL
03501, 05401
KOLIN
00701, 01601,
02701
KORPEL
00401
KOYODA
00101
KTV
00301, 02701
L&S ELECTRONIC
10301
LEYCO
00401, 03701
LG
00301, 00401,
00901, 01601,
02601, 09001
LIESENK & TTER
00401
LOEWE
06701
LUXOR
04501, 04601
LXI
00501, 00801,
02001, 02101,
02601
M ELECTRONIC
00101, 00401,
01401, 01501,
01701, 02201,
03801, 04401,
04901, 06001
MAGNADYNE 03301, 06801
MAGNAFON 06801
MAGNAVOX 00301, 00801,
12001, 12601
MANESTH
03701, 04101
MARANTZ
00301, 00401,
00801, 07001
MARK
00401
MATSUI
00101, 00401,
02901, 04801,
06301, 06801
MATSUSHITA 03401, 08301
MEDIATOR
00401
MEDION
08501, 10301,
11401
MEGATRON 01801, 02601
MEMOREX
00101, 01901,
02001, 02601,
03401, 05801,
11401
METZ
05501
MGA
00301, 01901,
02601
MICROMAXX 10301
MICROSTAR 10301
MIDLAND
00201, 00501,
00601
MINERVA
06301
MINOKA
05101
MITSUBISHI 00301, 01301,
01601, 01901,
02001, 02601,
02701, 03101,
03401, 06701,
JBL
JCB
JEAN

11201, 11901
03901, 04001,
06801, 07601
MOTOROLA 01301
MTC
00301, 00901,
06701
MULTITECH 00101, 02701
MYRYAD
07001
NAD
02101, 02601,
04601, 11301
NEC
00101, 00301,
00601, 02001,
02101, 02401,
02601, 05701,
06501, 13201
NECKERMANN
00401, 07001
NEI
00401
NETSAT
00401
NEWAVE
00101, 01201,
01301, 02601
NIKKAI
00401, 03701
NIKKO
00301, 01201,
02601
NOKIA
04601, 05901,
06001, 06901,
08101
NORCENT
09301, 10801
NORDMENDE 01701, 03801,
07101
NTC
01201
OCEANIC
02201, 04601
ONWA
02701, 05301
OPTIMUS
02001, 02301,
03401, 08301
OPTONICA
01301
ORION
00401, 03101,
04101, 05801,
06801
OSAKI
03701, 05101
OTTO VERSAND
00401, 04101,
06701, 07001
PALLADIUM 04701, 05201
PANAMA
03701
PANASONIC 00401, 00601,
00801, 02201,
03401, 08301,
12401
PATHE CINEMA
03201, 04101
PAUSA
00101
PENNEY
00301, 00501,
00601, 00901,
02101, 02601,
12201
PERDIO
04101
PHILCO
00301, 00401,
00801, 01801,
02601, 02701,
03301, 05801,
13101
PHILIPS
00001, 00301,
00401, 00601,
00801, 01201,
01601, 02601,
04901, 07001,
08801, 12601
PHONOLA
00401
PILOT
00301
PIONEER
01701, 02201,
02301, 03801,
08601, 09501,
11301
PORTLAND 01201
PRANDONI-PRINCE
06801
PRIMA
09601
PRISM
00601
PROFEX
00101, 04601
MIVAR

PROSCAN
PROTECH

00501
00101, 00401,
03301, 03701,
05201, 08501
PROTON
00101, 00301,
02601
PULSAR
00201
QUASAR
00601, 03401,
08301
QUELLE
00401, 01401,
04601, 06701
RADIOLA
00401
RADIOMARELLI
06801
RADIOSHACK 00301, 00501,
02001, 02601,
02701
RCA
00001, 00301,
00501, 01101,
01201, 02601,
08601, 11501,
11801, 13901,
12201, 12501,
12601, 12801
REALISTIC
00301, 02001,
02601, 02701
REDIFFUSION 04601
REOC
09001
REVOX
00401
REX
02201, 03501,
03701
RFT
05201
R-LINE
00401
ROADSTAR
00101, 03701,
05201
RUNCO
00201, 00301,
06501, 07501
SABA
01701, 02201,
03801, 04201
SACCS
03201
SAGEM
07701
SAISHO
00101, 03701,
06801
SALORA
02201, 04601,
06901
SAMBERS
06801
SAMPO
00101, 00301,
01201, 01301,
02001, 02501,
02601, 08301,
13301
SAMSUNG
00101, 00301,
00401, 00901,
01101, 01201,
02001, 02601,
03701, 04701,
07001, 07401,
07801, 08901,
09801, 10501,
10701
SANSEI
05601
SANSUI
05801
SANYO
01401, 02001,
02701, 02901,
04301, 10201
SBR
00401
SCHAUB LORENZ
04601
SCHNEIDER 00401, 03301,
04801, 08501
SCOTCH
02601
SCOTT
02601, 02701,
03101
SEARS
00501, 00801,
02001, 02101,
02501, 02601
SEG
03701, 08501
SEI
06801
SELECO
02201, 03501
SEMIVOX
02701

SEMP
SHARP

02101
00301, 01301,
08301
SHEN YING 00101, 01201
SHENG CHIA 00101, 01301,
03101
SIAREM
06801
SIEMENS
00401, 02801
SINUDYNE
06801
SKANTIC
04501
SKY
00401
SKYGIANT
02701
SKYWORTH 00401
SOLAVOX
02201
SONITRON
02901
SONOKO
00101, 00401
SONOLOR
02201, 02901
SONTEC
00401
SONY
00001, 08301,
11101, 11601,
12701, 12901
SOUNDESIGN 02601, 02701
SOUNDWAVE 00401, 05201
SOWA
00601, 00901,
01201, 02101,
02601
SQUAREVIEW 02501
SSS
02701
STANDARD 00101
STARLITE
02701
STERN
02201, 03501
SUPREME
00001
SYLVANIA
00301, 00801,
02501
SYMPHONIC 02501, 02701
SYNCO
00001, 00901,
01201, 01301,
02601, 05601
SYSLINE
00401
T+A
05501
TACICO
00101, 01201,
02601
TAI YI
00101
TANDY
01301, 02201
TASHIKO
01201, 08301
TATUNG
00101, 00401,
00601, 00801,
00901, 02001,
02101, 06801
TCM
10301
TEAC
00101, 00401,
03701, 05101,
05201, 05701,
08501, 11401
TEC
03301
TECHNEMA 04101
TECHNICS
00601, 03401,
08301
TECHWOOD 00601
TECO
00101, 00601,
01201, 01301,
02601, 03701,
08401
TEKNIKA
00801, 00901,
01201, 01901,
02701
TELEFUNKEN 01701, 03601,
04201, 08001,
08901
TELEMEISTER04101
TELETECH
00101
TENSAI
04101
TERA
00301
THOMSON
01701, 03801,
07101, 08001,
12501
THORN
00401, 01401,
04601, 06701
TMK
02601
TNCI
00201

TOSHIBA

00901, 02001,
02101, 06601,
07801, 08301,
10901, 12101,
12301, 13001,
13201
TRIUMPH
06801
TUNTEX
00101, 00301,
01201
TVS
05801
UHER
04101
UNIVERSUM 00401, 01401,
01501, 03701,
04401, 04701,
06401
VECTOR RESEARCH
00301
VESTEL
00401
VICTOR
00701, 03401,
08301, 08401
VIDEOSAT
03301
VIDIKRON
00801
VIDTECH
02601
VIEWSONIC 13301
VISION
04101
VOXSON
02201
WALTHAM
04501
WARDS
00301, 00801,
02601, 11301
WATSON
00401, 04101
WAYCON
02101
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
00401, 04101,
05801, 07901
YAMAHA
00301, 01801,
08301, 10001,
11001, 13501,
13601, 13701,
13801, 14001,
14101, 14201
YAPSHE
03401
YOKO
00401, 03701
ZENITH
00201, 01201,
02601, 05801

VCR
ADMIRAL
ADVENTURA
AIKO
AIWA

01102
00002
02102
00002, 00402,
02202, 02602,
02702
AKAI
00602, 02302
AKIBA
01402
ALBA
01402, 02102,
02302, 02702
AMERICA ACTION
02102
AMERICAN HIGH
00302
AMSTRAD
00002
ANAM
00402, 01902,
02002, 02102,
02902
ANAM NATIONAL
01902, 04502
ANITECH
01402
ASA
00402, 01502
ASHA
02002
ASUKA
00402
AUDIOVOX
00402, 02102
BAIRD
00002, 00602,
01602
BASIC LINE 01402, 02102
BEAUMARK 02002
BELL & HOWELL
01602
BLAUPUNKT 01902
BRANDT
02402

BRANDT ELECTRONIC
00602
BROKSONIC 01702, 02602,
04402
BUSH
01402, 02102,
02702
CALIX
00402
CANON
00302
CARVER
01502
CCE
01402, 02102
CGE
00002
CIMLINE
01402
CINERAL
02102
CITIZEN
00402, 02102,
04302
COLT
01402
COMBITECH 02702
CRAIG
00402, 01002,
01402, 02002
CROWN
01402, 02102
CURTIS MATHES
00302, 00602,
01202, 03702
CYBERNEX 02002
CYRUS
01502
DAEWOO
00902, 01602,
02102, 03402,
04302
DANSAI
01402
DE GRAAF
00702
DECCA
00002, 01502
DENON
00702
DUAL
00602
DUMONT
00002, 01502,
01602
DYNATECH 00002
ELCATECH
01402
ELECTROHOME
00402
ELECTROPHONIC
00402
EMEREX
00102
EMERSON
00002, 00302,
00402, 00802,
00902, 01702,
02002, 02102,
04302, 04402
ESC
02002, 02102
FERGUSON 00602, 02402
FIDELITY
00002
FINLANDIA 01502, 01602
FINLUX
00002, 00702,
01502, 01602
FIRSTLINE
00402, 00802,
00902, 01402
FISHER
01002, 01602
FUJI
00202, 00302
FUJITSU
00002, 00902
FUNAI
00002
GARRARD
00002
GE
00302, 01202,
02002, 03502,
03702, 03802
GEC
01502
GENERAL
00902
GO VIDEO
02802
GOLDHAND 01402
GOLDSTAR 00402, 01802,
02902, 04202
GOODMANS 00002, 00402,
01402, 02102
GRADIENTE 00002
GRAETZ
00602, 01602,
02002
GRANADA
01502, 01602
GRANDIN
00002, 00402,
01402
GRUNDIG
01402, 01502,
01902, 02502
HANSEATIC 00402

HARLEY DAVIDSON
00002
HARMAN/KARDON
01502
HARWOOD
01402
HCM
01402
HINARI
01402, 02002,
02702
HI-Q
01002
HITACHI
00002, 00402,
00602, 00702,
02002
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
00702
HYPSON
01402
IMPERIAL
00002
INTERFUNK 01502
ITT
00602, 01602,
02002
ITV
00402, 02102
JENSEN
00602
JVC
00602, 00902,
01302
KAISUI
01402
KEC
00402, 02102
KENWOOD
00602, 01302
KLH
01402
KODAK
00302, 00402
KOLIN
00602, 00802
KORPEL
01402
LENCO
02102
LEYCO
01402
LG
00402, 00702,
00902, 02902
LLOYD’S
00002
LOEWE
00402, 01502,
04502
LOGIK
01402, 02002
LUXOR
00802, 01102,
01602
LXI
00402
M ELECTRONIC
00002
MAGNASONIC04302
MAGNAVOX 00002, 00302,
00502, 01502
MAGNIN
02002
MANESTH
00902, 01402
MARANTZ
00302, 01502
MARTA
00402
MATSUI
02602, 02702
MATSUSHITA 00302
MEDION
02602
MEI
00302
MEMOREX
00002, 00302,
00402, 00502,
01002, 01102,
01602, 02002,
02202, 02602,
04202
MEMPHIS
01402
METZ
00402, 02502,
04502
MGA
00802, 02002
MGN TECHNOLOGY
02002
MINOLTA
00702
MITSUBISHI 00602, 00802,
01302, 01502,
03502
MOTOROLA 00302, 01102
MTC
00002, 02002
MULTITECH 00002, 01402
MURPHY
00002
MYRYAD
01502
NAD
01602
NATIONAL
01902
NEC
00302, 00402,
00602, 01102,
01302, 01602

NECKERMANN
01502
NESCO
01402
NEWAVE
00402
NIKKO
00402
NOBLEX
02002
NOKIA
00602, 01602,
02002
NORDMENDE 00602, 02402
OCEANIC
00002, 00602
OKANO
02302, 02602
OLYMPUS
00302, 01902
OPTIMUS
00402, 01102,
01602, 02802
ORION
01702, 02602,
02702, 04402
OSAKI
00002, 00402,
01402
OTTO VERSAND
01502
PALLADIUM 00402, 00602,
01402
PANASONIC 00302, 01802,
01902, 03102,
03702, 04502
PATHE MARCONI
00602
PENNEY
00302, 00402,
00702, 02002,
03702, 04202
PENTAX
00702
PERDIO
00002
PHILCO
00302
PHILIPS
00302, 01502,
03202, 03902,
04002
PHONOLA
01502
PILOT
00402
PIONEER
00702, 01302,
01502
POLK AUDIO 01502
PROFITRONIC 02002
PROLINE
00002
PROSCAN
01202, 03802
PROTEC
01402
PULSAR
00502
PYE
01502
QUASAR
00302, 03702
QUELLE
01502
RADIOLA
01502
RADIOSHACK 00002
RADIX
00402
RANDEX
00402
RCA
00302, 00702,
01202, 02002,
03502, 03702,
03802
REALISTIC
00002, 00302,
00402, 01002,
01102, 01602
REOC
02602
REPLAYTV
03002, 03102
REX
00602
ROADSTAR
00402, 01402,
02002, 02102
RUNCO
00502
SABA
00602, 02402
SALORA
00802
SAMPO
00402, 01102
SAMSUNG
00902, 02002,
02802
SANKY
00502, 01102
SANSUI
00002, 00602,
01302, 04402
SANYO
01002, 01602,
02002
SAVILLE
02702
SBR
01502
SCHAUB LORENZ
00002, 00602,

01602
00002, 01402,
01502
SCOTT
00802, 00902,
01702
SEARS
00002, 00302,
00402, 00702,
01002, 01602,
04202
SEG
02002
SEI
01502
SELECO
00602
SEMP
00902
SHARP
01102, 03502
SHINTOM
01402, 01602
SIEMENS
00402, 01502,
01602
SILVA
00402
SINGER
00902, 01402
SINUDYNE
01502
SONIC BLUE 03002, 03102
SONTEC
00402
SONY
00002, 00102,
00202, 00302,
03302, 04102
STS
00702
SUNKAI
02602
SUNSTAR
00002
SUNTRONIC 00002
SYLVANIA
00002, 00302,
00802, 01502
SYMPHONIC 00002
TANDY
00002, 01602
TASHIKO
00002, 00402
TATUNG
00002, 00602,
00902, 01302,
01502
TEAC
00002, 00602,
02102, 02202,
03402
TECHNICS
00302, 01902
TECO
00302, 00402,
00602, 01102
TEKNIKA
00002, 00302,
00402
TELEAVIA
00602
TELEFUNKEN 00602, 02402
TENOSAL
01402
TENSAI
00002
THOMAS
00002
THOMSON
00602, 01202,
01302, 02402
THORN
00602, 01602
TIVO
03202, 03302
TMK
02002
TOSHIBA
00602, 00802,
00902, 01302,
01502, 03602
TOTEVISION 00402, 02002
UHER
02002
UNITECH
02002
UNIVERSUM 00002, 00402,
01502, 02002
VECTOR
00902
VICTOR
00602, 01302
VIDEO CONCEPTS
00902
VIDEOMAGIC 00402
VIDEOSONIC 02002
VILLAIN
00002
WARDS
00002, 00302,
00702, 01002,
01102, 01202,
01402, 01502,
02002
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
01402
XR-1000
00002, 00302,
01402
YAMAHA
00602
SCHNEIDER

YAMISHI
YOKAN
YOKO
ZENITH

01402
01402
02002
00002, 00202,
00502, 04402

CABLE
ABC
00103, 00203
AMERICAST 02003
BELL SOUTH 02003
BIRMINGHAM CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
00803
BRITISH TELECOM
00103
DAERYUNG 00203, 01403,
01903
DIRECTOR
01303
FILMNET
01203
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
00103, 00803,
01303, 01703
GOLDSTAR
00503
HAMLIN
00303, 00703
JERROLD
00103, 00803,
01303, 01703
LG
00503
MEMOREX
00003
MNET
01203
MOTOROLA 00803, 01303,
01703, 02303
NOOS
01803
PACE
00603, 02203
PANASONIC 00003, 00203,
00403
PARAGON
00003
PHILIPS
01003, 01103
PIONEER
00503, 01603,
01903
PULSAR
00003
PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX
00103
QUASAR
00003
RCA
02403, 02503
REGAL
00703, 00903
RUNCO
00003
SAGEM
01803
SAMSUNG
00003, 00503
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
00203, 01403,
01903
SONY
02103
STARCOM
00103
SUPERCABLE 00803
TELE+1
01203
TORX
00103
TOSHIBA
00003
TRANS PX
00803
TS
00103
UNITED CABLE
00103
ZENITH
00003, 01503,
02003

SATELLITE TUNER
@SAT
06404
ABSAT
00104
ALBA
01404
ALPHASTAR 02504
AMSTRAD
03004
ASTON
00304, 05004
ASTRO
00604
ATSAT
06404
AVALON
01304
BLAUPUNKT 00604
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
03004, 05204
CANAL DIGITAL

03104
CANAL SATELLITE
03104
CANAL+
03104
CHAPARRAL 00804
CITYCOM
05304
CONNEXIONS 01304
CROSSDIGITAL
04604
CYRUS
00704
DAERYUNG 01304
DAEWOO
06304
D-BOX
02104, 04904
DIGENIUS
01104
DIRECTV
00904, 01204,
01504, 01704,
02204, 02304,
02804, 04104,
04604, 05104,
06904
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM
02604, 03704
DISHPRO
02604, 03704
DISTRATEL 00004
DMT
04004
DNT
00704, 01304
DREAM MULTIMEDIA
05804
ECHOSTAR
00504, 01304,
01604, 02604,
03104, 03604,
03704, 04304
ENGEL
03804
EXPRESSVU 02604
FINLUX
01404
FOXTEL
07004, 07104,
07204, 07304,
07404
FRACARRO 03604
FTE
03404
FUBA
01304
GALAXIS
03404, 04704
GE
01504
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
03504
GOI
02604
GOLD BOX
03104
GRUNDIG
00604, 03004
HIRSCHMANN00604, 01304
HITACHI
01404, 02804
HTS
02604
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM
02304, 05104,
06904
HUMAX
03404, 05304
INVIDEO
03604
JVC
02604
KATHREIN
00104, 00604,
00704, 01004,
01804, 05604
KREISELMEYER
00604
LABGEAR
06304
LOGIX
03804
LORENZEN 01104
MAGNAVOX 02004, 02204
MANHATTAN 01404, 03804,
04204
MARANTZ
00704
MEDIASAT
03104
MEMOREX
02204
METRONIC
00004
MITSUBISHI 02304
MOTOROLA 03504
MYRYAD
00704
NEXT LEVEL 03504
NOKIA
01404, 02104,
02404, 04904,
05704, 06804
OCTALTV
03704

ORBITECH
PACE

04504
01404, 03004,
05204, 06604
PANASONIC 00904, 01904,
03004, 06504
PANDA
01404
PAYSAT
02204
PHILIPS
00204, 00704,
01404, 02004,
02204, 02304,
03104, 04104,
05104, 06904
PIONEER
03104
PROMAX
01404
PROSCAN
01204, 01504
RADIOLA
00704
RADIOSHACK 03504
RADIX
01304
RCA
00404, 01204,
01504, 03204
RFT
00704
SABRE
01404
SAGEM
02904, 04804,
05904
SAMSUNG
03804, 04604,
06004, 06204
SAT CONTROL06404
SATSTATION 04204
SCHWAIGER 04704
SEEMANN
01304
SIEMENS
00604
SKY
03004, 03304,
05204
SM ELECTRONIC
05404
SONY
01704, 03004,
06704
STAR CHOICE 03504
STRONG
06404
TANTEC
01404
TECHNISAT 04404, 04504
TELESTAR
04504
THOMSON
01404, 03104,
03904, 06104
TOPFIELD
05504
TOSHIBA
02304, 02704,
06904
TPS
02904, 05904
ULTIMATETV 01204, 01704
UNIDEN
02004, 02204
UNIVERSUM 00604
VENTANA
00704
WISI
00604, 01304,
01404
XSAT
00104
ZEHNDER
04004
ZENITH
03304

CD PLAYER
AIWA
00605
ARCAM
00605
AUDIO RESEARCH
00605
AUDIO TON 00605
AUDIOLAB
00605
AUDIOMECA 00605
CAIRN
00605
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS
00205
CARVER
00605, 00805
CYRUS
00605
DENON
01005
DKK
00005
DMX ELECTRONICS
00605
DYNAMIC BASS
00805
EMERSON
00905
FISHER
00805

GENEXXA
00305, 00905
GOODMANS 00905
GRUNDIG
00605
HARMAN/KARDON
00605, 00705
HITACHI
00305
JVC
00505
KENWOOD
00105, 00405
KRELL
00605
LINN
00605
LXI
00905
MAGNAVOX 00605, 00905
MARANTZ
00205, 00605
MATSUI
00605
MCS
00205
MEMOREX
00905
MERIDIAN
00605
MICROMEGA 00605
MIRO
00005
MISSION
00605
MYRYAD
00605
NAD
00005
NAIM
00605
NSM
00605
OPTIMUS
00005, 00305,
00405, 00805,
00905
PANASONIC 00205
PHILIPS
00605
PIONEER
00305, 00905
POLK AUDIO 00605
PROTON
00605
QED
00605
QUAD
00605
QUASAR
00205
RCA
00305, 00805,
00905
REALISTIC
00805
REVOX
00605
ROTEL
00605
SAE
00605
SANSUI
00605, 00905
SANYO
00805
SCOTT
00905
SEARS
00905
SHARP
00405
SIMAUDIO
00605
SONIC FRONTIERS
00605
SONY
00005
SYMPHONIC 00905
TAG MCLAREN
00605
TANDY
00305
TECHNICS
00205
THORENS
00605
THULE
00605
UNIVERSUM 00605
VICTOR
00505
WARDS
00605
YAMAHA
01105, 01205

CD RECORDER
KENWOOD
MARANTZ
PHILIPS
YAMAHA

01305
01305
01305
01405

BLU-RAY/DVD PLAYER
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
02806
ALBA
02606
AMSTRAD
02306
APEX DIGITAL02106, 02606,
03006, 03506,
03606, 03706,
04106
BLAUPINKT 02606

BLUE PARADE01006
BUSH
02306
CENTREX
02106
CLATRONIC 03406
CYBERHOME 02406
DAEWOO
03206, 03306
DANSAI
03206
DECCA
03206
DENON
00006
DIAMOND
03106
DIGITREX
02106
DVD2000
00206
EMERSON
01206
ENTERPRISE 01206
FISHER
02006
GE
00306, 02606
GO VIDEO
02506
GOLDSTAR 02906, 04906
GRADIENTE 01806
GREENHILL 02606
GRUNDIG
00706
HITACHI
01106, 01507,
01906
HITEKER
02106
JVC
00906, 01306
KENWOOD
00006, 00606
KLH
02606
KOSS
01806
LG
02906
LIMIT
03106
MAGNAVOX 00106, 02206
MARANTZ
00706
MEMOREX
03806
MICO
02706
MICROSOFT 00306
MINTEK
02606
MITSUBISHI 00206
MUSTEK
02806
NESA
02606
ONKYO
00106, 04806
ORITRON
01806
PALSONIC
02106
PANASONIC 00006, 00007,
00107, 00207,
01606, 04206,
05006
PHILIPS
00106, 00706,
00807, 01706,
03906, 05206
PIONEER
00406, 00407,
00507, 00607,
01006, 01506,
01606, 05306
POLK AUDIO 00706
PROSCAN
00306
QWESTAR
01806
RCA
00306, 01006,
02606, 04806
ROTEL
01306
SAMSUNG
01106, 04506
SANYO
02006
SHARP
01207, 01307,
01406
SHERWOOD 03206
SHINSONIC 00506
SLIM ART
03306
SM ELECTRONIC
02806
SONY
00506, 00907,
01007, 01107,
04006, 05106
SYLVANIA
02206
TATUNG
03206
TEAC
01006, 02606
TECHNICS
00006
THETA DIGITAL
01006
THOMSON
00306
TOSHIBA
00106, 00307,
04606, 04806,

05406
URBAN CONCEPTS
00106
VICTOR
01407
XBOX
00306
YAMAHA
00006, 00706,
00707, 00806,
04306, 04406,
04706
ZENITH
00106, 01206,
02906
ZEUS
03306

LD PLAYER
CARVER
00108
DENON
00008
MARANTZ
00108
MITSUBISHI 00008
NAD
00008
NAGSMI
00008
OPTIMUS
00008
PHILIPS
00108
PIONEER
00008
SALORA
00108
SONY
00208
TELEFUNKEN 00008
YAMAHA
00308

MD RECORDER
KENWOOD
ONKYO
SHARP
SONY
YAMAHA

00109
00309
00209
00009
00409, 00509,
00609

RECEIVER (TUNER)
ADC
AIWA

00710
00410, 01210,
03610, 03910,
04410
ALCO
03810
ANAM
04310
APEX DIGITAL01810
AUDIOLAB
01510
AUDIOTRONIC01510
AUDIOVOX
03810
BOSE
01610
CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS
03310
CAPETRONIC 00710
CARVER
01210, 01510
CENTREX
01810
DENON
03210
FERGUSON 00710
FINE ARTS
01510
GRUNDIG
01510
HARMAN/KARDON
00210, 02610
INTEGRA
00310, 02510
JBL
00210, 02710
JVC
00110, 00710,
03410, 04110
KENWOOD
01010, 03010
KLH
03810, 04010
MAGNAVOX 00710, 01210,
01510, 02110
MARANTZ
00010, 01210,
01510, 02410
MCS
00010
MICROMEGA 01510
MUSICMAGIC 01210
MYRYAD
01510
NAD
00610
NORCENT
03710
ONKYO
00310, 00810,
02510

OPTIMUS
PANASONIC

00710, 00910
00010, 02310,
04210, 04710
PHILIPS
01210, 01510,
01910, 02010,
02110, 02210,
02410
PIONEER
00710, 00910,
03510
POLK AUDIO 02410
PROSCAN
01710
QUASAR
00010
RCA
00710, 00910,
01710, 03810,
04310
SABA
00710
SANSUI
01210
SCHNEIDER 00710
SONY
00410, 01110,
01310, 04510,
04610
STEREOPHONICS
00910
SUNFIRE
03010
TEAC
03810
TECHNICS
00010, 02810,
02910, 04210
TELEFUNKEN 00710
THOMSON
01710
THORENS
01510
UHER
00710
VENTURER 03810
VICTOR
00110
WARDS
00410
YAMAHA
00510, 01410,
03110, 04810,
05510, 05610,
05710, 05810,
05910, 06010
YAMAHA (iPOD)
05310
YAMAHA (NET)
05410
YAMAHA (TUNER ID1)
04910
YAMAHA (TUNER ID2)
05010
YAMAHA (XM ID1)
05110
YAMAHA (XM ID2)
05210

TAPE DECK
AIWA
00111
CARVER
00111
GRUNDIG
00111
HARMAN/KARDON
00111
MAGNAVOX 00111
MARANTZ
00111
MYRYAD
00111
OPTIMUS
00011
PHILIPS
00111
PIONEER
00011
POLK AUDIO 00111
RCA
00011
REVOX
00111
SANSUI
00111
SONY
00211
THORENS
00111
WARDS
00011
YAMAHA
00311, 00411

Notice for Windows Media DRM
The Certified For Windows Vista logo, Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Content providers are using the digital rights management technology for Windows Media contained in this device (WMDRM) to protect the integrity of
their content (Secure Content) so that their intellectual property, including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated.
This device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure Content (WM-DRM Software).
If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this device has been compromised, owners of Secure Content (Secure Content Owners) may request that
Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM Software’s right to acquire new licenses to copy, display and/or play Secure Content. Revocation does not alter the WMDRM Software’s ability to play unprotected content. A list of revoked WM-DRM Software is sent to your device whenever you
download a license for Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC. Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license, also download revocation list
onto your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners.

Note concernant Windows Media DRM
Le logo Certified For Windows Vista logo, Windows Media et le logo Windows sont des marques commerciales ou des marques déposées de Microsoft
Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d’autres pays.
Les fournisseurs de contenu ont recours à la technologie de gestion des droits numériques pour Windows Media (“WM-DRM” pour Windows Media
Digital Rights Management) contenue dans le présent appareil pour protéger l’intégrité de leur contenu (le “Contenu Sécurisé ” ou Secure Content en
anglais) et ce afin d’empêcher toute atteinte à leurs droits de propriété intellectuelle, y compris leurs droits d’auteur, sur ce contenu. Cet appareil utilise le
logiciel WM-DRM pour lire du Contenu Sécurisé (“le Logiciel WM-DRM”). Si la sécurité du Logiciel WM-DRM dans le présent appareil a été violée,
Microsoft peut révoquer (soit de son propre chef soit à la demande des propriétaires de Contenu Sécurisé (“Propriétaires de Contenu Sécurisé”)) le droit
du Logiciel WM-DRM à acquérir de nouvelles autorisations de copier, afficher et/ou lire du Contenu Sécurisé. La révocation n’a aucune incidence sur la
capacité du Logiciel WM-DRM à lire du contenu non protégé. Une liste des Logiciels WM-DRM révoqués est envoyée sur votre appareil chaque fois que
vous téléchargez à partir d’Internet ou d’un PC une licence de Contenu Sécurisé. Microsoft peut également, en association avec cette licence, télécharger
des listes de révocation sur votre appareil au nom des Propriétaires de Contenu Sécurisé.

Information about software
This product uses the following software.
For information (copyright, etc) about each software, read the original sentences stated below.
■

About The Independent JPEG Group’s JPEG
software

The Independent JPEG Group’s JPEG software
README for release 6b of 27-Mar-1998
This distribution contains the sixth public release of the Independent JPEG Group’s free
JPEG software. You are welcome to redistribute this software and to use it for any
purpose, subject to the conditions under LEGAL ISSUES, below.
Serious users of this software (particularly those incorporating it into larger programs)
should contact IJG at jpeg-info@uunet.uu.net to be added to our electronic mailing list.
Mailing list members are notified of updates and have a chance to participate in
technical discussions, etc.
This software is the work of Tom Lane, Philip Gladstone, Jim Boucher, Lee Crocker,
Julian Minguillon, Luis Ortiz, George Phillips, Davide Rossi, Guido Vollbeding, Ge’
Weijers, and other members of the Independent JPEG Group.
IJG is not affiliated with the official ISO JPEG standards committee.

DOCUMENTATION ROADMAP
This file contains the following sections:
OVERVIEW
LEGAL ISSUES
REFERENCES
ARCHIVE LOCATIONS
RELATED SOFTWARE
FILE FORMAT WARS
TO DO

General description of JPEG and the IJG software.
Copyright, lack of warranty, terms of distribution.
Where to learn more about JPEG.
Where to find newer versions of this software.
Other stuff you should get.
Software *not* to get.
Plans for future IJG releases.

Other documentation files in the distribution are:
User documentation:
install.doc
usage.doc
*.1
wizard.doc
change.log

How to configure and install the IJG software.
Usage instructions for cjpeg, djpeg, jpegtran, rdjpgcom,
and wrjpgcom.
Unix-style man pages for programs (same info as
usage.doc).
Advanced usage instructions for JPEG wizards only.
Version-to-version change highlights.

Programmer and internal documentation:
libjpeg.doc
example.c
structure.doc
filelist.doc
coderules.doc

How to use the JPEG library in your own programs.
Sample code for calling the JPEG library.
Overview of the JPEG library’s internal structure.
Road map of IJG files.
Coding style rules --- please read if you contribute code.

found in the JPEG FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) article. See ARCHIVE
LOCATIONS below to find out where to obtain the FAQ article.
If you want to understand how the JPEG code works, we suggest reading one or more of
the REFERENCES, then looking at the documentation files (in roughly the order listed)
before diving into the code.

OVERVIEW
This package contains C software to implement JPEG image compression and
decompression. JPEG (pronounced “jay-peg”) is a standardized compression method for
full-color and gray-scale images. JPEG is intended for compressing “real-world” scenes;
line drawings, cartoons and other non-realistic images are not its strong suit. JPEG is
lossy, meaning that the output image is not exactly identical to the input image. Hence
you must not use JPEG if you have to have identical output bits. However, on typical
photographic images, very good compression levels can be obtained with no visible
change, and remarkably high compression levels are possible if you can tolerate a lowquality image. For more details, see the references, or just experiment with various
compression settings.
This software implements JPEG baseline, extended-sequential, and progressive
compression processes. Provision is made for supporting all variants of these processes,
although some uncommon parameter settings aren’t implemented yet. For legal reasons,
we are not distributing code for the arithmetic-coding variants of JPEG; see LEGAL
ISSUES. We have made no provision for supporting the hierarchical or lossless
processes defined in the standard.
We provide a set of library routines for reading and writing JPEG image files, plus two
sample applications “cjpeg” and “djpeg”, which use the library to perform conversion
between JPEG and some other popular image file formats. The library is intended to be
reused in other applications.
In order to support file conversion and viewing software, we have included considerable
functionality beyond the bare JPEG coding/decoding capability; for example, the color
quantization modules are not strictly part of JPEG decoding, but they are essential for
output to colormapped file formats or colormapped displays. These extra functions can
be compiled out of the library if not required for a particular application. We have also
included “jpegtran”, a utility for lossless transcoding between different JPEG processes,
and “rdjpgcom” and “wrjpgcom”, two simple applications for inserting and extracting
textual comments in JFIF files.
The emphasis in designing this software has been on achieving portability and
flexibility, while also making it fast enough to be useful. In particular, the software is not
intended to be read as a tutorial on JPEG. (See the REFERENCES section for
introductory material.) Rather, it is intended to be reliable, portable, industrial-strength
code. We do not claim to have achieved that goal in every aspect of the software, but we
strive for it.
We welcome the use of this software as a component of commercial products. No
royalty is required, but we do ask for an acknowledgement in product documentation, as
described under LEGAL ISSUES.

LEGAL ISSUES
In plain English:

Please read at least the files install.doc and usage.doc. Useful information can also be

We don’t promise that this software works. (But if you find any bugs, please let us
know!)

You can use this software for whatever you want. You don’t have to pay us.

You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it in a program, you
must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you’ve used the IJG
code.

In legalese:
The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either express or implied, with
respect to this software, its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or fitness for a particular
purpose. This software is provided “AS IS”, and you, its user, assume the entire risk as
to its quality and accuracy.
This software is copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane.
All Rights Reserved except as specified below.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software (or
portions thereof) for any purpose, without fee, subject to these conditions:
(1) If any part of the source code for this software is distributed, then this README file
must be included, with this copyright and no-warranty notice unaltered; and any
additions, deletions, or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in
accompanying documentation.
(2) If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying documentation must
state that “this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG
Group”.
(3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user accepts full
responsibility for any undesirable consequences; the authors accept NO LIABILITY
for damages of any kind.
These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the IJG code, not just
to the unmodified library. If you use our work, you ought to acknowledge us.
Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author’s name or company name in
advertising or publicity relating to this software or products derived from it. This
software may be referred to only as “the Independent JPEG Group’s software”.
We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis of commercial
products, provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product
vendor.
ansi2knr.c is included in this distribution by permission of L. Peter Deutsch, sole
proprietor of its copyright holder, Aladdin Enterprises of Menlo Park, CA.
ansi2knr.c is NOT covered by the above copyright and conditions, but instead by the
usual distribution terms of the Free Software Foundation; principally, that you must
include source code if you redistribute it. (See the file ansi2knr.c for full details.)
However, since ansi2knr.c is not needed as part of any program generated from the IJG
code, this does not limit you more than the foregoing paragraphs do.
The Unix configuration script “configure” was produced with GNU Autoconf. It is
copyright by the Free Software Foundation but is freely distributable. The same holds
for its supporting scripts (config.guess, config.sub, ltconfig, ltmain.sh). Another support
script, install-sh, is copyright by M.I.T. but is also freely distributable.
It appears that the arithmetic coding option of the JPEG spec is covered by patents
owned by IBM, AT&T, and Mitsubishi. Hence arithmetic coding cannot legally be used
without obtaining one or more licenses. For this reason, support for arithmetic coding
has been removed from the free JPEG software. (Since arithmetic coding provides only
a marginal gain over the unpatented Huffman mode, it is unlikely that very many
implementations will support it.) So far as we are aware, there are no patent restrictions
on the remaining code.
The IJG distribution formerly included code to read and write GIF files. To avoid
entanglement with the Unisys LZW patent, GIF reading support has been removed
altogether, and the GIF writer has been simplified to produce “uncompressed GIFs”.
This technique does not use the LZW algorithm; the resulting GIF files are larger than
usual, but are readable by all standard GIF decoders.
We are required to state that
“The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright property of CompuServe
Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of CompuServe Incorporated.”

REFERENCES
We highly recommend reading one or more of these references before trying to
understand the innards of the JPEG software.
The best short technical introduction to the JPEG compression algorithm is
Wallace, Gregory K. “The JPEG Still Picture Compression Standard”,
Communications of the ACM, April 1991 (vol. 34 no. 4), pp. 30-44.
(Adjacent articles in that issue discuss MPEG motion picture compression, applications
of JPEG, and related topics.) If you don’t have the CACM issue handy, a PostScript file
containing a revised version of Wallace’s article is available at ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/
jpeg/wallace.ps.gz. The file (actually a preprint for an article that appeared in IEEE
Trans. Consumer Electronics) omits the sample images that appeared in CACM, but it
includes corrections and some added material. Note: the Wallace article is copyright
ACM and IEEE, and it may not be used for commercial purposes.
A somewhat less technical, more leisurely introduction to JPEG can be found in “The
Data Compression Book” by Mark Nelson and Jean-loup Gailly, published by M&T
Books (New York), 2nd ed. 1996, ISBN 1-55851-434-1. This book provides good
explanations and example C code for a multitude of compression methods including

JPEG. It is an excellent source if you are comfortable reading C code but don’t know
much about data compression in general. The book’s JPEG sample code is far from
industrial-strength, but when you are ready to look at a full implementation, you’ve got
one here...
The best full description of JPEG is the textbook “JPEG Still Image Data Compression
Standard” by William B. Pennebaker and Joan L. Mitchell, published by Van Nostrand
Reinhold, 1993, ISBN 0-442-01272-1. Price US$59.95, 638 pp.
The book includes the complete text of the ISO JPEG standards (DIS 10918-1 and draft
DIS 10918-2). This is by far the most complete exposition of JPEG in existence, and we
highly recommend it.
The JPEG standard itself is not available electronically; you must order a paper copy
through ISO or ITU. (Unless you feel a need to own a certified official copy, we
recommend buying the Pennebaker and Mitchell book instead; it’s much cheaper and
includes a great deal of useful explanatory material.)
In the USA, copies of the standard may be ordered from ANSI Sales at (212)642-4900,
or from Global Engineering Documents at (800) 854-7179. (ANSI doesn’t take credit
card orders, but Global does.) It’s not cheap: as of 1992, ANSI was charging $95 for Part
1 and $47 for Part 2, plus 7% shipping/handling. The standard is divided into two parts,
Part 1 being the actual specification, while Part 2 covers compliance testing methods.
Part 1 is titled “Digital Compression and Coding of Continuous-tone Still Images, Part
1: Requirements and guidelines” and has document numbers ISO/IEC IS 10918-1, ITUT T.81. Part 2 is titled “Digital Compression and Coding of Continuous-tone Still
Images, Part 2: Compliance testing” and has document numbers ISO/IEC IS 10918-2,
ITU-T T.83.
Some extensions to the original JPEG standard are defined in JPEG Part 3, a newer ISO
standard numbered ISO/IEC IS 10918-3 and ITU-T T.84. IJG currently does not support
any Part 3 extensions.
The JPEG standard does not specify all details of an interchangeable file format. For the
omitted details we follow the “JFIF” conventions, revision 1.02. A copy of the JFIF spec
is available from:
Literature Department
C-Cube Microsystems, Inc.
1778 McCarthy Blvd.
Milpitas, CA 95035
phone (408) 944-6300, fax (408) 944-6314
A PostScript version of this document is available by FTP at
ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jfif.ps.gz. There is also a plain text version at
ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jfif.txt.gz, but it is missing the figures.
The TIFF 6.0 file format specification can be obtained by FTP from ftp://ftp.sgi.com/
graphics/tiff/TIFF6.ps.gz. The JPEG incorporation scheme found in the TIFF 6.0 spec
of 3-June-92 has a number of serious problems. IJG does not recommend use of the
TIFF 6.0 design (TIFF Compression tag 6). Instead, we recommend the JPEG design
proposed by TIFF Technical Note #2 (Compression tag 7). Copies of this Note can be
obtained from ftp.sgi.com or from ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/. It is expected that the
next revision of the TIFF spec will replace the 6.0 JPEG design with the Note’s design.
Although IJG’s own code does not support TIFF/JPEG, the free libtiff library uses our
library to implement TIFF/JPEG per the Note. libtiff is available from
ftp://ftp.sgi.com/graphics/tiff/.

ARCHIVE LOCATIONS
The “official” archive site for this software is ftp.uu.net (Internet address 192.48.96.9).
The most recent released version can always be found there in directory graphics/jpeg.
This particular version will be archived as
ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jpegsrc.v6b.tar.gz. If you don’t have direct Internet access,
UUNET’s archives are also available via UUCP; contact help@uunet.uu.net for
information on retrieving files that way.
Numerous Internet sites maintain copies of the UUNET files. However, only ftp.uu.net
is guaranteed to have the latest official version.
You can also obtain this software in DOS-compatible “zip” archive format from the
SimTel archives (ftp://ftp.simtel.net/pub/simtelnet/msdos/graphics/), or on CompuServe
in the Graphics Support forum (GO CIS:GRAPHSUP), library 12 “JPEG Tools”. Again,
these versions may sometimes lag behind the ftp.uu.net release.
The JPEG FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) article is a useful source of general
information about JPEG. It is updated constantly and therefore is not included in this
distribution. The FAQ is posted every two weeks to Usenet newsgroups
comp.graphics.misc, news.answers, and other groups. It is available on the World Wide
Web at http://www.faqs.org/faqs/jpeg-faq/ and other news.answers archive sites,
including the official news.answers archive at rtfm.mit.edu: ftp://rtfm.mit.edu/pub/
usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/.
If you don’t have Web or FTP access, send e-mail to mail-server@rtfm.mit.edu with
body
send usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/part1
send usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/part2

RELATED SOFTWARE
Numerous viewing and image manipulation programs now support JPEG. (Quite a few
of them use this library to do so.) The JPEG FAQ described above lists some of the more
popular free and shareware viewers, and tells where to obtain them on Internet.
If you are on a Unix machine, we highly recommend Jef Poskanzer’s free PBMPLUS
software, which provides many useful operations on PPM-format image files. In
particular, it can convert PPM images to and from a wide range of other formats, thus
making cjpeg/djpeg considerably more useful. The latest version is distributed by the

NetPBM group, and is available from numerous sites, notably ftp://wuarchive.wustl.edu/
graphics/graphics/packages/NetPBM/.
Unfortunately PBMPLUS/NETPBM is not nearly as portable as the IJG software is; you
are likely to have difficulty making it work on any non-Unix machine.
A different free JPEG implementation, written by the PVRG group at Stanford, is
available from ftp://havefun.stanford.edu/pub/jpeg/. This program is designed for
research and experimentation rather than production use; it is slower, harder to use, and
less portable than the IJG code, but it is easier to read and modify. Also, the PVRG code
supports lossless JPEG, which we do not. (On the other hand, it doesn’t do progressive
JPEG.)

Tom Lane
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997
Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88,
with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors:
John Bowler
Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell
Magnus Holmgren
Greg Roelofs
Tom Tanner

FILE FORMAT WARS
Some JPEG programs produce files that are not compatible with our library. The root of
the problem is that the ISO JPEG committee failed to specify a concrete file format.
Some vendors “filled in the blanks” on their own, creating proprietary formats that no
one else could read. (For example, none of the early commercial JPEG implementations
for the Macintosh were able to exchange compressed files.)
The file format we have adopted is called JFIF (see REFERENCES). This format has
been agreed to by a number of major commercial JPEG vendors, and it has become the
de facto standard. JFIF is a minimal or “low end” representation. We recommend the use
of TIFF/JPEG (TIFF revision 6.0 as modified by TIFF Technical Note #2) for “high
end” applications that need to record a lot of additional data about an image. TIFF/JPEG
is fairly new and not yet widely supported, unfortunately.
The upcoming JPEG Part 3 standard defines a file format called SPIFF. SPIFF is
interoperable with JFIF, in the sense that most JFIF decoders should be able to read the
most common variant of SPIFF. SPIFF has some technical advantages over JFIF, but its
major claim to fame is simply that it is an official standard rather than an informal one.
At this point it is unclear whether SPIFF will supersede JFIF or whether JFIF will
remain the de-facto standard. IJG intends to support SPIFF once the standard is frozen,
but we have not decided whether it should become our default output format or not. (In
any case, our decoder will remain capable of reading JFIF indefinitely.)
Various proprietary file formats incorporating JPEG compression also exist. We have
little or no sympathy for the existence of these formats. Indeed, one of the original
reasons for developing this free software was to help force convergence on common,
open format standards for JPEG files. Don’t use a proprietary file format!

TO DO
The major thrust for v7 will probably be improvement of visual quality. The current
method for scaling the quantization tables is known not to be very good at low Q values.
We also intend to investigate block boundary smoothing, “poor man’s variable
quantization”, and other means of improving quality-vs-file-size performance without
sacrificing compatibility.
In future versions, we are considering supporting some of the upcoming JPEG Part 3
extensions --- principally, variable quantization and the SPIFF file format.
As always, speeding things up is of great interest.
Please send bug reports, offers of help, etc. to jpeg-info@uunet.uu.net.

■

About PNG Reference Library

libpng versions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.2.29, May 8, 2008, are Copyright (c)
2004, 2006-2008 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same
disclaimer and license as libpng-1.2.5 with the following individual added to the list of
Contributing Authors
Cosmin Truta
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 - October 3, 2002, are Copyright (c)
2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer
and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Eric S. Raymond
Gilles Vollant
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or
against infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill
any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided with all faults,
and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with
the user.
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c)
1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same
disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors:

libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995,
1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.
For the purposes of this copyright and license, “Contributing Authors” is defined as the
following set of individuals:
Andreas Dilger
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
The PNG Reference Library is supplied “AS IS”. The Contributing Authors and Group
42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitation, the
warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors
and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary,
or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library,
even if advised of the possibility of such damage.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this source code, or
portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, subject to the following restrictions:
1.

The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented.

Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented
as being the original source.

This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered
source distribution.

The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without fee, and
encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format
in commercial products. If you use this source code in a product, acknowledgment is not
required but would be appreciated.

■

About zlib Library

Copyright notice:
(C) 1995-2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided ‘as-is’, without any express or implied warranty. In no event
will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including
commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following
restrictions:
1.

The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that
you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an
acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not
required.

Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original software.

This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly
jloup@gzip.org

Mark Adler
madler@alumni.caltech.edu

If you use the zlib library in a product, we would appreciate *not* receiving lengthy
legal documents to sign. The sources are provided for free but without warranty of any
kind. The library has been entirely written by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; it does
not include third-party code.
If you redistribute modified sources, we would appreciate that you include in the file
ChangeLog history information documenting your changes. Please read the FAQ for
more information on the distribution of modified source versions.

Information sur le logiciel
Ce produit utilise le logiciel suivant.
Pour toutes information (droit d’auteur, etc.) de chaque logiciel, veuillez lire les explications mentionnées ci-dessous.
■

Au sujet du logiciel JPEG du groupe indépendant
JPEG

Le logiciel JPEG du groupe indépendant JPEG
README for release 6b of 27-Mar-1998

Cette distribution contient la sixième sortie publique du logiciel libre JPEG du groupe
Indépendant JPEG. Vous êtes libres de redistribuer ce logiciel et de l’utiliser pour
n’importe quel but, en respectant les conditions de la rubrique FINS JURIDIQUES,
mentionnées ci-dessous.
Les utilisateurs sérieux de ce logiciel (particulièrement ceux qui l’incorporent à de plus

grands programmes) devraient entrer en contact avec IJG à jpeg-info@uunet.uu.net afin
d‘être ajouté à notre liste de diffusion électronique.
Les membres de liste de diffusion sont notifiés de la mise à jour et ont une chance de
participer aux discussions techniques, etc.

pas destiné à être lu comme un cours de travaux dirigés sur la JPEG. (Voir la section de
RÉFÉRENCES pour la matière d’introduction.) Il est plutôt destiné à être fiable,
portable, le code de force industrielle. Nous ne prétendons pas atteindre ce but dans
chacun des aspects de ce logiciel, mais nous faisons de note mieux.

Ce logiciel est le travail de Tom Lane, Philip Gladstone, Jim Boucher, Lee Crocker,
Julian Minguillon, Luis Ortiz, George Phillips, Davide Rossi, Guido Vollbeding, Ge’
Weijers et d’autres membres du groupe Indépendant JPEG.

Nous accueillons l’utilisation de ce logiciel comme un composant de produits
commerciaux. Aucune redevance n’est exigée, mais nous demandons vraiment une
reconnaissance dans la documentation du produit, comme décrit sous les FINS
JURIDIQUES.

IJG n’est pas affilié avec le comité officiel des normes JPEG ISO

ROADMAP DE DOCUMENTATION
Ce fichier contient les sections suivantes :
APERÇU
FINS JURIDIQUES
RÉFÉRENCES
SITE DES ARCHIVE
LOGICIEL COMPLÉMENTAIRE
GUERRES DE FORMAT DE FICHIER
A RÉALISER

Description générale de JPEG et de logiciel IJG.
Droit d’auteur, manque de garantie, termes de distribution.
Où apprendre plus sur le JPEG.
Où trouver les versions plus récentes de ce logiciel.
D’autres trucs que vous devriez avoir.
Le logiciel à ne pas avoir.
Plans pour les prochaines versions IJG.

FINS JURIDIQUES
Dans des termes clairs :
1.

Nous ne promettons pas que ce logiciel fonctionne. (Mais si vous trouvez
n’importe quels défauts veuillez nous le communiquer!)

Vous pouvez utiliser ce logiciel pour ce que vous voulez. Vous ne devez pas nous
payer.

Vous ne pouvez pas simuler que vous avez écrit ce logiciel. Si vous l’utilisez dans
un programme, vous devez reconnaître quelque part dans votre documentation que
vous avez utilisé le code d’IJG.

Dans le Jargon juridique:
D’autres fichiers de documentation en distribution sont :
Manuel d’utilisateur :
Install.doc
Usage.doc
*.1
Wizard.doc
Change.log

Comment configurer et installer le logiciel IJG.
Instructions d’utilisation pour cjpeg, djpeg, jpegtran,
rdjpgcom et wrjpgcom.
Les manpages style unix pour des programmes (même
information qu’usage.doc).
Instructions d’utilisation Avancées uniquement pour le
winzard JPEG.
Changement des points culminants d’une version à une
autre.

Programmeur et documentation interne :
Libjpeg.doc
Exemple.c
Structure.doc
Filelist.doc
Coderules.doc

Comment utiliser la bibliothèque JPEG dans vos propres
programmes.
Exemple de code pour appeler la bibliothèque JPEG.
Aperçu de la structure interne de la bibliothèque JPEG.
Plan des fichiers IJG.
Règles du mode de codage --- veuillez le lire seulement si
vous contribuez au code.

Les auteurs n’effectuent AUCUNE GARANTIE ou représentation pour un but
particulier, que ça soit express ou impliqué, en ce qui concerne ce logiciel, sa qualité,
exactitude, valeur commerciale, ou justesse. On fournit ce logiciel “tel quel” et vous, son
utilisateur, assumez tout le risque quant à sa qualité et exactitude.
Ce logiciel est le droit d’auteur (C) 1991-1998,
Thomas G. Ruelle (voie). Tous droits réservés sauf comme spécifié ci-dessous.
On accorde par la présente que la permission d’utiliser, copier, modifier et distribuer ce
logiciel (ou des parties de celui-ci) de façon gratuite, pour n’importe quel but, est
soumise aux conditions suivantes :
(1) Si n’importe quelle partie du code source est distribuée pour ce logiciel, donc ce
fichier de README doit être inclus, avec cet droit d’auteur et pas de notice de
garantie inchangeable; et n’importe quels compléments, effacements, ou des
changements des fichiers originaux doivent être clairement indiqués dans la
documentation jointe.
(2) Si seulement le code exécutable est distribué, donc la documentation jointe doit
déclarer que “ce logiciel est basé en partie sur le travail du Groupe Indépendant
JPEG”.
(3) On accorde la permission d’utilisation de ce logiciel seulement si l’utilisateur
accepte pleinement la responsabilité de toutes les conséquences indésirables; les
auteurs n’acceptent AUCUNE RESPONSABILITÉ pour n’importe quels dégâts.

Lisez s’il vous plaît au moins les fichiers install.doc et usage.doc. Des informations
utiles peuvent aussi être trouvées dans la rubrique FAQ du JPEG (Foire aux questions).
Voir SITE D’ARCHIVES ci dessous afin de savoir où trouver la rubrique FAQ (de
FOIRE AUX QUESTIONS).

Ces conditions s’appliquent à n’importe quel logiciel tiré de ou basé sur le code d’IJG,
pas seulement à la bibliothèque non modifiée. Si vous utilisez notre travail, vous devez
nous reconnaître.

Si vous voulez comprendre comment le code JPEG fonctionne, nous vous suggérons de
lire une ou plusieurs des RÉFÉRENCES, ensuite voir les fichiers de documentation
(dans l’ordre inscrit) avant que vous vous inondiez dans le code.

On n’accorde pas de permission d’utilisation du nom d’aucun auteur IJG ou la raison
sociale pour la publicité ou la publicité sur ce logiciel ou d’autres produits tirés de celuici. Ce logiciel peut être mentionné seulement comme “le logiciel du Groupe
Indépendant JPEG”.

APERÇU
Ce set contient le logiciel C pour mettre en oeuvre la compression et la décompression
d’image JPEG. La JPEG (prononcée “jay-peg”) est une méthode de compression
standardisée pour des images tout en couleurs et des d’échelle de gris. La JPEG est
destiné à compresser des scènes “réalistes”; des dessins de ligne, dessins animés et
d’autres images non-réalistes qui n’est pas sa préoccupation principale. La JPEG est
lossy, signifiant que l’image dde producation n’est pas exactement identique à l’image
d’origine. Donc vous ne devez pas utiliser JPEG si vous voulez avoir des morceaux de
production identiques. Cependant, sur des images photographiques typiques, de très
bons niveaux de compression peuvent être obtenus sans changement visible et de hauts
niveaux de compression remarquable sont possibles si vous pouvez accepter une image
de qualité basse. Pour plus d’informations, voir les références, ou expérimentez juste
avec des fixations de compression diverses.
Ce logiciel met en fonction la JPEG de base, des processus de compression séquentielsétendues et progressifs. La fourniture est faite pour soutenir toutes les variétés de ces
processus, bien que quelques fixations de paramètre rares ne soient pas encore mises en
oeuvre. Pour des raisons légales, nous ne distribuons pas de code pour les versions
codage arithmétique de JPEG; voir FINS JURIDIQUES. Nous n’avons fait aucune
fourniture pour soutenir les processus hiérarchiques ou les processus sans perte définis
dans la norme.
Nous fournissons un set de routines de bibliothèque pour lire et écrire des fichiers
d’image JPEG, plus deux applications types “cjpeg” et “djpeg”, que la bibliothèque
utilise afin d’exécuter la conversion entre la JPEG et quelques autres formats de fichier
d’image populaires. La bibliothèque peut être réutilisée dans d’autres applications.
Afin de soutenir la conversion de fichier et le logiciel d’observation, nous avons inclus la
fonctionnalité considérable au-delà de la capacité codage/décodage du JPEG nu; par
exemple, les modules de quantification colorés ne sont pas forcément une partie de
décodage de JPEG, mais ils sont essentiels pour la production afin de colorer les formats
de fichier dressés ou de colorer des écrans dressés. Ces fonctions supplémentaires
peuvent être compilées de la bibliothèque si ce n’est pas pour une application.
particulière. Nous avons aussi inclus “jpegtran”, une utilité pour transcodage sans perte
entre des processus JPEG différents et “rdjpgcom” et “wrjpgcom”, deux applications
simples pour insérer et extraire des commentaires textuels dans des fichiers JFIF.
L’accent dans la conception de ce logiciel a été porté sur la réalisation de la portabilité et
la flexibilité, en le faisant aussi assez vite pour être utile. Notamment le logiciel n’est

Nous permettons et encourageons spécialement l’utilisation de ce logiciel comme la
base des produits commerciaux, à condition que toute la garantie ou des réclamations de
responsabilité soient assumés par le vendeur de produit.
Ansi2knr.c est inclus dans cette distribution selon la permission de L. Peter Deutsch,
propriétaire unique de son droit d’auteur, les Entreprises Aladdin de Menlo Park, CA.
Ansi2knr.c n’est pas couvert par les susdits droits d’auteur et les conditions, mais par les
termes de distribution habituels de la Fondation pour le logiciel libre; surtout, que vous
deviez inclure le code source si vous le redistribuez. (Voir le fichier ansi2knr.c pour plus
de détails.)
Cependant, depuis que ansi2knr.c n’est plus nécessaire comme partie d’aucun
programme produit par le code IJG, cela ne vous limite pas plus que les paragraphes
précédents.
Le scénario de configuration Unix “configure” a été produit avec le GNU Autoconf.
C’est le droit d’auteur par la Fondation pour le logiciel libre, mais est librement
distribuable. Le même se tient pour ses scénarios de soutien (config.guess, config.sub,
ltconfig, ltmain.sh). Un autre scénario d’assistance, install-sh, est le droit d’auteur par
M.I.T., mais il est aussi librement distribuable.
Il semble que l’option de codage arithmétique des spécifications JPEG est couverte par
des brevets appartenant à IBM, AT*T et Mitsubishi. Par contre le codage d’arithmétique
ne peut pas légalement être utilisé sans obtenir une ou plusieurs licences. C’est
pourquoi, l’appui pour le codage d’arithmétique a été enlevé du logiciel libre JPEG.
(Puisque le codage d’arithmétique fournit seulement un gain marginal sur le mode
Huffman non breveté, il est peu probable qu’énormément de mises en oeuvre le
soutiendront
La distribution IJG inclus autrefois le code pour lire et écrire des fichiers GIF. Pour
éviter la confusion avec le brevet l’Unisys LZW, l’assistance de lecture GIF a été
carrément enlevée et l’auteur de GIF a été simplifié pour produire “GIFs non
compressé”.
Cette technique n’utilise pas l’algorithme LZW; les fichiers GIF résultants sont plus
grands que d’habitude, mais sont lisibles par tous les décodeurs GIF standard.
Nous sommes dans l’obligation de déclarer que

“le Format (c) d’échange Graphique est la propriété de Droit d’auteur de
CompuServe S.A. GIF (sm) est une propriété de Marque de Service de
CompuServe S.A.”

RÉFÉRENCES
Nous vous recommandons fortement de lire une ou plusieurs de ces références avant
d’essayer de comprendre les entrailles du logiciel JPEG.
La meilleure introduction technique courte à l’algorithme de compression JPEG est
Wallace, Gregory K. “la norme de compression de Photographie JPEG”, les
Communications de l’ACM, avril 1991 (vol. 34 No 4), pp. 30-44.
(Des articles Adjacents discutent dans cette publication la compression d’image animée
MPEG, les applications de JPEG et des sujets semblables) si vous n’avez pas la
publication CACM pratique, un fichier de Post-scriptum contenant une version révisée
de l’article de Wallace est disponible sur le site: ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/
wallace.ps.gz. Le fichier (en réalité un pre-print pour un article qui a apparu dans la
transaction IEEE l’électronique grand public) omet les images exemplaires qui ont
apparues dans CACM, mais il inclut des corrections et matériel supplémentaire. Notez :
l’article de Wallace est le droit d’auteur ACM et IEEE et il ne peut pas être utilisé pour
des buts commerciaux.
Autre introduction au JPEG moins technique et plus simple peut être trouvée dans “le
Livre de Compression de données” écrit par Mark Nelson et Jean-loup Gailly, publiée
par M*T Réserve (New York), le 2ème rédacteur 1996, ISBN 1-55851-434-1. Ce livre
fournit de bonnes explications et l’exemple code C pour une multitude de méthodes de
compression incluant le JPEG. C’est une source excellente si vous êtes à l’aise en lisant
le code C, mais ne lisez pas beaucoup sur la compression de données en général. Le
code d’exemple JPEG du livre est loin de la force industrielle, mais quand vous êtes
prêts à regarder une mise en oeuvre complète, vous avez celui ici..
La meilleure description complète de JPEG est le manuel “La norme de compression
d’image fixe JPEG” par William B. Pennebaker et Jeanne L. Mitchell, publié par Van
Nostrand Reinhold, 1993, ISBN 0-442-01272-1. Valorisez en US$59.95, 638 pp.
Le livre inclut le texte complet des originales JPEG ISO (DIS 10918-1 et le projet DIS
10918-2). C’est l’exposition la plus complète de JPEG déjà existante et nous vous la
recommandons fortement.
La originale JPEG en elle -même n’est pas disponible électroniquement; vous devez
commander une copie version imprimée par l’ISO (l’organisme international de
normalisation) ou ITU. (á moins que vous ne trouviez le besoin de posséder une copie
officielle certifiée, nous vous recommandons d’acheter le Pennebaker et le livre de
Mitchell au lieu de celle -ci; c’est beaucoup moins cher et inclut beaucoup de matériel
utile.)
Aux Etats-Unis, on peut commander les copies originales des Ventes d’ANSI
(INSTITUT AMÉRICAIN DE NORMALISATION) au (212) 642-4900, ou des
Documents d’ingénierie globaux au (800) 854-7179. (l’ANSI ne prend pas de
commandes par carte de crédit, mais Global si.) Ce n’est pas à bon marché : comme
celui de 1992, l’ANSI facturait 95 $ pour la Partie 1 et 47 $ pour la Partie 2, plus 7 %
expédiant/manipulant. L’original est divisé en deux parties, Partie 1 étant la spécification
réelle, tandis que la Partie 2 couvre la conformité évaluant les méthodes. La partie 1 est
intitulée “la Compression numérique et le Codage d’images fixes de ton continu, la
Partie 1 : les Exigences et les directives” et a le document numéroté ISO/IEC EST
10918-1, ITUT T.81. La partie 2 est intitulée “la Compression numérique et le codage
d’images fixes de ton continu, la Partie 2 : la mise à l’épreuve de conformité” et a le
document numéroté ISO/IEC EST 10918-2, ITU-T T.83.
Quelques extensions au JPEG originale sont définies dans la Partie 3 JPEG, un ISO
original plus récent est numéroté ISO/IEC EST 10918-3 et ITU-T T.84. IJG ne soutient
pas actuellement l’extension de la Partie 3.
Le JPEG original ne spécifie pas tous les détails d’un format de fichier interchangeable.
Pour les détails omis nous suivons les conventions “JFIF”, la révision 1.02. Une copie
des spécifications JFIF est disponible sur :
Literature Department
C-Cube Microsystems, Inc.
1778 McCarthy Blvd.
Milpitas, CA 95035
téléphone (408) 944-6300, le fax (408) 944-6314
Une version de Post-script de ce document est disponible par FTP sur le site: ftp://
ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jfif.ps.gz. Il y a aussi une version de texte simple sur ftp://
ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jfif.txt.gz, mais il manque les chiffres.

Cette version particulière sera archivée comme
ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jpegsrc.v6b.ta r.gz.
Si vous n’avez pas d’accès direct à Internet, les archives de l’UUNET sont aussi
disponibles via UUCP; entrez en contact avec help@uunet.uu.net pour des informations
en récupérant ainsi des fichiers.
De Nombreux Sites Internet garde des copies de fichiers UUNET. Cependant, seulement
sur le site ftp.uu.net où il est garantit d’avoir la dernière version officielle.
Vous pouvez aussi obtenir ce logiciel dans le DOS – compatible au format archive “zip”
des archives de SimTel (ftp://ftp.simtel.net/pub/simtelnet/msdos/grap hics/), ou sur
CompuServe au forum d’assistance graphique (ALLEZ CIS:GRAPHSUP), la
bibliothèque 12 “Outils JPEG”. De nouveau, ces versions peuvent traîner parfois
derrière la sortie de ftp.uu.net.
La rubrique FAQ (LA FOIRE AUX QUESTIONS) JPEG est une source utile
d’informations générales sur la JPEG. Elle est mise à jour constamment et n’est pas
donc inclus dans cette distribution. La FAQ (la FOIRE AUX QUESTIONS) est postée
toutes les deux semaines aux groupes de discussion Usenet newsgroups
comp.graphics.misc, news.answers et d’autres groupes. Elle est disponible sur le World
Wide Web à http://www.faqs.org/faqs/jpeg-faq/et d’autres sites archives de
news.answers, y compris les archives officiel de news.answers du site: rtfm.mit.edu:
ftp://rtfm.mit.edu/pub/usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/.
Si vous n’avez pas de Web ou d’accès au FTP, envoyez le courrier électronique à mailserver@rtfm.mit.edu avec le sujet:
envoi usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/part1
envoi usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/part2

LOGICIEL COMPLÉMENTAIRE
De nombreuse observation et des programmes de manipulation d’image soutiennent
maintenant la JPEG. (Quelques-uns d’entre eux utilisent cette bibliothèque pour faire
ainsi.). La FAQ (la FOIRE AUX QUESTIONS) JPEG décrite ci-dessus inclus quelques
uns des visionneurs libres et partagiciel les plus populaires et vous dit où vous pouvez
les obtenir sur Internet.
Si vous êtes sur une machine Unix, nous vous recommandons fortement le logiciel
PBMPLUS libre de Jef Poskanzer, qui fournit beaucoup d’opérations utiles sur des
fichiers d’image au FORMAT PPM. Notamment, il peut convertir des images de PPM
dans et d’une vaste gamme d’autres formats, faisant ainsi le cjpeg/djpeg beaucoup plus
utile. La dernière version est distribuée par le groupe NetPBM et est disponible sur de
nombreux sites, spécialement celui-ci:
ftp://wuarchive.wustl.edu/graphics/graphics/packages/NetPBM/.
Malheureusement PBMPLUS/NETPBM n’est pas aussi portable que le logiciel IJG;
vous allez probablement avoir la difficulté de le faire fonctionner sur n’importe quelle
machine non-Unix.
Une différente mise en oeuvre JPEG libre, écrite par le groupe PVRG à Stanford, est
disponible sur le site: ftp://havefun.stanford.edu/pub/jpeg/. Ce programme est conçu
pour la recherche et l’expérimentation plutôt que l’utilisation de production; il est plus
lent, plus difficile à utiliser et moins portable que le code IJG, mais il est plus facile à lire
et à modifier. Aussi, le code PVRG soutient la JPEG sans perte, que nous ne faisons pas.
(D’autre part, il ne fait pas de JPEG progressif.)

DES GUERRES DE FORMAT DE FICHIER
Quelques programmes JPEG produisent les fichiers qui ne sont pas compatibles avec
notre bibliothèque. L’origine du problème est que le comité JPEG ISO a échoué en
spécifiant un format de fichier concret.
Quelques vendeurs “ont rempli les cases vides” tout seuls, créant des formats
propriétaires que personne d’autre ne pourrait lire. (Par exemple, aucune des premières
mises en oeuvre JPEG commerciales pour le Macintosh n’était capable d’échanger des
fichiers compressés.)
Le format de fichier que nous avons adopté s’appelle JFIF (voir RÉFÉRENCES). Ce
format a été approuvé par un certain nombre de vendeurs commerciaux majeurs JPEG et
il est devenu la norme de facto. JFIF est une représentation minimale ou “bas de
gamme”. Nous vous recommandons l’utilisation de TIFF/JPEG (la révision de TIFF 6.0
modifiée par la Note Technique TIFF #2) pour des applications “haut de gamme” qui
doivent enregistrer beaucoup de données supplémentaires d’une image. Le TIFF/JPEG
est malheureusement assez récent et pas encore très soutenu.
La prochaine norme JPEG partie 3 définit un format de fichier appelé SPIFF. SPIFF est
interfonctionnant avec JFIF, dans le sens que la plupart des décodeurs JFIF devraient
être capables de lire la variante plus commune de SPIFF. SPIFF a quelques avantages
techniques par rapport au JFIF, mais son défaut majeur est tout simplement qu’il s’agit
d’une norme officielle plutôt que informelle.
À ce stade il est peu clair si SPIFF remplacera JFIF ou si JFIF restera une norme de
facto. IJG a l’intention de soutenir SPIFF une fois que la norme est inchangeable, mais
nous n’avons pas décidés si cela devrait devenir notre format de production par défaut
ou non. (En tout cas, notre décodeur restera toujours capable de lire JFIF.)

La spécification du format de fichier TIFF 6.0 peut être obtenue par le FTP sur le site:
ftp://ftp.sgi.com/graphics/tiff/TIFF6.ps.gz. Le mode de gestion d’incorporation JPEG
trouvé dans la TIFF 6.0 spécifications de 3-juin-92 a de sérieux problèmes. IJG ne
recommande pas l’utilisation de la conception TIFF 6.0 (l’étiquette de compression de
TIFF 6). Au lieu de celui -ci, nous vous recommandons la conception JPEG proposée
par la Note Technique TTIF #2 (l’étiquette de compression 7). Les copies de cette notice
peuvent être obtenues sur ftp.sgi.com ou sur ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/. On s’y
attend à ce que la révision suivante des spécifications de TIFF remplace la conception de
JPEG 6.0 par la conception de Note. Bien que le code propre de l’IJG’S ne soutienne pas
le TIFF/JPEG, la bibliothèque libtiff libre utilise notre bibliothèque pour mettre en
oeuvre le TIFF/JPEG par la Note. Libtiff est disponible à ftp://ftp.sgi.com/graphics/tiff/.

Il existe plusieurs formats de fichier propriétaires avec compression JPEG. Nous
sommes peu ou pas contents de l’existence de ces formats. En effet, une des raisons
principales de développer ce logiciel libre devait contribuer à imposer la convergence
aux normes de format communes, et ouvertes pour les fichiers JPEG. N’utilisez pas de
format de fichier propriétaire!

SITES D’ARCHIVE

À REALISER

Le site “officiel” d’archives pour ce logiciel est ftp.uu.net (l’Adresse internet
192.48.96.9).
La version sortie la plus récente peut toujours être trouvée là, dans la liste d’adresses
graphiques/JPEG.

La poussée majeure pour v7 sera probablement l’amélioration de qualité visuelle. C’est
connu que la méthode actuelle pour mesurer les tables de quantification n’est pas très
bonne aux valeurs basses de Q.
Nous avons aussi l’intention d’examiner le lissage de frontière du bloc, “la

quantification variable du pauvre homme” et d’autres moyens de performance
améliorant “la qualité contre la taille de fichier” sans sacrifier la compatibilité.
Dans les prochaines version, nous envisageons de soutenir certaines des prochaines
extensions de la Partie 3 de JPEG --- surtout, la quantification variable et le format de
fichier SPIFF.
Comme d’habitudes, accélérer des choses a de grand intérêt.
Veuillez envoyez les rapports de bogues, les offres d’aide, etc à jpeg-info@uunet.uu.net.

■

Concernant la Bibliothèque de Référence de PNG

Les droits d’auteur des versions 1.2.6 du 15 août 2004 à 1.2.29 du 8 mai 2008 de libpng
appartiennent à Glenn Randers-Pehrson, Copyright (c) 2004, 2006-2008. Ces versions
sont distribuées conformément aux limites de responsabilité et à la licence de la version
1.2.5 de libpng - avec les personnes suivantes ajoutées à la liste des auteurs
collaborateurs suivants:
Cosmin Truta
Les droits d’auteur des versions 1.0.7 du 1er juillet 2000 à 1.2.5 du 3 octobre 2002 de
libpng appartiennent à Glenn Randers-Pehrson, Copyright (c) 2000-2002. Ces versions
sont distribuées conformément aux limites de responsabilité et à la licence de la version
1.0.6 de libpng - avec les personnes suivantes ajoutées à la liste des auteurs
collaborateurs suivants:
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Eric S. Raymond
Gilles Vollant
ainsi que les ajouts suivants aux limites de responsabilité :
Nous n’offrons aucune garantie que nos efforts ou cette librairie seront à la
hauteur des attentes de l’utilisateur, quelles que soient les utilisations envisagées.
Cette librairie est fournie en l’état, avec tous ses défauts. L’utilisateur assume seul
tous les risques liés à la qualité, aux performances et à la précision du produit.
Les droits d’auteur des versions 0.97 de janvier 1998 à 1.0.6 du 20 mars 2000 de libpng
appartiennent à Glenn Randers-Pehrson, Copyright (c) 1998, 1999. Ces versions sont
distribuées conformément aux limites de responsabilité et à la licence de la version 0.96
de libpng - avec les personnes suivantes ajoutées à la liste des auteurs collaborateurs:
Tom Lane
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
Les droits d’auteur des versions 0.89 de juin 1996 à 0.96 de mai 1997 de libpng
appartiennent à Andreas Dilger, Copyright (c) 1996, 1997. Ces versions sont distribuées
conformément aux limites de responsabilité et à la licence de la version 0.88 de libpng avec les personnes suivantes ajoutées à la liste des auteurs collaborateurs:
John Bowler
Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell
Magnus Holmgren
Greg Roelofs
Tom Tanner
Les droits d’auteur des versions 0.5 de mai 1995 à 0.88 de janvier 1996 de libpng
appartiennent à Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc, Copyright (c) 1995, 1996.
Les “Auteurs collaborateurs” correspondent aux personnes suivantes, dont les noms sont
repris à des fins de licence et de droit d’auteur:

Andreas Dilger
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
La Bibliothèque de Référence de PNG est fournie “tel quel”. Les Auteurs contribuables
et le Groupe 42, S.A nient toutes les garanties, exprimées ou impliquées, y compris, sans
restriction, les garanties de valeur commerciale et morale pour n’importe quel but. Les
Auteurs contribuables et le Groupe 42, S.A n’assument aucune responsabilité en cas de
dégâts directs, indirects, accidentels, spéciaux, typiques, ou consécutifs, qui peuvent
résulter de l’utilisation du la Bibliothèque de Référence de PNG, même si c’est informé
sur la possibilité de tels dégâts
On accorde par la présente que la permission d’utiliser, copier, modifier et distribuer ce
code source, ou des parties de ceci, pour n’importe quel but, de façon gratuite est
soumise aux restrictions suivantes :
1.

L’origine de ce code source ne doit pas être déformée.

Les versions Changées doivent être simplement marquées comme tel et ne doivent
pas être déformées comme étant la source originale.

Cet avis de Droit d’auteur ne peut pas être enlevé ou changé de n’importe quelle
source ou source de distribution changée.

Les Auteurs contribuables et le Groupe 42, S.A permettent précisément l’utilisation
gratuite de ce code source, comme composant et encouragent au soutien du format de
fichier PNG dans des produits commerciaux. Si vous utilisez ce code source dans un
produit, la reconnaissance n’est pas exigée, mais serait appréciée.

■

Concernant la bibliothèque zlib

Avis de Droit d’auteur
© 1995-2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
On fournit ce logiciel ‘comme tel’, sans aucune garantie explicite ou implicite. En aucun
cas les auteurs sont tenus responsables de n’importe quels dégâts résultant de
l’utilisation de ce logiciel.
On accorde la permission à quelqu’un pour utiliser ce logiciel pour n’importe quel but, y
compris des applications commerciales et de le changer et le redistribuer librement, en
respectant les restrictions suivantes :
1.

L’origine de ce logiciel ne doit pas être déformée; vous ne devez pas prétendre que
vous avez écrit le logiciel original. Si vous utilisez ce logiciel dans un produit, une
reconnaissance dans la documentation de ce produit serait appréciée, mais n’est
pas exigée.

Des versions source changées doivent être simplement marquées comme tel et ne
doivent pas être déformées comme étant le logiciel original.

Cet avis ne peut pas être enlevé ou changé de n’importe quelle distribution source.
Jean-loup Gailly
jloup@gzip.org

Mark Adler
madler@alumni.caltech.edu

Si vous utilisez la bibliothèque zlib dans un produit, nous apprécierions le fait que les
documents légaux à signer ne soient pas longs. Les sources sont fournies gratuitement,
mais sans une garantie de n’importe quelle sorte. La bibliothèque a été entièrement
écrite par Jean-loup Gailly et Mark Adler; ça n’inclut pas la troisième partie du code.
Si vous redistribuez des sources modifiées, nous apprécierions que vous incluiez dans le
fichier ChangeLog l’historique en expliquant vos changements. Lisez s’il vous plaît la
FAQ (la FOIRE AUX QUESTIONS) pour plus d’informations sur la distribution de
versions source modifiées.

Printed in Malaysia

WQ21730

RX-Z7
The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual.
Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi.

■ Front panel / Face avant

F G H I

MAIN ZONE
PURE DIRECT

MASTER
ON

ON/OFF

OFF

INPUT

AUDIO SELECT/
REC OUT

TONE
CONTROL

ENTER

PRESET/TUNING/CH

MEMORY

SEARCH
MODE

STEREO/
MONO

VOLUME
CATEGORY

INFO

BAND
STRAIGHT

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE
EFFECT

OPTIMIZER
MIC

VIDEO AUX
ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

VIDEO AUX

PHONES

HDMI IN

USB

PROGRAM
YPAO

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

AUDIO

OPTICAL

■ Remote control / Boîtier de télécommande

1
D
2

STANDBY

POWER

V-AUX

PHONO

DOCK

BD
HD DVD

DVD

MD
CD-R

CBL
SAT

DVR

VCR

TUNER

SIRIUS

USB
NET

POWER

MULTI

AMP

TV
SOURCE

5
6
7
8

SELECT

MACRO

MODE

ZONE

F
G
H

SYSTEM MEMORY

1
STATUS
TITLE
BAND

9
0

SETUP

PRESET/CH

VOLUME

MENU
SRCH MODE

CAT.
A-E

ENTER

SUBMENU
RETURN
MEMORY

PLAY INFO
DISPLAY
MUTE

K
L

REC

CLASSICAL
1
TAG
CLASSICAL
1

STEREO
5

LIVE/CLUB
2

PRG SELECT
ENTERTAIN
3

ENHANCER SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT
6
7
8

HDMI OUT
0

INFO

LEVEL

SLEEP
MUTE

TV VOL

TV CH

EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT
ENT
10

INPUT
PARTY

STEREO
5

MOVIE
4

AUDIO SEL
AUDIO

3D DSP

LIVE/CLUB
2

ENTERTAIN
3

MOVIE
4

ENHANCER SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT
6
7
8
HDMI OUT
0

M
N

O
P

Printed in Malaysia

WQ21710

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2008:09:23 11:44:01Z
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 7.0
Modify Date                     : 2008:09:30 10:40:58-07:00
Metadata Date                   : 2008:09:30 10:40:58-07:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 
Creator                         : 
Document ID                     : uuid:fc9b59cc-e1cc-478b-8c46-a878d6efcbe4
Instance ID                     : uuid:ce35220d-4f5d-477b-95f4-05ff8d857994
Page Count                      : 178

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Yamaha RX Z7 Owners Manual

RX-Z7 to the manual 54b4a914-5658-4178-9a5d-a3fa5a29b90e

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation